Home

SERVICE MANUAL FOR MODEL 902 AUTOMATIC ANALYZER

Contents

1. 9 12 9 ANALYTICAL MEHOTDS 9 1 Analytical Method Table Table 9 1 lists the analytical methods Table 9 1 Analytical Methods of Model 902 No Analytical Method Photometric Point Setting Condition Minimum Necessary Total Cell Blank Value Calculated Absorbance Remarks on Chemistry Parameters Screen Liquid Volume mL 1 1 POINT 0 0 0 S V gt 180 C C C 1 lt lt 35 2 t POINT with m 0 0 S V gt 180 poc prozone check 1 lt lt m lt 35 2 3 2 POINT RATE m 0 0 S V gt 180 1 lt lt lt 35 4 2 POINT END with m n p S V gt 180 C C m z A prozone check 1 lt lt lt lt lt 35 4 na x100 lt lt 35 5 3 First half 0 0 0 S V1 gt 180 C AA POINT test A 1 lt lt lt lt 35 Second m n 0 0 half test B 1 lt lt m lt n lt 35 6 First half 0 0 0 S V1 gt 180 1 lt lt lt 1 lt lt 0 lt 35 m n p q test B 1 lt lt lt lt lt 535 m 2 lt n p 2 lt q wa 7 RATE A I m 0 0 S V1 gt 180 8 RATE A with serum I m 0 0 S V1 gt 180 For routine Sample blank index measurement lt lt lt 35 2 lt Tn analysis compensable For 660 700 nm For 570 600 nm
2. 12 3 122 Check _____ _ ______ __ _ __ 12 6 Nerea 12 6 12 4 Seting ads 12 7 129 ua TCR 12 7 12 6 FIXING irae 12 8 12 7 Preparation TOF S Su 12 8 12 8 Operation after Turning On 12 8 129 Adjustment and Check of Each aue peus 12 9 12 10 Operation for Completion and Olhers 12 11 12 11 instalation Manual 12 12 T2 DE Gongur aio N a ea 12 12 12 11 2 Procedure for Installation of Product Program 12 13 I2 1 9 ala tete cuti 12 16 12 11 4 Procedure for Installation of Screen Information initialization 12 17 12 11 5 Procedure for Initial Setting of LCD 12 18 12 0 12 INSTALLATION 12 0 Analyzer unit unpack manual packing 24x120Wood packin 55x100X360Wood pac 25t Tick form Pedestals 22 Mothod of work G Take off the front ane board and the upper oo board of the
3. nun nu 1 5 OPON 1 5 Installation Condition S aa asss 1 6 aao E 1 6 Dioni zed Wale a 1 6 Analytical INSU OOS ad y uu a A 1 7 Accuracy Meth D PME aoe eee ae 1 7 AVA Em 1 7 System ME aCe MEM IMEEM DIEI D D 1 8 er 1 8 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 Overall System Configuration Principle Analytical methods Throughput No of analysis items Heaction time Measurable samples Application Test item selection Console type automatic analyzer with analytical and operation units integrated Discrete type random access single line multi analysis system entire reaction monitoring system Colorimetry absorbance measurement ion selective electrode method ISE option Colorimetry 200 tests hr Photometry only max 300 tests hr inclusive of ISE Colorimetry 36 ISE 3 Na Serum indexes 29 Calculation items 8 10 minutes max 3 4 5 10 minutes for concentration calculation same as Model 7070 7170 Serum or blood plasma and urine one sample kind per channel Emergency stat and routine analyses Via entry from operation panel entry from system interface entry from no of items settable 11 kin
4. 7 30 Maintenance FUNCTIONS uuu uu n yuyu unu uu amu aa Mac DU UR RR Edw RU RU 35 Jos Jihad p 7 35 7 36 7 5 3 Mechanism Check 7 37 7 41 7 5 5 Incubator Water Exchange 7 42 TO 7 44 75 7 Pholomieter 7 45 ua a 7 47 7 6 1 Screen Configuration of Model 902 Automatic Analyzer 7 47 7 6 2 Screen Transition Diagram 7 48 7 EXPLANATION OF FUNCTION 7 1 Timing Charts Routine Analysis plus Wash Time Chart 7 1 1 Routine Analysis plus Wash 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SEC 3 81 91 5 cell rotation 1 Reaction table 7 Stop 12 cell Stop Stop 14 2 32 rotation PCP check Discharge 25 lation 54 15488 103 13 5 i 14 7 17 3 180 Sampling mechanism into ce etergent aspiratio with wash 1 to 5 uL Wash 4 6 Wi position _ Holding Wash Wash 16 6 0 6 1 1 4 15 4 16 3 f 06 10 idm 15 bottom 120 126 S aspiration S syringe 1 to Sul 2 6f 13 2 53 5 8 0 Holding 14 6 14 9 16 6 liquid level 5 discharge Hemainger
5. 4 um x m 4 9 QUO 0 77 4 77 m 2 lt VE V I oem 9 b cUm 9 D AD v m m m Measurement Data result data t Alarm registration processing Measurem result data Real time RES list 10 samples NOTE 00 specification Start sample No MEE Final sample No w Vs FD Start of communication Initialization processing Transmission processing Positive response ma 9 9 69 Suspension request O 0 Reception processing ent EOFs TYY TTS Status monitoring request control o Format check Text generation processing Trace w Specific sample request RD w p mme b a w dump d dalle s dep 6 s s 0 s om om Ger Text selecting specification TS request list NOTE Data of up to 10 samples is stored in both ID and sample No modes 4 lt gt management Suspension processing Status transition Priority order
6. Sm 17134114 2 7 1 3 4 1 0 4 2 7 1 3 4 1 2 4 2 7 1 3 4 1 0 2 27134123 5 PC CONTROLLEH 6 SAMPLE TRANSFER Hi 7 ALARM UNIT 8 HOST monitor C 10 2 5 2 3 7 1 3 4 1 3 5 1456 Pasy 10 2 ECPU237 Board 1 Parts Mounting Diagram Given below is the parts mounting diagram of the ECPU237 board i G aa F P N 211 Es ta P ABORT SW _ Po as e LA B i oa WO RESET is lS rubra i fag E n for debugging O dS NUT m Pa DOS MBSICN RS232C x 4ch AUICN for Ethernet e ab adr 5 CIE pee rir elf diagnosis indicator LED SW onnector for battery boot I O setting 2 Explanation of Front Panel LED No Normal Name Color Meaning CPU is running in any other state than HALT Dimly lit Green assumes bus right according to transfer procedure pend BBSY on VEM is in assert state INT Request for interrupt is made to MPU Memory bus is busy Main memory is accessed FAIL Red CPU double bus WDT time up Extinguished DIAG Flickering Self diagnosis error Lit Boot error self diagnosis under execu
7. u u uD n e tua BIZ OSS OL 11 CROSS WIRING REFERENCE 11 1 Overall Wiring Diagram WASTE TANK WASTE LEVEL VACUUM TANK WASIL LEVEL VACUUM WASTE LEVEL COOLING AC LINE OPTION 100 V AC 27134122 lt L 2 37 1 3 41 2 0 27134121 STIRRER MECHANISM RINSE MECHANISM 3 7 1 3 4 1 1 1 pna EW 300 24 SERUM 2 7 1 3 4 1 2 5 SAMPLING MECHANISM REAGENT MECHANISM PWCN 1542340 1 8 3 9 0 5 0 ISE UNIT option MOTHER Brd SYRINGE SV2 110 R STRINGE SV3 PM PM TT e v 1 7 1 34 1 1 3 2 ISE SYRINGE SV16 1 27 UO one UD PI 2 4 lation PC CONTROLLER 27 1 PUMP MP 3 circulation 5 _ KA 2 PUMP MP 2 spare 6 SAMPLE TRANSFER EIE 3 PUMP 1 water supply 7 ALARM UNIT i m 4 PUMP VP vacuu
8. te NISI 2 elu LH gt F x L 35 24 25 Tt 36 pu 77 1 26 TL 37 azul RE it a ee 2 eee ee NE MK C EO co _ ca ellc a 8 ee SRM MEE r cca URN URN 43 prey j 33 L 44 T a U cc E ay gt dy qe uox t iue crecer ce epos Llc c eee I s ls WELL Len U i ss 7 9 48 7 1 7 Wash O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1860 eS 7 0 7 4 16 0 164 1 cell rotation Stop 1 rotatio n Cycle 1 to 50 Reaction table Sampling mechanism 0005 Hialkali aspirationgg _ gsHialkaliaspiratio 132 at W1 position 545 at W1 position 73 75 with wash gt 65 uL 65 uL 3 1 102 12 1 4 8 6 7 6 9 Remainder 13 8 Aspiration Z 65 uL Air 1 2 287 aspiration z spa Ion S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL Hialkali discharge ECT 2 and 3 S syringe SV2 OFF Only in S 159 h SV8 cycle 1 nozzle outside was PeP chek Dilution Upper dead point Dilution Upper dead point 0 0 2 12 2 Reagent dispensing 90 59 Hialkali 77 7 5 Wash 9o x3 Hialkali 127 143 us shy mechanism ds 728 uL oe Re i d 0728 7 a emainder Remainder ycle
9. Alarm Sub Control Alarm Category Level Description Remedy 2891 to POWER 71 1 STOP 15 V DC power supply is Replace the 15 V 2894 abnormal power supply 71 2 STOP 15 V DC power supply is Same as above 4 1 __ 71 3 WARNING 12 V lamp power supply is Replace the 12 V abnormal ______ power supply 7 4 STOP 5 V power supply is abnormal 5 V for other than e a 7 n 24VDG j ba 2911 FUSE 72 1 E STOP AC fuse has blown Replace the F3 fuse 2921 POWER 73 1 WARNING Power supply to Check power instruments interrupted 2 2941 to MOTOR 75 1 to 18 STOP Data cannot be written into Replace ECPU230 2973 CONTROL the motor controller 2991 to MOTOR 76 1 to 18 E STOP Motor operation was 1 Replace 3023 TIMEOUT abnormal Error has been ECPU230 detected in the time out check 2 Check the of motor controller mechanism which caused Sub code Motor _ alarm Reaction disk Sample disk Heagent disk Rinsing mechanism up down Sample arm up down Sample arm rotation Reagent arm up down Reagent arm rotation Stirrer up down Stirrer rotati Serum syringe Reagent syringe ISE syringe Unassigned GMCNT Unassigned d Alarm ne Category Sub Level Description Remedy code 3101 STANDARD 1 to 40 WARNI
10. Take off the upper packing and two L style packings Take out sloping board whick is enclosed package side and pedestals below analyzer unit board Drop wood packings E2H55XW100x L360 from both side to inside analyzer unit below Lay down three pedestals like illustration Set the sloping board on pedestals Adjust hight of the sioping bod to that of the Analyzer wait Utilizing slope take out the analyzer unit holding of it firmly the corners and carefully You may take panels composing Package as the occasion demands 12 2 12 INSTALLATION 12 1 902 Layout and Installation Conditions 3P receptacle Deionized water supply unit Water drain port grounded receptacle L E Piping 5 m long or less Power cable 5 m long 720 1000 more 100 or more 720 300 more f Available optionally e Installation Conditions 1 Space Instrument size 720 x 720 D x 1085 H 2 Weight Approx 190 kg 3 Power requirements 100 V 50 60 Hz 1 5 4 Power receptacle grounded receptacle If the receptacle is not grounded there must be a grounding terminal near it 5 Ambient temperature 18 to 30 C within 2 C variation during measurement 6 Ambient humidity 20 80 RH non condensing
11. J L On R HH 25 Nozzle 5 rinsing bath x 713 1078 26 Nozzle 6 with tip foraspiration 713 1081 1 HH 27 Nozzle tip with tip for aspiration 2729050 28 95497 S j H 29 09596 114111 ___ 2 _ _ 4 12 32 Cleaning wire 1 to 6 705 0516 _33 Taper Syringe 713 1331 For sample pipetter 14 ADJUSTMENT SPECIFICATIONS JEleelrical 14 1 14 1 1 DC Power Supply Adjustment and Checks 14 1 141 2 14 2 14 1 3 ADC Timing Adjustment a RO 14 3 14 1 4 Reaction Bath Temperature 14 3 14 1 5 Barcode Reader Switch Setting 14 4 14 1 6 Barcode Reader Positioning 14 5 14 2 Adjustment Disassembly Reassembly of Mechanisms 14 6 14 2 t OD a sedet estes uuu A ue 14 8 14 2 2 How t
12. Character mode 2000 bps bytes second Graphic mode 3 Sync system Externally fed strobe pulse 4 ACK BUSY signal 5 Input output level TTL level 6 Input output conditions e DATA 1 to 8 FEED INIT Vcc 4 7 SIB Vcc 4 7 a I 1000 PF BUSY PE ERROR Vcc s 4 7 IT NOTE Both Fanin and Fanout are set to 1 7415 or equivalent is connected on the host side and a pull up resistor 4 7 is provided in the final stage 15 12 15 4 4 Connectors Pin No Signal Name Pin No Signal Name 1 STB GND gt 29 GND Connector type 700 made by Fujitsu PC board e Power Connector Pin No Cable Color 65660 1 Red Back Connector type 810 3 Black PC board 4 Orange 15 13 15 5 Barcode Reader CCD system 15 5 1 Specifications Type BL 180 Reading direction Front type Light source and light receiving element LED and CCD image sensors Reading distance 33 mm 10 mm for narrow width 0 19 mm or more Reading bar width 0 125 to 1 0 mm Maximum readable label width 80 mm for narrow width 0 19 mm or more PCS value 0 45 or more reflectance of white 7596 or more Scan frequency 500 scans sec Compatible code CODE 39 ITF INDUSTHIAL 2 OF 5 COOP 2 OF 5 NW 7 CODE 128 JAN EAN UPC Number of reading digits 32 digits max Timing input No voltage input with without con
13. OI MONS aM uad uu MOM MOS 10 31 AGDIST Board 719 5002092 x asun quoque east sess 10 43 ASDIS Board 71935003 10 45 LOG AMP Board 707 5009 10 50 SE AMP BO are 707 0725 culus apna Du er e Dente tou 10 52 E SENSOR Board 707 5041 10 54 19 5004 uu u xu Fem t ie ble audet ivo 10 56 10 0 10 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS 10 1 Overall Wiring Diagram EA VASE LAvEL deiode 5 SV2 R SYRINGE 8V3 PM IS 1 3 4 SV16 PM UDP SYRINGE 1610 7600 P610 P600 FECE E SYRINGE J620 P620 i PUMP MP3 circulation PUMP MP2 spare PUMP MP1 water supply PUMP VP vacuum AC COOLING au OPTION UNIT 11 3 4 supr 100 V AC ow E 226 124 222 121 P25 1002 G P18 226 P2 P24 22 P602 27134108 27134108 2 7 3 4 1 2 2 2 7 1 3 4 1 2 1 3 7 1 3 4 1 2 0 s La 213 90 TRANSFORMER 1 5X 2 134107 37134111 1 SM 188 100 5 9 100 24 x L l K 4 t nea DC POWER UNIT MECHANISM 4 543470 18 3 9 0 50 few wees cen M M
14. rai SUNT i 34 12 16 D gt 1 i a GPCONT 1 DI BOARD 77 7 MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD J P511 J3 5 C F8 A39 MDIR2 V 12 J I Eds 107 3 Signal 31 a 13 17 tq gt 16 1 21 1 GPCONT 1 _ DI BOARD MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD OL LL DISK ROTATION HOME POS R DISK ROTATION COUNT S ARM ROTATION HOME POS pup 1 B 2 5 826 18 1 i i 4 t 3 E 3 B25 10 14 1 I 1 1 18 t 1 D GPCONT 2 DIBOARD MOTHERBOARD 200 BOARD 1 0521 B T 1 1 1817 101 a 822 9 5 5 2 14 j i 19 t 1 os GPCONT 2 DI BOARD MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD j p541 DM 45V iss t5V J2 12 ic pi mar t BI ud Seis A25 36 a gt B8 B8 18 i WE 1 Y 3 DI BOARD MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD LLE EH R ARM ROTATION HOME POS R ARM J P541 43 15Y s A24 MDIR2 51 MEN L 1 A23 s simu ur 1 if DI BOARD J P551 J3 5V B21 5V pepe 101 mum Signal R 8 V DI BOARD J P551 15Y 818 MDIRE 15V a is B16 8 4D 1 V DI BOARD 45V 5 GPCONT 3 MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD 19 2 IC F13 GPCONT A MOTHER BOARD 200 BOARD 15V J2 Ie T9 GPCONT 4 M
15. the grounding wire Remove the retaining screws and detach the unit 14 2 5 Stirring Mechanism Hemove the main unit cover the reagent arm unit Detach the stirring mechanism retaining screws and pull out the mechanism then remove connectors J560 and J561 14 2 6 Sample Disk Remove the main unit cover the sample disk support round plate Remove the S jacket Hemove connectors J510 and J511 Detach the retaining screws and remove the disk 14 9 14 2 7 Reagent Disk cooling unit Open the side panel L and drain water manually from the circulating pump intake header the main unit cover the table support Hemove the reagent jacket retaining screws Open rear plates A B and side panel R and remove cooling unit retaining screws and connectors While lifting the reagent jacket remove tubes and from the reaction bath then detach the cooling unit Hemove connectors J520 and J521 Detach the retaining screws and remove the disk Drain tube Circulating pump 14 2 8 Reaction Bath Open side panel L and drain water manually from the circulating pump intake header Remove the main unit cover Hemove the rinse mechanism for sample reagent and stirrer the reaction bath water level sensor Detach retaining screws and remove the bath 14 10 14 2 9 Rinse Mechanism 1 Remove the main unit cover 2 Det
16. Ary 4302 24V EE EH 360 4302 GND PRINTER E 4302 5V E 87 4302 DG C105 C106 C107 C108 C109 cec eee hd D 0 1u 0 1 9 14 0 14 0 50343502 2 GND RSDIST asp 2302 sy 260 7302 DG i MM 624 10 41 DRV Circuit 27135201 10 10 From DC SWR NUM 4300 sagi V zi 4300 24V2 x x 24V3 24V 4 24V5 x 24V6 EM LL TET 8 J307 24 V FAIL 26 Pind esas 2 41 CUR BRS s 24 L x x IC26 IC19 Output 500 T pus oC Hoe L 10 42 10 8 ACDIST Board BM 1 Explanation of Circuit Board This circuit board adapts the AC circuit part at the secondary side of the transformer and mounts alarm fuses and SSRs The board also mounts an AC DC converter for relay operation because the relay on the board is used in place of the breaker for operation turning on off power supply to other than cooling unit which was formerly arranged at the front of the instrument 2 External View AC DC converter Relay for power on off 150 ACDIST P N 713 5002 gt A 51 10 43 ACDIST Circuit Diagram iL 5 gt gt 5 z lt 1 2 ay 5 5 0 gt g N a a a eeu gt i id
17. i i nd 50 Incubator water supply SV4 OFF Not operated in cycle 50 Not operated in cycle 49 a Incubator heater ON Light source lamp ON Incubator water circulating pump MD 2 ON Incubator water drain 5 15 OFF Feed pump 1 ON D Oo Vacuum pump 1 ON 7 1 8 Photometer Check T M Photometer Check Time Chart 1 12 14 15 16 17 18 5 12 1 Cell rinse mechanism High low 0 1 1 concentration vacuum O waste solution SV14 ON In cycle 1104 2 High concentration MA PTT water drain SV12 ON ON _ Cell rinse SV11 E EE Trough blank SV9 LE 1 NN Heater photometer lamp ON Always turned ON Incubator water circulating pump MD ON 2 1 lt a shift Vacuum pump VP 1 5 11 9 1 Cell blank SV10 2 6 Cell rinse mechanism waste solution SV14 QN High low Cell rinse SV11 ADC Reaction disk 26 a shift AL th concentration vacuum OFF 15 19 17 0 12 wavelengths 5 cycles in total Time 1 min 30 sec req 7 1 9 Water Exchange Incubator Water Exchange 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 SEC J J 1 4 165 175 Reaction table Stop Rotation 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
18. 15 14 61216 T PERSE 15 14 muna u ana 15 15 15 6 MEE o c TTE TU ULT 15 15 Mark Gard z ug oD Described on separate sheet 15 0 15 OEM 15 1 DC Power Supply 15 1 1 5 V DC Power Supply Specifications 1 2 EWS50 5 Input conditions a Voltage 85 to 265 V AC or 110 to 330 V DC b Current 1 2 A 100 V AC input under full load 0 6 A 200 V AC input under full load c Efficiency 75 at maximum output power d Rush current 6 8 A 100 V AC input 13 5 A 200 V AC input e Frequency 47 to 440 Hz Output characteristics Protection circuit a b Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection Environment a Operating temperature a Rated voltage 5V b Maximum output current 10 0 c Maximum output power 50 0 W d Input fluctuation 20 mV e Load fluctuation 40 mV f Voltage variable range 10 Activated at 10 5 A and auto resetting Activated at 5 75 to 6 75 V and humidity to 50 C to 90 RH without condensation b Storage temperature and humidity 30 to 85 10 to 95 RH without condensation Vibration resistance Shock resistance 2 Gor less 10 to 55 Hz 2 G constant in each of X Y and Z directions for 1 hour 20 G or less 15 1 15 1 2 24 V Power Supply Specifications 1 2 Type
19. FEP tube i 5 5 F274152 15x04T 1 x 5 5 6 Tygon tube 83603 43 i G153001 3 17 6 35 a lt E s E rly Il t i I EN 4 1 n I I 4 I 1 H 1 A 5 Pt i L ee 1 lt 1 is ees Sol Bj 7 l 1 Waste 11 x I solution 115 H collecting 44 svi svii i tube 1 in HH N tl rly I 1 D i 131 c i ril B RH 10 rly I gt 1 Stopper ie pe vli gt 1 M 2 18 ET vacuum h th Reference electrode 0 26 igh H a s my solution PT vessel for high 111 concentration it 11 il waste solution i 5 9 SVA SV5 11 c ox rj H 5 EYS VES meme m 1 11 ai 1 56 i 1 I BY10 EYA a i Pressure reducing valve I 1 lt 8 M L d eres 5 10 sve n E Pump header 3 jn n B water 1 header 5 Vacuum vessel for LE s high concentration i PIA waste solution r SSS Heater p 0 Deionized water 1 supply t Wl Temperature controlled bath L J water circulating pump Suction h
20. ee ed 2 p rtg PIC TAT AT AT ATA Eh 4 parameters t 315 6 points Pept LO TAA ATA TA TC STD M pox tor 3d4 FULL OIOQOIOItQ X jJ j _ wed foGirioG LAB IO Tx er I SPIELT dnx ec 1 5700 ee P sr D T L TL L LL seson Tq TO GLOTGOLO TRB TOT T T d T gt oe fo ERES EXPONENTIAL 00 3 p 6 points te SIM ENGLIILIpcuac ql Ec mim TO TO or BERE ERE TAR o TUE ERES j X 16 DEM E Gps OE VK Pa EE a INA AMA E DN T SUNT _ 3 t0 6 points xd STD M fe eee lea TALL TOTOLOLOLOLO LO seh ee j NOTES 1 gt 1 point calibration with STD 1 alone 2 A Any one Necessary STD No depends on the input value for SPAN POINT on he CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen SPAN 1 calibration with STD M alone 3 SPANPOINT input value 2 10 6 on CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen 2 point calibration 4 a l b l c I and d are saved onto HD They will not be output to screen and logging sheet FULL Full calibration 5 N CALIB POINTS input value to 6 on
21. gt 10 13 10 4 EMOT200 Board 1 Explanation of Circuit Board The EMOT200 board is a mechanism control board mounting one GMCONT and eight GPCONTs which are one chip motor controllers hereafter referred to as MCU and conforming to the VME bus standard By mounting the MCU to the specified position on the EMOT200 board the MODE pin of MCU is set for function selection Each GPCONT controls two stepping motors The circuit board is provided with the watchdog timer function and when the CPU is abnormal all controllers are reset to prevent the mechanism from running out of control Number of Controls Each GPCONT can control two two phase stepping motors and accept four interrupt inputs limiter inputs for each motor Eight MCUs for 16 motors are assigned to the EMOT200 board as exclusive controllers for two phase stepping motors One GMCONT is equal to two conventional MTCONTs Namely each GMCONT can control sixteen D I s and D O s And eight D O s for which the timer is unprogrammable are available One GMCONT is assigned to the EMOT200 board The following table shows the number of controls by the EMOT200 board Number of Controls by EMOT200 Board GPCONT 2 phase stepping motor output 1 16 Limiter input 16 x4 GMCONT D O timer programmable 16 i D O 8 Other D O 8 bits CPUDI x 8 8 x 8 bits DI for DIP SW x2 2 16 bits 1 Phase output and power save signal 2 Switch for software setting 10
22. lt Se gt gt 5 5 5 UNS 14 1 Oo Q O O E O O Q 5 Ja T e 14 34 1 11 dh 11 33 _ 3 1 tz ajr t 2 1 2 14 J4 dq dd J4 44 150 7 Beg 0 vOzin MEN none sono Ajddns UP 7 je QE wOzir ROME E 3 exe ee 21 ES HMS OL 9 HMS LIP yun 3 Buioo2 Lv N lt gt 1 d b ons O nr m uondo 10 u 3A 100 115V 3A 230V7 F1 1 FS 10 44 10 9 RSDIST Board 1 Explanation of Circuit Board This circuit board interrupts distributes RS 232C signals of the ECPU237 and EMIO100 boards The board is provided with the current loop function for the host and permits changeover through DIP switch setting The board is also provided with an alarm buzzer whose volume can be adjusted with 2 External View Q 00 lt ey ard beard H JE 6 1 t1 y tow ananga oo a we E r 270 L 1 BBB H E B TEE 9 AU Buzzer volume adjustment Buzzer FG
23. 200 BOARD MOTHER BOARD 5 PROBE LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR S ARM ABNORMAL DESCENT DETECTION 5 PROBE LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR 5 ARM ABNORMAL DESCENT DETECTION lt lt w r 5V 15V r w s EE r e w ma E SENSOR BOARD dA DI BOARD 22 J2 B10 B10 2 H Al 80 n ei 21 IC 712 80 H 21 GPCONT 3 EMOT200 BOARD IC F13 GPCONT 4 EMOT200 BOARD 42 5 1 1 l LL i wa m gt 5 cn C B w lt gt on cn 5 _ 4 C t I lt x t lt mad Wa t a lt gt RINSE A29 18 U D P Signal if 12 ub 4 c gt a gt ca lt gt T t r ee d DI BOARD MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD J P561 J3 5 5V STIRRER BS MDIR3 12 12 t B5 H 18 N08 Eo HOME POS 3 i py 84 14 18 U 1 GPCONT 5 DI BOARD MOTHER BOARD 200 BOARD J P561 J3 15V ty IC B8 B3 MDIR3 91 J2 J2 STIRRER NN DX ie 108 ROTATION pun s Signal i mW 5 TEE 19 COUNT 5 DI BOARD MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOAR
24. time of initialization and resetting the RESET command is issued for the ADC controller d Number of integrations 1 time 8 5 7 Time Chart Routine plus ISE Time Chart 0 Reaction table Sampling mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 Reagent dispensing mechanism syringe H syringe SV3 nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism Stirring rod rotation Stirring rod outside wash SV5 Reagent disk Sample disk ISE sipper mechanism ISE syringe ISE syringe SV16 SV 17 KCI SV18 Pinch valve SV19 Cell rinse mechanism Concentrated dilute vacuum waste solution SV14 Concentrated waste solution SV13 Dilute waste solution SV12 Cell blank SV10 Cell inse SV11 Trough rinse SV9 without premeasurement of internal standard Cycle 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SEC 3 2 5 1 8 1 9 1 13 3 Stop Stop Stop 32 cell rotation 12 cell rotation 5 cell rotation 13 5 140 17 3 18 0 14 7 16 6 S aspiration 13 9 14 2 B 16 6 T 14 7 16 3 Air aspiration OFF OFF Upper dead point OFF OFF Upper dead point OFF OFF Y 13 6 14 0 Stop Rotation Stop Upper dead point OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 55 Stop at upper dead point Up Middle 0 7 1 5 01 1 4 1 9 2 5 3 1 ON ON OFF d 9 0 14 0 OFF ON 9 0 14 0 OFF ON 0 7 1 0 OFF ON 1 2 ON 22 OFF 0 3 0 6 ON i PCP check Routine
25. STIRRER U D P SYRINGE U D P R SYRINGE U D P j P561 13 Y 5V 89 MDIR3 ES opa ___ Signal i gp DI BOARD J P601 J4 15V ag LL 91 hlig w 2211 Sima i E ub DI BOARD j P601 J4 5 Bg MDIR4 tov ae 18 Signal i y m 3b DI BOARD 1 1 i GPCONT 5 MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD 5V 19 J IC B12 18 GPCONT 7 MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD 15V J2 12 IC 812 19 GPCONT 1 MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD GL HH WATER TANK FLOAT SW LOW LEVEL OVERFLOW VACUUM SW VACUUM TANK WATER LEVEL a Es e mel TR 2 4 t lt gt 1 9630 MDIR5 5 IC P7 S 18 White ege 5 gt TH E LIGUE 1 3 I Gra DIBOARD MOTHER BOARD 200 BOARD 5V 57 14 MDIRS 5V 12 1C FY IC10 DI BOARD MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD 5 1 642 n woins 81 5s ME 10 FT 110 8 EE 43 DI BOARD MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD 91 LL INCUBATION WATER LEVEL WASTE TANK WATER LEVEL 15V J P502 3 _ 1 V O J4 5 TV is 1610 DI BOARD MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD c GMCONT L P LE ALARM ACDIST BOARD J P456 SOURCE pa SW a 414 1
26. 24 VDC Takasago Vacuum tank evacuation ____ _______ ____ ___ ____ _____ ____ SD10BA 2A 00T 24 V DC ISE aspiration valve EUM Part No 713 0321 713 1059 713 1059 713 1379 713 1379 713 1379 713 1379 713 1379 713 1379 707 0290 713 0331 713 0331 713 0332 713 0320 713 0317 713 0324 713 0325 707 0327 3 2 Overall Piping Diagram 47141822 waste solution Vacuum vessel high concentration G153025 Silicone rubber tube Reddish brown g8 x 2T Silastic tube 153171 14 93 Insulation tube 3153062 3 4 inch x 3 8 inch Insulation tube 3153063 14 3 8 inch x 3 8 inch Vacuum swilch Rinse arm 0 __ Silicone rubber tube 0 8 47172098 Js 4 SV19 pinch valve ISE heat block ISE electrode X 4 o ISE sipper Joint inside am t ee E r lt probe 274158 Stirring rod 72 o c Junflon FEP tube 10x04T Light source j tube F275118 20 05 r Vacuum tank Air trap m em Vacuum pump s 8 w
27. 5 NNN NN i 9 nin lt a tn mio mu lt mo ooo m uw lt 5 5 oo aua wre lt aco aw mu undo au y lt EH MEE iua s ap C25 A26 826 C26 A27 B27 27 28 828 28 A28 B29 c29 MODESEL HOLD 055 050 051 052 EMO DIR STEP WDATA TRKO WPRT RDATA SIDE READY BR19 BR20 10 21 PDCN SYSRSTN ACFAILN um lt Q Q C O LO lt w e e TY e LO CN ere ANS ann nnn we an www no o m mo mo mo 4206 PWCN A13 813 14 814 C14 A13 815 C15 A16 816 cia A17 817 17 A18 cia A19 819 19 20 820 c20 A21 B21 C21 A22 822 22 A23 823 C23 A24 824 24 A25 825 C25 A26 826 C26 A27 827 C27 2 5 lt 9 o O O O O O O O D E D O O O D O O O O O O D E O S D O O O Q O Q 8 Q O O O O Q Q O Q Q D 5 O O E O E O O O O O Q e Q O O veces 32 a o e m a a 28 82
28. CO C C3 C C5 C Co cr 21 ted m fe c4 RI Co Ca o 33s o 4 CU cA Test 15701 5 2 TSTB TST84 TST85 15786 TST TST688 TST83 TST18 TST11 TST12 5 15 TST14 TST15 TST16 15112 15718 15719 28 5 21 TST22 TST23 13724 15725 15126 5 2 TST23 15129 TST38 15151 TSTS TST33 TST 34 TST36 Ha Pont 2 22 C C C CD CO C I c Test TST81 TST82 15185 15784 TST85 TSTB6 15787 TST88 15709 TST18 TST11 TST12 15715 TST14 TST15 TST16 TST17 T3T13 TST19 TST2D TST21 15722 15723 15724 15725 TST26 TST27 T3128 15723 15738 18131 18132 18133 TST34 135135 5136 Total 2 of Sampl Routine Stat Total Cu XJ CO CO sn uc Ca m Ca Number of analyzed samples Total number of tests 2 6 5 FD File Management Um wi Beg CRAM Data Capacity kb Usual operation 1 Routine sample Cumulative instrument data 0 8 Program 1 Search table ID 6 4 2 Remaining reagent volume 0 3 1 Application program 800 400 x 168 including character string 2
29. Replace the tube and perform ISE priming with reference electrode solution once Clean the waste solution drain path Clean the syringe and plunger and replace the seal piece Data Printer S V Slope abnormal Electrode preparation SLOPE PREP 15 This error is indicated if the mean potential is outside the following range at three of the five measuring points for each test on internal standard Na K 90 0mV x EAV x 10mV OK 90 0mV lt EAV lt 10mV 100 0mV x lt 180 0mV OK ISE 1 The slope level for display is within the following range Na K SLOPE 45 0mV Cl SLOPE gt 35 0mV Electrode response is degraded Carry over rate is as shown below Na 0 232 lt 0 160 lt Cl 0 490 lt Upon calibration the slope value is within the following range Na K CI 45 0mV lt Slope value lt 49 9mV or 68 1mV lt Slope value 35 0mV or 68 1mV x Slope value 39 9mV lt Slope value cont d Remedy oet reagent and perform ISE priming with reference electrode solution twice Replace the electrode and perform ISE priming with reference electrode solution once Retighten the nipple Or after replacing the rubber packing perform ISE priming with reference electrode solution once Confirm the proper combination of tube and reagent Plug i
30. Updating of screen information and product program 3 End End suspension of installation Press the 2 Screen Information System File key The next screen is displayed Installation Instruction Screen 1 Touch both ends of screen to dis play System Menu screen 2 Press Transfer Mode key oimultaneously press 2 touch switches at the corners of the screen The system menu is displayed The next screen appears 12 13 5 System Menu Screen System Menu Menu End Transfer Mode Maintenance Mode Press Transfer Mode key to enter transfer mode The next screen is displayed 6 Screen Information Transfer Screen Transfer Mode Tool gt PT Screen data XX kbyte During transfer the indication of memory capacity changes When the memory indication XX kbyte is cleared press Stop key Note not press the STOP key before or the full installation procedure inclusive 12 11 4 and 12 11 5 will have to be carried out The next screen is displayed 7 Waiting for Request to Initialize Flash Memory Flash memory will be initialized Are you sure Yes No Waiting for Request to Initialize Flash Memory Yes Execution of flash memory initialization No End suspension of installation Press Yes The next screen is displayed 12 14 8 Display of Flash Memory Initialization Flash memory is under initialization Display of flash
31. asesore 132 serso REF SHORT 134 HWINTEST 435 6 CHEM PARAM 13 CLB PARAM 43 139 0 PANEL tt CMP TEST 12 S INDEXES ONBOARD 146 CELLC O IREAGPOS 146 ISEC O t tt Alarm Category Level Description Remedy 1 to T STIRRER STOP In ascending action of the Check the upper dead stirrer it does not reach the point detector upper dead point on the rinsing bath side Alarm at the first upper dead point after resetting will be issued from other than the cell side 1 2 SIOP In ascending action of the Same as above stirrer it does not reach the upper dead point on the cell side 1 3 STOP In descending action of the Same as above stirrer it does not leave the upper dead point SIOP When the stirrer moves Check the home toward the rinsing bath it detector does not reach the rinsing bath position stirrer does not come to Check detector the cell position the cell side At resetting the stirrer does Check the home not reach the rinsing bath detector position home position in 15 return movement to the home position SIOP At resetting the stirrer does Same as above not leave the rinsing bath position home position in its departing movement from the home position
32. down Deviated from HP 29 6 1 7 0 7 4 HP Sipper syringe 2 6 6 36 6 Moved up 2 8 Sipper syringe SV3 ON Deviated SV17 upper dead point opp OFF KCI SV18 OFF Pinch valve SV19 OFF X p 06 234 3 0 Rinsing bath Deviated from 4 4 7 4 0 2 Moved up when not located Stirring rod rotation at upper dead point ON 4 3 7 2 Stirring rod outside wash 42 74 SV5 ON OFE 1 5 7 0 12 5 14 0 Sample disk 1 rotation 2 rotations 7 pitches HP 2 0 80 85 145 17 0 18 0 Reagent disk 1 rotation 2 rotations pitc HP TE 0 9 Cell rinse mechanism Moved up when not located at upper dead point High low concentration 15 P PCP check vacuum waste solution gt SV14 ON OFF ON e 2 0 7 0 igh concentration water drain SV13 OFF 2 0 7 0 Low concentration water drain SV12 ON OFF Trough aspiration 5 9 ce Celi blank SV10 OFF Cell rinse SV11 OFF ON CI c eu Light source lamp 12 V ON Temperature controtled water circulating pump MD 2 on Temperature controlled OFF water supply valve SV4 Feed pump MD 1 ON Vacuum pump VP 1 OFF ON Incubator heater ON Incubator water drain SV15 24 V ON 7 1 3 Cell Blank Measurement Time Chart 1 to PCP check 18 5 cell feed 30 5 cell feed gt P gt o m s x
33. sx VXWORKX2 Installation FD no 3 VOL None X L VXWORKX3 TBL 6801 TMCLOAD 1 V XT M2S M2G M2M X X X X X X 12 12 Contents of file Name of file to be installed Screen information 1 Screen information 2 Screen information 3 Screen information 4 Installation program Contents of file Model 902 product program 1 Model 902 product program 2 Contents of file Model 902 product program 3 Model 902 product program 4 Model 902 product program 5 12 11 2 Procedure for Installation of Product Program 1 2 Load the installation FD no 1 into drive 1 left FDD and turn on the main switch of the instrument The screen given below then appears If the screen given below does not appear if the space screen is displayed it is necessary to execute installation of screen information initialization with reference to 12 12 4 If the message Screen data is destroyed is displayed it is necessary to initialize the image memory Execute initialization of the LCD module memory Wait for 7 min The program is loaded and the next screen is displayed Display of Installation Menu Screen Installation Menu 1 System File Only 2 Screen Information System File 3 End Waiting for Selection of Installation Function 1 System File Only Updating of product program alone 2 Screen Information System
34. tatus oue til tas Scat a una See section 11 amp oee section 12 5 ISE 5 1 Functional Specifications of Model 902 ISE Item Measurable samples Measuring temperature Throughput Measurement system Data accuracy Measuring concentration range Maintenance Sampling Printout Serum urine blood plasma 35 2 Continuous measurement Dilution to 1 50 Data reproducibility Data accuracy Serum Rinsing operation priming Potential measurement Upon simultaneous request for photometry and ISE Upon independent request for ISE Specification 100 samples hr max Sample volume 10 uL Dilution volume 490 uL Simultaneous reproducibility Serum CV lt 196 30 Urine CV lt 296 Normal standard serum 51 5 mmol L K 0 1 mmol L Na 80 180 mmol L K 1 5 to 10 mmol L 60 to 120 mmol L Na Cl 10 to 250 mmol L K 1to 100 mmol L Kind Daily Method Automatic pipetting from sample Internal standard reference electrode solution Measurement of electromotive force of in stand by status Priority given to ISE for calibrator routine sample and control sample Data printed out immediately after calculation 5 2 Outline of ISE Unit Sample disk Sample rinse solution Reaction disk SIP nozzle 5 THX Reagent disk oipper syringe Re
35. u 5 e 1305 CN2 10 P7 WASH QT 118 1007 ee i 653 J314 f t24Y x CELL ms 1305 CN2 IC FT ASPIRATE x Tex J 1087 ee ree om qu CE DRV BOARD _ EMOT200 BOARD 2 C 0c CELL BLANK WATER CELL WASH DILUTE WASTE CONC WASTE J P653 J314 12 B 8 651 1314 i di J P651 J314 CX B10 J P654 J314 I 812 HAY Q7 1018 DRV BOARD i 24 07 1018 11 12 ES DRV BOARD B 24V 0g 1618 M S B DRV BOARD 2 WAY 08 1618 082 1 PT e GMCONT qaam IC FT lt w lt gt m n N8 3 1607 ee a 4305 CN2 IC p i 1007 A GMCONT J305 x CN oe 1007 GMCONT m EMOT200 BOARD lt c 3 Le J P651 1314 11 158 us VACUUM 08 1018 1 1007 wm ET r lt 1 9654 194 Ra x 24 05 CN2 INCUBATOR 5449 21 10 11 98 1018 1 i 1067 DRAIN m w smmP DRV BOARD EMOT200 BOARD aT m Es nn n I A 2 gt J P456 J302 1024 1622 1020 10 11 E 5V 6 16 LED 5 lt 9 r C B6 19 lt mmm ttd LED BOARD DRV BOARD EMOT200 BOARD CO aaa wr W s
36. 4 4410 10 47 BARCODE READER DELIV SYSTEM TXD 1 RXD 1 RTS 1 CTS 1 RXD 2 RTS 2 CTS 2 RSDIST Circuit 27135203 3 4 8850 34 170 RDED 8SE 10407 TR TW m J408 4 AC om 4408 6 x 95 TXD HXD RTS rr a ST A F SY Ye 9 CTS SG 10 48 OPE PANEL OPE PC TXD 3 RXD 3 RTS 3 CTS 3 TXD2 RXD 2 RTS2 CTS2 8850 34 170 4408 4408 4408 O J408 34 RSDIST Circuit 27135203 4 4 10 49 055306 lt RDBD 25PE 20 4401 E M CTS SG TXD RXD RTS CTS SG TICKET PRINTER TICKET READER 10 10 LOG Board 1 Explanation of Circuit Board This circuit board consists of a multiplexer output buffer and 12 channel circuit for LOG conversion of photoelectric current from the detector 2 External View pe CAUTION er HES Tells ig 110 S 10 50 LOG 340 405 450 480 505 nm 545 nm 570 nm 500 nm 660 nm 100 nm 750 800 nm P Circuit Diagram s 205 4 Ji R40 45V 5 205 Ag R25 22K 103 n3 7
37. EE Resending Host side Text Control message Control b message 19 Analytical data Gua Communication controi Buisseoojd Test selecting specification Buisseoo4d i TS f information Test selecting information and comment Registration gt processing Sample ID Barcode reader 16 12 4 ASCII Code Tables Table 16 31 7 Bit Roman Character Code Set 0 gt 3 gt x gt DC DC DC DC Ir o LL 5 2 c c 2 2 us us ud F F WE ee 14 15 IS US S _ SP is not printed actually NOTE 16 60
38. ON OFF 9 0 14 0 ON 9 0 14 0 OFF ON OFF 12 22 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON 1 Aspiration of rinse solution at W2 position 24 uL Reaction table Sampling mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 Reagent dispensing mechanism R syringe R syringe SV3 R nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism Stirring rod rotation Stirring rod outside wash SV5 Reagent disk Sample disk ISE sipper mechanism ISE syringe ISE syringe SV16 SV17 KCI SV18 Pinch valve SV19 Cell rinse mechanism Concentrated diiute vacuum waste solution SV14 Concentrated waste solution SV13 Dilute waste solution SV12 Cell blank SV10 Cell rinse SV1 1 Trough rise SV9 Incubation bath water supply SV4 Incubation bath heater Light source lamp Incubation bath circulating pump MD2 Incubation bath water drain SV15 Feed pump MD1 Vacuum pump 1 ISE Wash Time Chart Cycle 4409 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SEC 3 2 5 1 8 1 9 1 13 3 Y Stop Stop Stop 32 cell rotation S discharge 25 Wash _12 cell rotation 5 cell rotation 13 5 14 0 173 PCP check 10 uL 2 8 4 7 Noe Y 14 7 16 6 0 6 1 9 29 35 Air discharge Aspiration 2 m 1 64120 13 9 142 B S discharge Remainder discharge 10 9 11 2 Ju 147 159 92 28 4 3 Air aspiration Air aspiration Sampl irati 11 5 12 4 aspiration OFF
39. USE fei Specifications Item Recording capacity e When unformatted e When formatted 256 bytes Sector 512 bytes Sector 1024 bytes Sector Recording density Track density Total number of cylinders Total number of tracks Recording method Recording medium Rotational speed Data transfer speed Mean rotation wait time Access time e Mean access time e rack to track transition time e Settling time e Turnaround time Motor start time max 15 3 FDD YD 702D 6539D 021051 2 0 MB Mode 2 0 Mbytes Capacity Number of sectors 1474 6 kbytes 18 17434 bits inch 135 tracks inch 80 cylinders 160 tracks MFM 2HD 300 r min 500 kbits s 100 ms 94 ms 3 ms 15 ms 4ms 0 55 19 54 15 3 2 Interface Connector Pin Arrangement for Interface Return Pin No Signal Name 1 MODE SELECT a w DRIVE SELECT 0 11 DRIVE SELECT 1 15 MOTOR ON 17 DIRECTION SELECT 21 WRITE DATA 23 WRITE GATE 25 TRACK 00 27 WRITE PROTECT 29 READ DATA 31 SIDE ONE SELECT NOTE 3 indicates a key pin Connector Pin Arrangement for Interface OO Connector for OQ O interface OQ Pin 2 Pin 34 Pin 1 Pin 33 Connector Pin Arrangement for DC Power Supply Pin No Power Supply Specification 1 5 2 5 V RETURN 3 5 V RETURN 4 NON CONNECTION 15 8 15 3 3 Electrical Specifications F D interface signal F D Interface Driver receiver Host system Final drive 5 V 7438 or equival
40. gt unco VP ON P 9308 O 9 ASO 508 SSR 3 DO bit 1 VP 1620 ia MP1 ON P J306 Q4308 8884 DO bit 2 lt MP 1 2 J306 O gt 4308 5585 DO bit 3 5 2 1020 1025 MP3 ON P 9308 QAJ Dae 8624508 5586 DO bit 4 3 v 1 24 9308 O lt gt gt 7 4308 SSR8 DO bit 5 Spare Heat eater gt Control ESQ 0229 5 Diseno ON N Heater S J306 4 x Y A8c 4308 pare m 322 SV t T BE 7308 x 7306 9308 4306 508 J308 Fuse ALM J308 ere to DI Brd 4307 Fuse ALM 9307 POWER SW 4307 SWSTATUS y IC24 1024 12 V 10 40 DRV Circuit 27135201 9 10 T Cig to Mother Brd F1 24 5103 SLOT 30084 m C100 130 T MANN us 1 J300 O 412 430 7300 84 E AZ 154 X F2 29 5103 F mum Le 101 so pe Mois 593 43000 4 2394 No 4 9300 4300 ion SLOT 23000 862130 Nos C dis Jo taa 9 s30 8 430 1304 87 930 pon 250 890 9304 A107 301 G 9300 O 10 931 431 R161 IC s Exec ade 0307 to Dr Br e 1 DI Bra R162 ie FDDSV 3302 5V 9302 57122 4434302 1 5 V F 40 4302 DG ep 24V6 50 9302 24 uo 02 GND
41. kh ee F10 T ume ain 1 _ T PL oo i gt SE a ar Tn FU P Is 5 yl p o 9 4 mat tos RCM ud Fere MATRA Pc gy n g taf FL 07 RD 8 Dea usa dt mn tt e 390 CX MS b 8 ww P mE co 4h _ ee at a 5 285 xL m gt m e 2 css get 124 5 w K _ b 4p PS ap ca 0 LN 5 AEN C deem Ces F8 r1 at col a 9 JF Css 94 Hi 0 un 2 dt 4 208 wet A C E d 4 Li 3 0 mw wr L zt n 4 4 LELETET TETES ti 1 4 14 1 4 6 1 253 4 t t 0 o4 d TIT T mu pa gt 53455 82282 HE HE 22 yter F9 10 Reaction Disk Mechanism 9 Stirring Mechanism R1 4 R2 3 8 Reagent R1 4 Sampling Mechanism 9 Rotation motor 8 4 Motor and Detector Position 2 3 H1 home position detector rinse bath 2 8 Abnormal descent detector 3 Rotation 14 Upper dead point detector 1 Rinse Mechanism 25 R2 home position detector
42. A13 3 17 BEI 58 UP DOWN 5 08 17 B6 5 M2 127 MED 1 ip 15 lag 41160 10 612 GPCONT 8 PPP wr E DRV BOARD EMOT200 BOARD 20 M 1 9655 34 x IS 1306 T 1019 E eM VALVE IC 65 A 9 Pundit O O 1 2655 1314 KCL 241 1306 x oe VALVE 09 _ 1619 J fes C H5 Q e m w m F A OPE 1 658 1314 x x ISE 1306 PINCH Q9 1019 VALVE mj h cu re d ee DRV BOARD EMOT200 BOARD 4 Ca lt w 52 S xj ES ISE ARM U D P ISE SYRINGE U D P ISE SYRINGE VALVE J P571 J3 15Y V MDIR2 757 BERE LU Signal a N Y DIBOARD J P621 J4 5V 83 MDIR4 15V NES Q 109 EM Signal 13 1 6 20 I 1 DI BOARD s lt lt w 1 9620 1313 24V ree DRV BOARD lt gt lt GPCONT 5 _ MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD 15Y T 1 GPCONT 8 MOTHER BOARD 200 BOARD 1306 one TRE IC H5 ib FI GUCONT EMOT200 BOARD toV 12 IC B10 x a 12 INSTALLATION 12 0 Analyser unit unpack 12 1 12 1 902 Layout and Installation Conditions
43. Evasion of reagent carry over due to reagent probe and washing for evasion 1 Condition for carry over evasion When the evasion of reagent carry over due to reagent probe is set it is attempted at first by changing the reagent sampling sequence test sequence If this method is unusable carry over evasion by washing is executed That is when the sequence of pipetting reagents R1 to R3 with the reagent probe matches the specified pattern carry over is prevented by 1 to iii below In ii and iii throughput is degraded 1 For avoiding the relevant pattern channel registration is changed for a different test within the test sequence of the same sample ii When step I cannot be taken a channel is registered after reagent probe washing cycle iii Cell is made blank and the system waits till deviation from the specified pattern Il Method of carry over evasion The reagent probe is washed by aspirating detergent detergent 1 or 2 or system water distilled water for washing the inside of probe and discharging it into acell At this time the stirring rod is also washed in that cell I Carry over evasion specified pattern The patterns for which the evasion of carry over between reagent types is specified are listed below gt ALL indicates that evasion is required all types of R1 R2 and ALL represents 3 reagent types for 3 reagent system and 2 reagent types for 2 reagent system
44. Input conditions a b c Voltage Current Efficiency Rush current Frequency Output characteristics a Mu b C d e N Rated voltage Maximum output current Maximum output power Input fluctuation Load fluctuation Voltage variable range Protection circuit a b Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection Environment a Operating temperature and humidity Storage temperature and humidity Vibration resistance Shock resistance EW 5300 24 85 to 132 V AC or 170 to 265 V DC 7 0 A 100 V AC input under full load 3 5 A 200 V AC input under full load 82 at maximum output power 25 A 100 V AC input 50 A 200 V AC input 47 to 440 Hz 24 V 14 A 336 W 96 mV maximum input to minimum input 144 mV no load to full load 20 Activated at 14 7 to 18 2 A and auto resetting Activated at 30 0 to 34 8 V to 50 C 30 to 90 RH without condensation 30 to 85 C 10 to 95 RH without condensation 2 G less 10 to 55 Hz 2 G constant in each of X Y and Z directions for 1 hour 20 G or less 15 1 3 12 V Power Supply Specifications 1 2 Type Input conditions a b c Voltage Current Efficiency Rush current Frequency Output characteristics a Mu b C d e N Rated voltage Maximum output cur
45. R2 H1 R2 gt R2 R2 R2 R1 R1 gt R3 R1 R2 R1 R1 IV Registration of carry over evasion specified pattern Up to 40 kinds of patterns for which the evasion of carry over due to the reagent probe is specified can be registered V VII Probe washing cycle Probe washing employs one 1 machine cycle Within one machine cycle the specified detergent system water placed on the reagent disk is aspirated in the specified volume and discharged into the cell at the same timing as for reagent aspiration and discharge Measure for ISE Of the reagents for ISE the internal standard solution and diluent are applicable to carry over evasion Carry over evasion cannot be specified for reference electrode solution Specification from screen From the screen the following need be specified a carry over giving test and its reagent type R1 R2 R3 a carry over receiving test and its reagent type R1 R2 R3 detergent set position on the reagent disk and detergent volume An example of specification is shown below GPT 1 LDH 4 88 350 Carry Reagent Carry Reagent Detergent set position Dicen Over 1 to 39 ISE excluded discharge giving test 1 81 receiving 1 R1 1 to 36 39 15 volume CH1 to 36 2 82 test 2 R2 allowed 50 uL to 3 R3 CH1to 3 R3 MT ei oystem 350 uL 36 ISE water ALL Examples of evading procedure Example of Car
46. gt Expect Ha Instr Fact amp b LomP Limit Value Settins Calculated Test Test Name Formula Test BH Test Factor a Factor b gt ExPect UaluetH Test Tezt Hame Formula Test A Test B Factor a Factor b Parameter 35 11 30 17 472 Ho lt Ghemistry gt 1 Test Hame 2 Assay Code tMthd gt 5 Assay CodetTest 4 Reaction Time 3 Assay Point 1 6 Assay Point 2 Assay Point 3 Assay Point 4 9 Lens SUB 18 Wave Lena MAIN 11 Samele Volume 12 Ri Volume 13 R1 Pos 14 R1 Bottle Size 19 R2 Volume 16 R2 Pos 12 R2 Bottle Size 18 R3 Volume 19 R3 Pos 28 Bottle Size 21 Calib TsretTure 22 Calib Tsretllsht 25 Calib Conc 1 24 Calib 25 11 Conc 26 Calib Fos 27 Calib Conc 28 Calib Pos 29 Calib Conc 3B Calib 3l Calib Conc Lalib Pos Lalib Conc 34 Pos 51 ABS 35 Factor 7 2 Factor 38 K3 Factor 39 K4 Factor 48 5 Factor 41 A Factor 42 B Factor 45 C Factor 44 SD Limit 45 Limit 46 Sens Limit 47 SLABS Limit Ld 48 SIBBES Limit H 49 HRES Limit DzI Prz Limit 92 Prz Limit iUzD 5 Point 34 ExrPect UalueacL ao ExrFect UaluecH 26 Instr Fact a ar Instr Fact b
47. 10 11 12 13 4 _ 14 15 16 v Connector Table 4 amp cO 10 27 28 29 30 31 32 VME Bus Connector Signal Table J1 J1 P1 VME BUS B o O VME standard not used on this board NC Negative polarity VD8 P VD9 P VD10 P VD11 P VD12 P VD13 P VD14 P VD15 P GND VSYSFAIL N BERRON SYSRESET N LWORD AM5 P VA23 P VA22 P VA21 P VA20 P VA19 P VA18 P VA17 P VA16 P 15 P VA14 P VA13 P VA12 P VA11 P VA10 P VA9 P 12 V 5 lt VME Bus Connector Signal Table 42 J2 P2 VME BUS amp F D B _ VA 28 VA 20 GND iS 7 70 22 gS HOLD INDEX N DS1 N EMO N STEP N GND WE N GND SIDE N GND GND GND GND 5 5 GND GND 10 3 100 Board 1 Explanation of Circuit Board This circuit board is connected to the VME bus and has the following functions EEPROM 4 Mbytes 16 bit ADC 4 channels for photometry main sub ISE temperature Temperature control Serial communication RS 232C x 4 channels Printer control IPRNT95 Buzzer control programmable oscillator 2 External View EEPROM G P N 271 3786 ga t15 a GE T
48. 4 Wash 4 R1 149 17 5 179 Reagent dispensing 1 1 2 0 Naspiration 5 0 6 0 63 7 1 Naspiration mechanism PO 6 3 B 9 1 4 4 d 09 15 4 0 so 60 66 Airaspiration 101 111 117 Airaspiration 158 169 17 9 syringe 1 4 5327 4 2 73 75 91593 1 16 917 1 Remainder Remainder 2 A1 Remainder Un discharge 2224 discharge dn 9 0 discharge discharge ying 1 charge C olONl 7 0 aspiration 113 ON T aspiration 08 18 5 9 6 9 11 0 4 R nozzle outside wash SV6 ON ON ON 0 9 5 0 1 Reagent dispensing 4 Wash 16 gt Wash 9 710 iF Wash 1767 mechanism 1 1 System water 6 2 ystam water 11 3 System water 09 1 5 discharge 50 60 66 discharge 401 111 11 7 aspiration 17 9 R syringe 4 5 20 2 4 0 4 2 4 5 8 0 9 1 9 3 4 5 16 9 2 8 5 3 6 0 11 4 158 168 1 27 4 5 6 70 7 8 9 6 11 3 14 syringe SV3 ON ON ON ON ON 155 ON 17 5 0 85 Xa 2 6 48 5 9 e TX 9 9 11 0 14 4 154 17 8 R nozzle outside wash SV6 ON 3 2 SES 4 10 9 11 i 131 168 Stirring mechanism 63 sing y ash vetri Wash NT 6 12 0 4 12 5 Stirring rod rotation ON 4 18 Stirring rod outside wash 3g E 8 9 9 SV5 N ON 22 5 0 73 127 15 0 17 9 Reagent disk Rotation Stop Rotation Stop Rotation Stop 2 8 3 4 7 5 1 85 80 104 11 7 12 1 13 6 14 0 1 pitch feed Sample disk i Stop 10 8 Stop 10 5 11 6 Rotation le pi er dead point Call rinsa m
49. 43920 gt 4505 Liquid Level SICAL ur 14 1 Detection U D P N 1 WE ee Spore sonj JIA Spore JIC AB LL 33028 Spore 350 l 136 Spare TR SZ 10k 8 8049 5 4 MDIR3 6 OND BR4 10k 10k 12 11 BX8049 MDIR2 6 GND BX8049 MDIR2 8 8 8049 MDIR2 BY QNO 8049 MDIR2 5 GND BX8049 MDIR2 5V GND BX8049 MDIR2 5 GND 8049 MDIR2 6V GND BX8048 MDIR2 5 BX8049 MDIR3 BY GND BX8049 MDIR3 5 CND 8 8049 MDIR3 BY OND 14 5V 5V 5V IC 84 92 KAO AS O J2 8980 J2 c7 42 ns LUC AB C J2 IC8 depo o V IC8 11 V ICB B gt O 12 O V IC8 4 Q Z GP 1 13 GP1 M1 L2 GP1 M1 L1 GP2 M1 L1 GP3 M0 L1 M1 L1 GP3 1 12 GP3 M1 L3 GP6 0 11 10 27 127135200 3 5 Ircul DI C 5V Fall AC Fuse ALM from Driver SWSTATUS from Driver 24V ON N DISABLE to Driver Sample Syringe Reagent Syringe s rings Water Tank Float SW Upper Level Water Tank Float SW Overflow Vacuum SW Vacuum Tank Water Level Waste Bottle Upper Level J4 820 BR5 10k
50. ERBEN Mechanism Check 5 Displayed upon input of STOP key Reconfirm Stop Displayed upon input of START key Measurement end time Start Conditions RE 7 6 2 Screen Transition Diagram Civar Kinney Heart Sample 1 35C1 400 7 18 19 Sample 10 1234567890123 4 516 2 3 1991419 10 profi teste Perte ite STAT Test Selection 1189 31 touch Profile then Start Liver Kindney Heart Lipid Stat T 7 Start Condition No 141 400 Sample 10 Position No LAN Ws TT Semple 10 123456789012519 1 110 V TA 9373 Accept Stop JY IP STOP R DISK TOP 001 01 10 01 uro R F5 STOP 37 0 95 12 25 10 25 Printer Standard Printer Host Com Off fF 37 0 4095 12 25 10 25 1 Special Remarks STAT emergency key Start condition key Maintenance Status y Wash Firaseters ic ca Check Trace Yost Sumsary 8 702088 pee 21 Select the next screen if two or more screens are available Returns to the opposite direction of the arrow Routine Result Disp 718 9 First 161 400 First 141 400 Last No 41 400 Routine Result Send First 141 4005
51. Examples of Reaction Time Course R 2 to 4 antigen readded Cell blank Time 2 point assay with prozone check Cell blank R 2to4 C C4 Test 3 Test B SC A3 hemolysis R 22104 Cell blank Cell blank Test A Ca Rate assay SC Lipemia Test B SC measurement SC Hemolysis measurement SC Reaction Icterus lev measurement SC limit level A2 lipemia Time Rate assay with serum index measurement Rn 2to4 Cell blank ero Test A SC Test SC Reaction limit Test SC level of test A SC Reaction limit E ZE level of test 69 Rate B twin test assay mode 1 Rate B twin test assay mode 2 Fig 9 1 Examples of Reaction Time Course 9 2 Types of Calibration Table 9 2 lists the types of calibration Table 9 2 Types of Calibration Type Linear method Abnorbance Standard solution 1 2 point linear Standard solution 2 LINEAR STD 2 NOTE 2 A o 1 Z Ci Cx C2 NOTE3 4 K factor method Absorbance Standard solution 1 1 ABS 1 point linear K input value LINEAR O 5 5 5 3 NOTES 1 STD 1 Absorbance or absorbance change rate of standard solution 1 STD 2 Absorbance or absorbance change rate of standard solution 2 STD 3 Absorbance or absorbance change rate of standard solution 3 STD 4 Absorbance or absorbance change rate of standard
52. GMCONT EMOT200 BOARD Z Ll J P600 3313 Eee Hed Al 1 B12 LA m __ Q1 1615 1304 CNI IC G10 S SYRINGE H 2 1 7 13 B13 A26 9 11 57 0 A3 9 8 3 17 B12 A24 5 15 59 NET p NEM E EE 83 11 12 5 15 A12 A23 3 17 6 GPCONT 7 DRV BOARD EMOT200 BOARD J P610 J313 16 011 812 Bn d UP DOWN B6 16 4 45 RT pe rm ee wF oe DRV BOARD e e lt 200 BOARD 8 LL REACTION DISK ROTATION HOME POS REACTION DISK ROTATION CELL COUNT REACTION DISK ADC START a xa c c r s aar r m s ama a me t Fa oo m er eee sr am a ar m ONE SHOT 18 BE 8 4p DBLAY DI BOARD 18 I MOTHER BOARD lt lt eee s T9 eee m IG 810 GPCONT 6 Se ee EMOT200 BOARD IC 83 9 IC 610 x G A EM3 EMOT100 BOARD 6 S DISK ROTATION HOME POS S DISK ROTATION INSIDE COUNT S DISK ROTATION OUTSIDE COUNT 433 MDIR2 TSV pti utm 18 Signal i 11 150 Pp Ln 1 9511 lt 9 12 IC F8 GPCONT 1 LO ee EEE m h DI BOARD MOTHER BOARD EMOT200 BOARD J P511 J3 T V 5V C F8 51 2 J2 I
53. M In rotation of the itis Check the upper dead not set at the upper dead point detector UM 21 22 RINSE Mil The rinsing mechanism does Check the upper dead not reach the upper dead point detector point in ascending motion SIOP The rinsing mechanism does Same as above not leave the upper dead point in descending motion cont d Alarm huie Description Remedy 1065 DISK The reaction disk cannot Check the detectors for recognize its stop position Stop positions on the inner and outer tracks STOP The reaction disk does not Same as above stop at the specified position SIOP At resetting the reaction Check the home disk cannot recognize its detector home position SIOP At resetting the first cell Check the home on reaction disk does not detector or inner outer stop at the specified track detector position SIOP When the reaction disk 1 Perform resetting turns the serum probe 2 Check the upper reagent probe stirrer or dead point detector rinsing mechanism is not of the mechanism set at the upper dead point which caused on the cell side alarm When this alarm is issued another alarm on rinsing or stirring mechanism may concur 71 SAMPLE S STOP The serum probe does not Check the upper dead PROBE SIOP reach the upper dead point point detector Note 1 in ascending motion on other than the cell side Alarm at the first u
54. P Transfer sequence 4 STD count 1 character STD count is any of 1 to 6 and variable according to the calibration method When STD count 15 1 STD data is followed immediately by SD value information 5 STD data 1 to 6 32 characters each The data for each STD has the composition below Transfer sequence 10 10 10 OO OO OO OOO O Prozone value 6 bytes Data alarm 1 byte 2nd initial absorbance data 6 bytes 2nd absorbance data 6 bytes 1st initial absorbance data 6 bytes 1st absorbance data 6 bytes STD type any of STD 1 to 6 1 byte Each absorbance data is right justified and preceded by one more spaces 6 Calibration alarm 1 character Refer to the data alarm code list 16 35 7 SD value information 8 characters C Transfer sequence 10 10 L SD value right justified and preceded by space SD value present SD decimal point position N SD value absent Spaces remain blank for information on SD value and decimal point position 8 Data composition Table 16 20 Data Unt Fom Decimal Point Position Absorbance data 10 ABS 6 digit integer with sign No decimal point Initial absorbance 10 ABS 6 digit integer with sign No decimal point data SD value No 6 digits with decimal Decimal point position of point positive SD limit on chemistry parameter screen 9 Transfer unit Transfer in units of channel d Transfer of ISE calibr
55. Photometry assay only Two or more of the four passed cell blank values to be used for CELL BLANK are abnormal Note Abnormal when the difference from the reference value value measured with cell blank function on the maintenance screen is 0 1 Abs or more Before sample aspiration the presence absence of sample is checked and it is found that the sample is absent Before reagent aspiration the presence absence of reagent is checked and it is found that the reagent is absent Remedy Perform measurement again Turn off the power switch and then turn it on Perform cell blank measurement once a week or after replacement of the light source lamp or reaction cuvette Confirm the adequate volume of HITERGENT After taking a proper measure exchange incubation bath water once Rinse or replace the reaction cuvette and perform cell blank measurement After washing the light transmitting window in the incubation bath perform cell blank measurement Inject the sample in a volume of expected consumption 50 uL or more into a standard cup Insert the lead wire Prepare and set reagent newly Insert the lead wire Data Alarm Printer S VF Absorbance over Prozone error fetten indicates a prozone value Photometry assay The absorbance value to be used for calculation after cell blank correction exceeds 3 3 Abs The absorbance is checked for e
56. Protective plate Am cover D Am cover LCD module Sample disk Reagent Top view Am cover E cover disk cover Arm cover Door hinge Door hinge B Concealing Side pane L plate Side panel Front cover Front cover L Front view Right side view 14 6 LCD module Attach with both side adhesive tape Remove the O ring Lock mechanism D SLA Lock plates Connect marked with felt tip pen side to 24 Filter cooling unit accessory Rear plate A Rear plate Rear view st maran D B section tubing A section tubing Cooling unit jacket lt lt To reaction bath _ Table support R1 Lamp d Warm water header Mechanism base Table support seat Tube L Photometer _ section pen heater From section From SV4 Reaction disk VOR View Intake header Manifold valve Mechanism base LOG AMP S probe N dO mu Sad MH E WI js 4 Vacuum unit E x Eni fi He lia J B section syringe Circulating pump Water supply pump S syringe Water tank Frame Transformer Left side view Front view Right
57. T832 54 1 BRI IC11 4 7K 24 15240 x l IS m m a 15 7 sw1 QOOO Q 325 N 2 S TT TP2 221 mel WEET 1 CL R64 22 415 eS 8 naa 3 7 IG8 R63 ico idon 2 22 T P 2 6 1 5 865 3 TB25 15 13 C20 22 REF E ds 15 ES 3 62157 537 R66 1824 VK O Tu AG 39K 15V NZ 02 n4s NG vio 1 5 VRI 01 R40 10K AA y7T7A2 i v 10 53 Pics 26 10 12 E SENSOR Board 1 Explanation of Circuit Board This circuit board is a resistor type liquid level sensor which is incorporated in the sampling arm 2 External View 100 Black White Photo interrupter detection of abnormal descent 10 54 GS 01 5V 15V eS 320K R3 R1 680K 1000p 10K ICI gt er 15V RS 530 C3 TP2 470 0 1u v e 82 4 47 C4 0 01u f PI1 5 405 202 203 R10 R11 R12 2 2K 2 2K 10K 1 2W 10K 1 2 7 94 IF 3 OUT Bl ck I HOSN3S 3 10 13 LED Board 1 Explanation of Circuit Board This circuit board is for alarm indication before S disk rotation 2 External View P N 713 5004 LED 3 LED Circuit Diagram LED CN1 10 56 11 CROSS WIRING REFERENC
58. Three point two item One point rate two item Rate A sample blank correction Rate A serum indexes Rate B two item same wavelength Rate B two item different wavelengths ISE Based on Model 7070 7170 22 kinds max positions to be shared with control sera Linear 2 point linear K factor 4 parameter LOGIT LOG 5 parameter LOGIT LOG Spline Segmented line At startup only all points FULL and reagent blank corrected calibration For 8 channels For 8 channels 5 kinds max positions shared with standard solutions 400 samples in data disk 50 samples in data disk 5 kinds x 30 in SRAM 1 13 System Interface Interface RS 232C and current loop Communication protocol Based on Model 7070 7170 Communication details Communication with host communication details based on Model 7070 7170 1 14 Options for Analyzer ISE Sample ID accessory Model BL180 Maker Keyence Barcode spec CODE 39 ITF NW7 Modulas 10 Modulas 16 CODE 128 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 TROUBLESHOOTING Alarm ode able 25 9 e e LM eee tne 2 1 2 3EGDIDISDIay 2 24 2 26 2 2 1 Operation Check Procedure at Occurrence of Alarm 2 27 Parameter ONEC Kieron r a 2 29 2 9 1 Processhig FIOW uu au u u uuu wind 2 29 2 3 2 Details of Para
59. otandard deviation Same as above Same as above SD Coefficient of variation 6 digit real number with decimal Fixed at 2 digits CV point The result data is read from FD The result data provided with an alarm is excluded from calculation also not counted for N Note that reference value range over and overflow are excluded from alarm otatistics are not output for unmeasured tests and subsequent tests are placed close When N 2 statistical calculation is not carried out 7 6 Screen Transition STD Type gj Blank All Calibration 7 6 1 Screen Configuration of Model 7020 Automatic Analyzer FD fod Work Sheet Test Sampte ID H Sample No Control 1 to 5 15 Calibration Calibration Stat Samples 3 Routine System S mpl 55 Remaining Reagent Volume Print Pip etting End uuum Print Order Buzzer Real time Print Serum index Calibration Control Position Result Print Serum Index Carry over Calculated Test ISE Prime st Reset 1 i DEBE Communication 1 am QUEE alibration Parameters 5 Precision I 1 1 1 1 1 ID _ Frecision Start Conditions Sample No 46 UU SS Incubator Water FD Utilities Cell Blank Probe Adjust Se IN Count Clear ISE Check C RAM R W Communication Program
60. pump ON Deionized water supply Air purge pump Reaction disk system Vacuum pump open to air SV13 ON OFF VP ON Rinse solenoid valve Stirring mechanism rinse mechanism up when not located at upper dead point Stirring mechanism OK rotated to HOME 2 times 1 NG A Reaction disk n ved to A temporary HOME Sampling system S probe moved up when not A located at upper dead point NG OK S probe zero alignment OK NG S probe rotated to HOME 2 lt gt S probe rotated to A up down position A Details of processing S disk moved to OK S disk moved to HOME HOME NG A A NG 1 Deviated from HOME when located at HOME 2 Deviated from HOME and then moved to HOME if located at HOME 3 Deviated from upper dead point and then moved to upper dead point when located at upper dead point 7 35 Vacuum pump startup SV ON OFF stirring rod rotated during wash OK S disk returned 1 pitch Processing flow Vacuum pump not open to air in standby status VP OFF Moved down and then up after wash Air purge Reaction disk moved to HOME xx cell feed Air purge A A S probe moved up down S probe rotated to Zero alignment lt gt rinsing bath and then lt gt gt Probe moved down nozzle inside outside OK 2 pulses and then up washed Air purge OK S syringe reset lt gt S syringe reset once again S
61. 303 LA7021M as REFA REFB R35 330 330 HIF4 40P GP3 3 TM 8 24 025 i 624 G24 9 R30 bio GP3 4 3936 HRP32 2 2K 2 2K 3w 32 R31 R32 1610 mss 624 624 GP3MO PS 303 Lus 3 3K 20K DG 305 O gt R35 R34 t N GP3 M1 1 L303 24V2 ata J311 KDO 5V C26 4 74 35 81109311 8147 R148 4 L 47K 47K 624 1032 25 GP3 M1 2 80 02 GP3 M1 3 1303 GP3M1 4 W303Q A8 GP3M1 PS 1303 DG 3030 10 34 DRV Circuit 27135201 3 10 PORE d 24V2 GP4 MO 1 305 0 8 gt 5V GP4 2 p A GP4 3 GP4 MO 4 s 1010 R47 624 GP4 5 303 E pK 3 3K OK 25 DG 303 7 R49 R48 PUES K a ee GP4M1 1 B3030 uj re iiv 24V2 R151 R152 47K 47K GP4M1 2 3030 GP4 M1 3 1 4 jU303q GP4M1 PSW3I030 DG 5V 5 1 1304 5 2 1304 28 GP5 3 bsos C 5 4 7130404 GP5 5 304 GO DG 3040 5V N R63 R62 10 35 Reagent Arm ROTATE NV 8LA7021M c c cc MNSNRN Reagent Arm UP DOWN R38 HIF4 40P C40 2200 G24 016 2 2K HRP32 R53 G24 490 9312 C41 4 74 35 BI 9312 9 G24 Stirrer Arm ROTATE GP5 M1 1 mom GPSMi 2 3040 GP5 M1 3 5040 5 GP5M1 4
62. 7 Deionized water supply unit Water pressure 50 340 Kpa 0 5 to 3 5 kgf cm 8 Water drain port 50 mm or more in opening diameter 100 mm or less above floor 9 dissipation 1 3 kcal max 12 3 Power source Grounding Distilled water or deionized water Refrigerator Tap water Drain port Table 12 1 Items to Be Prepared by Customer Specifications Remarks 2P grounded receptacle For BM 230 V AC 1 5 kVA 1 3 kcal 3P grounded receptacle For BMC 115 V AC 1 5 kVA 1 3 kcal 3rd class grounding terminal 100 or less with reference to earth Approx 15 L hr during operation Prepare a refrigerator having the necessary capacity to store reagents and samples Water quality Dionized destilled water Conductivity b b Water pressure 0 5 to 3 5 kgf cm 50 to 340 lt 1 us cm or c Water temperature 30 C or less less germ free d Faucet diameter Chemical faucet 1 2 approx 12 mm in diameter E 1 sy Prepare a port having a diameter of 50 mm or more within 5 m of drain port at the rear of the main unit and at a height of 100 mm or less above the floor 12 4 NOTE Specifications of Deionized Water Supply Unit for Model 902 Described below are the specifications for connection of the deionized water supply unit to the Model 902 Water quality Neutral water containing no substances that adversely affect measurement such as de
63. 8 Data Alarm Absorbance over Reaction limit over except J 1 point Reaction limit over except 2 K or 3 point 10 Linearity abnormal at 9 W points or more cO 11 Linearity abnormal at 8 F points or less 12 Standard 1 absorbance H abnormal 13 Duplicate error 14 STD error S 15 Sensitivity error Remarks eS 9l No Data Alarm Contrar sro routine stat 16 Calibration error 17 SD error 18 Noise error 19 Level error 20 Slope error 2 Internal standard concentration abnormal 22 Sample value abnormal 23 Test to test compensation error 24 Test to test compensation disabled 25 Calculation test error 26 Overflow 27 Calculation disabled 28 SD Absorbance error AMAX NOTE if any data caused multiple data alarms the alarm registered first will be output cont d Remarks Data becomes blank space Data becomes blank space Data becomes blank space Data becomes blank space 16 10 Cautions on Connection with External System 1 2 For connection with this protocol adopt the point to point system Although the end of data code is changeable on the system setting screen the host must send the same end of data code as on the analyzer side If the code does not match between them alarm is issued EXT is always added to the end of data code in each text Whenever data beyond 256 bytes is transferre
64. AAb x 100 gt Linearity limit value LIN AA lt When 4 lt N lt 8 gt The difference in absorbance change quantity between the first half 3 points 2 sections and the latter half 3 points is obtained and then divided with the overall absorbance change quantity When the result of this calculation exceeds the limit in linearity check comment LIN 8 is printed together with the result of measurement x 100 gt Linearity limit value LIN 8 AAT AAb and in the above formula are all converted into absorbance change in a minute by the least squares method e Inthe following cases reaction linearity is not checked a number of photometric points N within the reaction limit is 3 or less reaction limit over will occur b Absorbance change in a minute is 60 x 10 Abs less AAf AAb is equal to or smaller than 60 x 10 Prozone Check In immunological reaction the absorbance of calibration curve falls at high concentrations so that correct data is unobtainable this is called zone phenomenon or prozone effect Therefore prozone check is performed by the two methods below and a data comment is indicated when required Antigen Readdition Method In 1 point assay a small amount approx 50 uL of sample containing antigen is readded for the second reagent R2 to R4 to check the change in absorbance before and after addition the dashed line in Fig
65. Press Write Check key 8 Memory Switch Setting 2 NOTE Each switch is set as shown below Setting change may disable startup of the instrument So avoid changing the setting Data Bit Length 8 Bits Stop Bit Length 2 Bits Previous Parity Even Screen Flow Control RS CS Baud Rate 9600 bps Write Lamp Bit Control Invalid Press Write Check key 12 20 9 DIP SW Setting Status Display DIP SW Setting Status 1 Forced Data Initialization No 2 System Message Mode English 3 System Menu Display Enable 4 Unused OFF End Press End key 12 21 13 13 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Maintenance and Inspection 13 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Periodic Cleaning Inspection and Periodic Parts Replacement List for Model 902 Automatic Analyzer Periodic inspection cleaning 9 Periodic replacement 2 Consumable Maintenance part v Frequency x No Required Required Every On Every Every Every Every Every Consumable i Remarks Every Time Every Year Day Occasion Week Month 3 Months 6 Months Year Part Part 1 Sample cup F611049 o e A 2 Sample probe 713 0201 O Reagent probe 713 0202 O 74 Nozzle seal F729051 5 Reactio
66. R20 YG lt Fi l eo J2 GM INI 5 NDIRA 15VFalI N R21 wy 18 55 15K N 15V BX8049 BX7356 1 13 7 MDI 5Y GND MDIRS GNO 10 29 DI Circuit 27135200 5 5 5 Ici 24VDISABLE MAX791 vora 4 65V 0 4 x c9 5V 12V 5V 12V V TP3 TP4 TP6 R22 R23 2 2K 2 7K 45V LED1 LED2 LEDS 5 SG C5 100u ZW100515 5V IM 5v 16y C6 100u 25 V 15V 1 3 15 1 5 V 10 30 0120 41 1 830 J1 c lt SYSRES N ACFAIL N 10 7 DRV Board 1 Explanation of Circuit Board The DRV board drives the stepping motor at a constant current voltage and the solenoid valve The SSR control signal from the EMOT100 board is connected to the ACDIST board via this board 5 V and 24 V DC voltages are supplied to each unit in the instrument from the power unit via this board 10 31 2 External View DC supply to printer LCD and FDD DC supply to board rack DC input 4 Connection o Y with DI board E mn source lamp 31 SOH motor solenoid valve in each unit Input of control signal from EMOT100 board Connection to stepping 2 Connection with ACDIST board SSR control signal 10 32 DRV
67. Refer to Note 6 in analytical method table of 1 1 1 The following are checked CLB PARAM 1 to 37 NOTES for measurable level 1 CH No 1 Checked photometry tests against the 1 Relationship between specification of assay code and calibration test calibration type selecting Refer to relationship information between calibration type and analytical method in 2 1 Entry must be made for CALIB POINTS necessary for calibration type Refer to output by each calibration method and check table in 2 7 Entry must be made for STD POS necessary for calibration For STD specified by measured STD No in output by each calibration method and check table of 2 7 it is checked whether STD POS is input or not cont d Al Designation Details of Check p Remarks of Check Display Subdivision 3 Calibration parameter check 4 Volume The input value for CLB PARAM 1 to 37 SPAN POINT must be CH No normal e When calibration type is LINEAR 2 to 6 point or LOGIT LOG or 4P 1 The above input value must not equal 0 2 The above input NOTES value must not 2 Checked exceed that for against the CALIB POINTS specification of Relationship between calibration test calibration type and selecting calibration method information Refer to output by each calibration method and check table in 2 7 Note 2 STD CONC must be set in ascending order Check is made only f
68. SPE LPR transfer SPE HPR transfer wait before SPE HPR transfer SPE HPR LPR transfer wait before SPE HPR LPR transfer Ready for LPR transfer Ready for HPR transfer Ready for HPR transfer LPR transfer wait Ready for SPE transfer Ready for SPE transfer LPR transfer wait Event from Analyzer TS Inquiry Req TS managem t task Real time Data Out from 902 To 10 after HPR transfer To 12 after HPR transfer To 12 after HPR transfer Transfer Req for Specific Sample To 12 after HPR transfer To 11 after HPR transfer To 12 after HPR transfer Batch Transfer from Screen after HPR transfer after HPR transfer after HPR transfer 16 21 Table 16 8 Dole 012 or ples REP resending req SUS Suspension req Event from Host REC Suspension req SPE TS specification RES specific sample req Time out Hardware Error Error in Text Event from Analyzer Event from Host REP SUS REC SPE RES specific Time out Error in resending suspension suspension TS sample req Hardware Text Final Date req req req specification Error NOTE TS Inquiry Real time Transfer Batch Req TS Data Out Req for Transfer managem t from 902 Specific Req from Data 011 0 task Sample Screen Samples MOR analyticaldata reg in Analyzer Ready f
69. Standby Parameter check Dow n m No 9 Key Input S STOP E STOP STOP without START STOP Mechanism Automatic mechanism mechanism key input End reset y np Reset before operation Sampling stop without reset Sampling stop with reset Stop 10 Emergency stop 11 mechanism 1 2 3 4 5 Operation sampling 6 7 8 9 Ts E peep ps T r Ls T di wk e 0 1 10 10 1 Photometer check ISE check INC water exchange cell blank probe adjust reset mecha check wash and ISE prime NOTES 1 Used only for change of Probe Adjust position Status transition is not made 2 Transition is made upon achieving success in reset 3 4 5 For both routine and stat samples T S is cleared after sample pipetting Transition is made after completion of reset Transition to the standby status is made upon occurrence of STOP level alarm in reset during initialization 7 3 2 1 7 3 3 Scheduling when Sample Is Insufficient Outline If insufficient sample alarm is issued three times in succession channel registration is stopped for the subsequent tests for the relevant sample and system error is issued for empty cell For alarm indicatiton refer to the alarm specifications Routine Sample If insufficient sample alarm is issued for three tests in successi
70. The instrument corrects the input reaction limit level by adding an absorbance value due to sample turbidity etc Reaction limit level Input reaction limit absorbance value L Lg L Sample absorbance at photometric point 1 Reagent blank absorbance at photometric point 1 When L Lg x 0 automatic calibration will not be performed Electrolyte compensable range check When the ratio of change in calibrator concentration or slope value from the previous one is larger than the input value comment CALIB is printed Unless check is desired input 20096 Calibration check When calibration factor K has changed by 2096 or more from the previous value comment CALIB is printed check value is fixed at 20 STD check If any of the following alarms occurs on calibration data comment STD is printed ADC abnormal ADC e Reaction limit over LIMTO 1 2 blank abnormal CELL e Reaction linearity abnormal LIN or LIN 8 e Sample short SAMPL e Duplicate error DUP e Reagent short REAGN e Standard 1 absorbance abnormal S1ABS Absorbance over ABS e Calculation disabled e Prozone error Measure to be taken on printout of comment When comment STD or SENS is indicated calibration curve will not be updated Therefore recalibration is necessary In case of CALIB or SD sample measurement is allowed after making sure the result of calibration is normal In this case
71. Warning indication W Displayed if the number of accesses to EEPROM exceeds 50 000 SUM value indication XXXX Display of SUM value for area installed to EEPROM Make sure that the displayed SUM value is correct Pull out the FD from drive 1 and drive 2 turn on power again and check operation 12 11 3 Check Items After installation check the following items 1 The SUM value on the installation end display screen is as follows XXXX OK NG 2 Upon powering on the instrument the version of screen information at lower right of screen is displayed as follows XXX OK NG 12 16 12 11 4 Procedure for Installation of Screen Information initialization 1 2 Load the installation FD no 1 into drive 1 left FDD and turn on the main switch of the instrument The space screen is presented When the program is loaded buzzer sounds oimultaneously press 2 touch switches at the corners of the screen The system menu is displayed The next screen is displayed oystem Menu Screen System Menu Menu End Transfer Mode Maintenance Mode Press Transfer Mode key to enter transfer mode The next screen is displayed Screen Information Transfer Screen Transfer Mode Tool PT ocreen data XX kbyte Stop The indication of memory capacity changes during transfer When the memory indication XX kbyte is cleared press Stop key After that perform step no 7 and subsequent of
72. a 0 gt gt e a lt ic as zl Hh alo E 2 ses 159 qa a 9 2 2 o tn BRIO 8612 a BR13 BR16 4 816 19 NT JP19 Pd JPB o 20 9 JP10 DOOP BBSYN DOIP BCLRN 009 Do5P 006 D14P DO7P BG2INN DISP BG3INN pj SYSFAILN BERRN SYSRSTN WRITEN BRIN 23 A22P 1 1 AM2P A20P 3 TACKN AT8P LACKINN SERCLKP 17 IACKOUT SERDATN A16P AMAP 15 07 RQ 14 IRQ6N A13P IRQSN 2 4 Q 1 2 IRQ2N 9 SYSCLKP BGSOUTN TRQIN SVSTOBY 10 20 250 MVSB100 3 5 420 4205 4202 4201 15 15v ADSTART SWSTATUS REV HEATER vCC2 BR21 as 2 tu Cet m m m MM ja m mo lt a vcc2 1 Ci A2 B2 c A3 83 4 84 4 5 85 c5 86 6 87 8 B8 ca A9 BS C28 Qoo vw nr moo ex xx 92020 GMA rer pre pp C CN PE NNN NIN mom mo mo mo mu mo oo 0 mio lt mn Do mio m 1 wc 2 odo Oi qq
73. is specified for barcode T S test CANCEL is specified for barcode reader test on the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen Or RUN highlighted is specified for both barcode reader test and barcode T S test on the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen 16 56 16 12 2 Differences in Communication Specification between Conventional Analyzers and Model 902 Conventional Analyzers Model 7250 7150 7050 etc Communication timing chart Communication cycle sec Bel sommes inquiry DI 0 0 5 Analyzer TS D Analytical data Test selecting information Composition of 1 message FN Function No 2 With 255 bytes or more analytical data transfer 2 gt 1 sec or more Characteristics 1 A communication cycle is divided into the first and second halves where TS inquiry and analytical data transfer are made respectively 2 Function is simple due to discrimination with real time transfer and batch transfer 16 57 With less than 255 bytes TS inquiry analytical data transfer 1 FR ina Host Manual Drive System Model 7170 902 Communication cycle sec Cluster Analyzer HOST With less than 254 bytes TS inquiry analytical data transfer other cis Frame character RAPERE Frame character indicating the fianl frame in analytical data transfer With 254 bytes or more
74. only transfer of analytical data 1 sec or more STX Data ETX NOTE 1 NOTES 1 Usually on receiving response from hos within 5 sec 2 2 sec or more in RESULT ONLY mode As a rule response is made to each request Text has a frame No corresponding to command No and control code ACK NAK in it for communication control Applicable to multiple jobs because there is basically no discrimination between real time communication communication under analysis and batch communication specified through screen Because protocol need not be changed among instruments a high maintainability is ensured Reducing the burden of host can be expected Comparison between Conventional Analyzer and Model 902 in Host Communication Model 7170 7070 Model 902 Test S No Host inquiry Sample No disk position Sample No disk position inquiry information ID E be input through ID a be input through screen screen T S batch transfer Possible Possible in routine mode only Sample Unnecessary Routine mode unnecessary to oimple analysis necessary analyzer Same as right Mode selectable by system greed Full time inquiry priority given to host Inquiry when without T S same as before Analysis T S all zero on prohibitive specification S Stop Possible POS 0 Impossible specification from host Host priority Possible None ug out in 2 cycles function 36 sec Request for serum Poss
75. parameter given to A D PC board is abnormal e A D conversion cannot be completed Time out occurs Reference voltage is checked WARNING The number of A D starts Same as above cannot be reset to O This is checked at reaction measurement d Alarm Sub Control Category code Level Description Remedy No 1441 to ADC1 WARNING A D count for 2 V is Same as above 1444 abnormal e A D count for 6 V is abnormal Normal count for 2 V 7547 count value lt 8341 Normal count for 6 V 22460 count value 25023 This is checked at measurement of reference voltage 1451 to ADC2 WARNING Refer to alarm code 47 1 Replace ISE AMP 1453 board m Refer to alarm code 47 2 Same as above Refer to alarm code 47 4 Same as above Reference voltage for ISE 2 8 V Normal count for 2 V 7547 count value lt 8341 Normal count for 8 V 30184 count value 33364 Normal offset value 22811 count value 40547 1461 to ADC3 Replace EMIO100 1462 PC board lusus e A D count for 2 V is Same as above abnormal e A D count for 6 V is abnormal Normal count for 2 V 12452 count value 13763 Normal count for 6 V 37356 lt count value lt 41288 1471 to BARCODE1 1 to 35 WARNING Data reception from the Replace the label 4506 barcode reader has not barcode reader been completed before ID reception time out Sub code indicate
76. position 251 to ENM to 60 WARNING In sipping from the sample Add sample 310 SHORT cup sample on the sample disk is inadequate Sub code groups Routine stat samples 1 to 35 Control STD 36 to 57 W1toW3 581060 551 to SAMPLE S STOP The serum syringe does not Check the upper 552 SYRINGE STOP reach the upper dead point dead point detector S STOP The serum syringe does not Same as above STOP go down from the upper dead point 561 to REAGENT STOP The reagent probe does not Check the upper 568 PROBE reach the upper dead point in dead point detector ascending motion STOP The reagent probe moves Check liquid level down abnormally in detection descending motion 16 3 STOP The reagent probe does not Check the upper go down from the upper dead dead point detector point in descending motion 16 4 WARNING Detection of abnormal Check the descending motion of the descending error reagent probe remains on detector d cnt um m Category Level Description Remedy to REAGENT STOP When the reagent probe Check the home 568 PROBE turns toward the cell it detector cannot detect the cell position SIOP When the reagent probe Same as above turns from the cell side to other position it does not leave the cell position Before the probe goes down Check liquid level the liquid level detector is detection already turned on Mil In rotation of the
77. 0 45V bw 34 from Driver J4 ui BR5 10k 1 8 24V F 34 BU Falun n yit 8868049 14 iui 0 MDIR4 ou aw 5 ND BRS 10 fuit m 8804 J4 J NS MOIRA GHD J4 giu 24VDISABLE V 34 o xi J4 ry J4 Of BX6049 MDIR4 BY GND BX8049 MDIR4 CNO 8 804 MOIR5 OND J apr J4 X BX8049 0185 is 5Y OND BR6 10k W Bon J4 oH NFB 0 NF9 MDIRS m BY 3 OND y BX8049 MDIRS N OKO J4 BR6 10kx8 5 BX8049 M mp MDIRS GND BR 6 10kx8 V M 40 i son M Q NDIRS e 5V GND 109 2 xe 18 en 1610 9 IC10 a 328 J2 0280 42 Mo 2 230 42 8 To 42 642 812 42 5286 12 M 11 1 Ni 2 GM I 24VFAIL N GM IN1 0 ACFUSEALW N SWSTATUS to EMIO100 GP7 0 11 GP7 Mi L1 6 8 0 1 GM 100 0 GM INO GM IN0 2 GM INQ 3 GM IN0 5 GM 100 86 GM 0 7 10 28 Circuit 271352000 4 5 R16 AM d 9 J2 GM IN1 3 12 MDIR4 12VFal1 N TT OND R18 tox BX8043 2 4 829 2 11 4 d MDIRA D N R19 av 8 2 7K QNO 7 V
78. 1 Routine Analysis plus Wash 7 2 x acm 7 3 7 1 3 Cell Blank Measurement 7 4 UOC 7 5 7 159 7 6 IS CI S EN LIE 7 7 Jd ci 7 10 7 19 Protomelter CHECK aiii ta 7 11 74 9 Maler Excharigg TAE TI E Rada 7 12 Measurement Quy die ox RUE uapa aku Ra aaah nu Ra uk a 7 13 Rcx MEO CN n T EI 7 14 7 2 2 Configuration of Photometry ADC Hardware 7 15 7 2 3 Configuration of Temperature ADC Hardware 7 16 7 2 4 Temperature Measurement Data Flow 7 17 FUNCT OM NM TP 7 20 7 3 1 Status Transition routine easy analysis 7 21 7 3 2 Scheduling when Sample is Insufficient 7 25 7 3 3 Calculation of Measurement End Time bath processing 7 25 TE LAL UL 7 27 TAAI 7 27 LA og 7 28 TAS hu pa vi 7 29 7 4 4 Operation reaction disk
79. 11 Setting of SW1 12 13 1 OFF RS 232C ON Current loop 14 2104 Normally OFF 10 45 HOST MONITOR 8850 50 170 RUNE IC TXD1 44090 E 9 IC RXD1 4409 o4 lt fc RTS1 4409 4 gt 7 IC CTS 1 4409 lt Q SDBB 25S Ic3 TXD 44050 r o RTS J405 O 8 J405 440508 TX 44050 RTS 9405 RTS 2405 J405 SG EM 00 0 14096 DO 1 409 J409 12 V BEEP GND RSDIST Circuit 27135203 1 4 10 46 7 51 3 RDAD 15SE 4402 NF2 BRUN 9402 UU di 4402 N NF4 R2 J402 FG RDED 9PE J411 Hosso M na T E GND TXD RXD RTS CTS TXD RTS RTS HOST CURRENT LOOP RSDIST Circuit 27135203 2 4 RDED 9PE pow NG 7T EX TXD 3 eee T PF ss 4406 RXD x RXD 3 M 1 Ka 9406 TXD NF11 NF12 CTS3 4409 C A12 p D E 4406 INZONE N 2409 O 4406 INZONE 055306 RES N J409 40 1406 OK 5 J408 VCC 7406 SG d RDBD 25SE FG TXD 2 TXD RXD 2 RXD RTS 2 RTS CTS 2 J409 C A c 4403 CTS NF19 4403 SG 2 1409 cy 8 20 4403 DTR i ELCO 4P
80. 14 3 External View DIP SW1 DIP SW2 MOT209 NG f V P N 211 3232 a 1 as 8 T GMCONT _ Sym LN sisa Shu GPCONT5 ons GPCONT 1 caj GPCONT6 t m E 7 NS E n GPCONT4 S Explanation of LED No _ Description 1 LED1 green Lit upon generation of interrupt from of to GPCONT4 and GMCONT to master CPU 2 LED2 green Lit upon generation of interrupt from any of GPCONT5 to GPCONTS to master CPU 10 15 Block Diagram of EMOT200 Board A23 A01 AM5 AMO N LWORD N DS0 081 N AS IACK IN N WRITE N IACKOUT N AMCD buffer Control signal Address gr em Reset buffer Access controlle 007 000 Data buffer H8 Resister Flash memory Address decoder CPUDI register Internal data bus H8 330 x 8 H8 330 x Motor control signal 10 16 10 5 MVSB100 Board 1 Explanation of Circuit Board This circuit board is a mother board which is compatible with the VME bus and has six slots 2 Arrangement of Circuit Boards Slot No Circuit Board 1 ECPU 237 Unused Unused EMIO100 EMOT200 DI O O1 GC NOTE Slot no 1 is located at the left as viewed from the front 10 17 External View 3 TT Mor TR M TE E R
81. 17 5 End 7 1 6 Operation 1 Operation sample probe 1 Function e To discharge sample into reaction cell photometry and ISE assays discharge rinse water into reaction cell 2 Sample probe status transition Start Inside Rinsing to avoid sample carryover outside Next test request washing Water discharge System water calibration Sample pipetting present Note 1 i Air Air mem 5 pl eee su uL aspiration Sampling of aspiration jen P other sample 10 uL 2 Backlash 21 Backlash 2 uL Backlash Water discharge continued Note 2 Water discharge 2 to 50 ut to 50 uL Sample Note 2 3 fixed etergen discharge 2 to 50 to 50 uL uL End of sampling one sample 3 Remaining Remaining liquid liquid discharged discharged inside 9 outside i There must be next nside outside sample for pipetting washing Next test request absent yt NOTES 1 When STD 1 POS 99 is specified in analytical parameters 20 0 to 15 5 X 2 Sample pipettiing volume conpensation Actual pipetting volume yuL versus value input from screen xuL is calculated via following formula 15 6 to 25 5 1 04788 x 0 7109 One addional pulse is applied for sample aspiration and discharge 25 6 to 50 0 1 03160 x 0 2479 Led 2 Operation reagent probe 1 Start probe status transition Next test r
82. 2 1 n Total 490 uL Cycle no 11 12 13 otop no 3 3 3 3 Internal Standard Solution Pipetting Water Stirring S probe DIL IS SMP Internal standard solution pipetting volum Fixed at 318 uL Cuvette no n 2 1 n Water Fixed at 182 uL Cycle no 12 13 14 Total 500 uL otop no 3 3 3 4 Sample Aspiration ISE sipper DIL Sample measurement IS SMP Cuvette no n 2 n 1 n Cycle no 17 18 19 Stop no 1 1 1 5 Internal Standard Solution Aspiration ISE sipper DIL SMP Internal standard solution measurement Cuvette no n 2 n 1 n Cycle no 18 19 20 Stop no 1 1 1 Electrode conditioning is carried out when 2 hours 24 hours have elapsed after ISE measurement Two cells are used for the conditioning and internal standard solution is aspirated 5 5 ISE A D Conversion 1 ISE A D Conversion Timing kumu 10 msec Na K REF Na E REF Na K Cl REF 1 2 5 a As shown in the above figure measure the electromotive force 5 times each for and Cl in this order b The A D conversion interval time for each is 10 msec c ADC alarm is issued if the ADC count even once is 0 2 ADC Setting Parameters e Number of integrations 8 Software trigger interval 10 msec 3 ISE ADC Calibration Timing DES 0 msec 2V 8V OFF a As shown in the above figure measure the reference voltages 2 V 8 V and offset voltage b The A D conversion interval time for each is 10 msec c
83. 58 Key Setting Cn Cn Fa P P2 1 Parameter Printout Table 2 3 Contents of Printout O Printed x Not printed Numerical Input from Contents of Printout Without ISE With ISE Remarks Screen 9 1 to 37 Photometry assay parameter 38 10 40 ISE parameter _ NE x 99 8calculation tests O 8 compensation tests x for ISE Control positions 1 to 5 related tests Serum indexes Printing order Printing format when with card printer Set test Carry over evasion System parameter DIP switch data 2 Program Check Printout Program Check 93711738 17 43 7136152 00 Program version No 2 6 3 Communication Trace 1 Outline The contents of communication between the analyzer and external system are printed according to the specification of communication trace printout on the mechanism check menu screen Printing Items and Their Contents Details are given in Table 2 4 Table 2 4 Printing Items and Their Contents Printing Item Contents Title Title Communication Trace date and time are printed The printing order of year month and day depends on the date printout order specification Time Communication start time Communication end time hour minute second hour minute second Communication mode Transmission AU gt HOST Reception HOST AU Error message Refer to Table 2 5 Example of communication text Refer to t
84. 717 0242 8 3 FuseList Listed below are the fuses used in the instrument For replacement insert a fuse having the specified rating 1 Fuses on ACDIST Board rear right side Fuse No Connected Load F1 Power source for power operation relay Casting uni F3 DC power unit 5 V 24 V 12 V z eater pump ror For BN 2 Fuses on DRV Board front right side e 5V Power Circuit Fuse No Fuse Type Rating A Connected Load F1 LM 50 ECPU237 board F2 LM 50 EMIO100 board LOG AMP board ISE AMP board LM 50 5 DI board DRV board EMOT 100 board PCP in mechanism F4 LM 50 FDD printer RSDIST board LED board ID reader Fuse No Fuse Type Rating A Connected Load F5 LM 32 3 2 otepping motor for reaction sample reagent table rotation and rinse up down F6 LM 32 3 2 otepping motor for sample arm and reagent arm up down and rotation F7 LM 32 3 2 Stepping motor for stirrer arm up down and rotation and ISE sipper arm up down F8 LM 32 3 2 otepping motor for sample reagent ISE syringe up down SV1 to 3 SV16 F9 LM 32 3 2 SV4 to 15 SV17 to 19 F10 LM 32 Display panel printer RSDIST board 8 3 1 1 Fuse Arrangement AC DC AC Fuses on ACDIST board F2 F3 5 a 150 4 5 wawaka Sak 90 12 _ n 2 Fuses DRV F4 F3 F2 F1 4 ar mw
85. Approx 10 minutes Data acquired and output per sample Fig 4 2 Flow of Analysis Completion of hotometry Reaction cuvette rinsing Approx 1 8 minutes Automatic stop 3 Operating Position Figure 4 3 shows the operating position of each mechanism around the reaction disk Reacting solution aspiration and deionized water injection Deionized water aspiration and injection Deionized water injection for water blank measurement Deionized water aspiration Sample pipetting position Cuvette no at reset For water blank measurement 1 For water blank measurement 2 45 6 For water blank Light 18 21 measurement 3 source Pd lamp 52 For water blank 19 measurement 4 Rotating 23 qii c T 2 direction 24 Stirring position 3 3231 30 29 28 86 15 5 9 10 H Reagent adding position 1st 2nd 3rd reagents ISE aspirating position Position no on reaction disk Fig 4 3 Operating Position of Each Mechanism around the Reaction Disk 4 3 Block Wiring Diagram TE LED 08 CARD 1 Sample Host i BCR i LCD FDD1 FDD2 E AC POWER SUPPLY DX HOST iconvoyance idevice I i monitor t 1 I Jl a D ENEMIES EE ET 1452 1453 PPP jo 1451 T laso J455 17456 1002 FEMME TL 2 J13 i E o
86. Communication Table 16 5 shows the conditions for termination and restart of this protocol Table 16 5 Termination and Restart of Communication O Communication stopped x Communication continued Conditions for Termination Lad NR con DE Restart of Communication Change from YES to NO or x x Change from NO to YES for in NO for host communication host communication parameter on start condition parameter Restart is made screen with previous contents of communication all canceled Occurrence of send receive Same as above NOTE 2 time out error Occurrence of hardware error Same as above NOTE 2 alarm related to communication Occurrence of FD read error x Remaining samples in during sending of analytical specified range are not sent data to host On restart samples in newly specified range are sent Specification of stop through x Same as above screen during batch sending of NOTE 1 analytical data to host Occurrence of FD read error Relevant sample alone is during transfer of analytical canceled data for specific sample request to host Detection of error in text such error or discrepancy in end of data code between analyzer and host Occurrence of E STOP level alarm on analyzer side NOTES 1 Transfer of measurement result data is stopped regardless of the kind of sample routine or control 2 Retry processing is executed up to the specified number of retry times In excess of the spe
87. Cue x 103 X3 X2 4 3 K4 Wee x 107 5 4 6 5 X6 X5 x 10 For output K1 to K5 values in the above equations are multiplied by the correction factor which is obtained from the number of digits below the decimal point of STD 1 concentration set on the chemistry parameter screen Number of Fractional Digits of STD 1 Correction Factor 0 1 1 10 2 10 3 19 For X1 the previous X1 value S1ABS of CALIBRATION LIST is used Alarm check 1 Checks of S1ABS Dup STD SENS and CALIB are performed 2 If the result of calibration is not monotone increasing or monotone decreasing in the case shown in Fig 1 the alarm calculation disabled is indicated This alarm is also indicated if absorbance is the same between different standard numbers see Fig 2 Concentration Calculation in Polygonal Line Calibration 1 Concentration is calculated in the test whose CALIB TYPE on the chemistry parameter screen is polygonal line 2 Processing flow Absorbance or absorbance change rate Chemistry parameters 1 K Among the data of calibration to K5 the relevant value is calculated 9 3 Photometry Assay Concentration Calculation This calculation is exemplified below on ALB Assume that standard solution 1 reagent blank and standard solution 2 have concentrations of 0 0 g dL and 5 3 g dL respectively Calculation of S1ABS absorbance of stan
88. E LLL oes i FG OE eo SE ERREUR gee See HT f 122 Omi L mM pss 123 t gt 1 ECPU237 SPARE EMIO100 lt 3 5 12 24 124 e o Ji water To T NEN MOTHER Board UMS nnne il DRIVER Board EMOT200 DI Board Photometer 1311 13127 4313 1314 2252 TEE ANM E i _ PEE DUO MN RENE CREE 2 28 z Hg C FLA quer W COUNT LAMP 1 ADC REACTION SAMPLE PROBE REAGENT PROSE SAMPLE REAGENT at Disk MECHANISM PIPETTER STIRRER SYRINGE SYRINGE VACUUM TANK 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 5 8 9 9 5 ISE Functional Specifications of Model 902 15 5 1 Qulme or IS Un eee UTE 5 2 Configuration of ISE 5 5 ISE Measurement Sequence 5 6 A D umasa n 5 8 section 3 Til e su z suu NER NO ROREM 5 9 Gross Wining
89. FAIL z p O Q Q N 10 17 24 40 44 45 46 52 53 54 Transition Conditions Startup error Normal end of startup End of initialization Input of START key Parameter check NG Parameter check OK Normal end of reset transition to operation Input of STOP key or occurrence of STOP level alarm Request for S STOP Occurrence of S STOP alarm in sampling mechanism Input of START key without reset of sampling mechanism Success in mechanism reset after input of START key with reset of sampling mechanism Failure in mechanism reset after input of START key with reset of sampling mechanism Completion of analysis of all samples and rinsing of all cells 2 End of STOP status Issuance of T M processing T M with reset Normal end of T M reset Execution of T M processing T M without reset Automatic end of T M processing input of STOP key ineffective for some T M processings or occurrence of STOP level alarm Occurrence of E STOP alarm End of E STOP status Occurrence of power failure 1 In the standby status the processings are divided between easy analysis mode and routine analysis mode on the Menu screen Mode changeover is impossible during analysis 2 For both routine and stat samples T S is cleared upon transition to standby status immediately after pipetting all samples All the samples pipetted are referred to as ail samples kc Z Status Transition easy analysis mode
90. S STOP In passed cell blank Restart measurement a value of un more than 3 3 Abs is allowable indicated for all of ADC1 ADC2 and Ai to 2 S STOP The above alarm code 41 1 691 Restart is issued 10 times un consecutively allowable d Alarm Category Level Description Remedy m CELL S STOP In passed cell blank Carry out cell BLANK Restart measurement any one of washing un ADC1 ADC2 Ax and Ay 2 Replace the cell allowable differs from the reference value Note 5 by more than 0 1 Abs through 10 consecutive cycles Counting is not made in use for stopped cell blank test 1241 to PASS CELL 1 to 48 WARNING In 4 passed cell blank Same as above 1400 BLANK measurements any one of ADC1 ADC2 Ax and Ay differs from the reference value Note 5 by more than 0 1 Abs twice or more In case any one of those values differs only once the average value of normal data is treated as a value of passed cell blank 1441 to ADC1 WARNING Any of I O error ECPU230 1444 boundary error of parameter EMIO100 PC board block pointer device busy channel error and device error PC board not mounted device inoperable time out has occurred WARNING e A D count value remains 1 Replace Log Amp at O PC board e After A D conversion 2 Check 2 V and interruption is impossible 6 V reference e The command or voltages
91. Status Incubation bath water exchange Resetting Probe position adjustment sample probe rotation Probe position adjustment sample probe up down Probe position adjustment reagent probe rotation Probe position adjustment reagent probe up down Probe position adjustment stirrer Mechanism check Barcode Reader check ISE check internal standard electromotive force measurement Routine sampling stop restart unallowable Mechanism resetting during operation 2 6 1 Printout System a Data is printed out in the sequential order starting from the newest data 6 When the alarm retry data in a single cycle does not reach 10 kinds it is printed out closely with no blank line left c When there is no alarm data or retry data its title alone is printed Notes a Printout can be stopped in steps of cycle by stop key input b Up to 500 cycle data starting from the oldest one is saved onto FD However if the same data has recurred in consecutive cycles storage is made as one cycle data c In case of FD error processing is terminated with the title alone printed Cumulative Alarm Trace Outline The alarm data and retry data saved in the FD are printed when cumulative in alarm trace data is specified on the mechanism check menu screen Details of Printout a Title The title Cumul Alarm Trace date and time are printed The printing order of year month and day depends on the date p
92. Upon occurrence of insufficient sample alarm Upon occurrence of insufficient reagent alarm Upon occurrence of error related to analysis such as ID error Upon occurrence of error related to instrument 7 4 Instrument Status 7 4 1 Initialize Status POWER UP processing 24 V ONI 1 Mechanism controller initialization 2 Communication port initialization Occurrence of emergency stop error Incubator water exchange NOTE If any reaction disk alarm is issued during reset initialization is stopped and the standby status is established Emergency stop 1 Initialization related to analysis is completed at the end of the above flow 2 For details of each processing in the numbered box in the above flow refer the table given below 3 After completion of the processing in box no 3 instrument monitoring is started periodically Box No Details of Processing 1 Waiting for 500 msec after turning on 24 V 2 CPCNT CMCNT initialization 3 Initialization of communication ports excluding S port for 6 channels 4 Refer to the time chart specifications 5 oame as above 7 4 2 Reset Status Reset Status Parameter check Refer to the description of mechanism reset in the T M reset flow Mechanism control information includes the following 1 205055205 Sample disk mechanism control information Sample pipetting mechanism control information Reaction disk mechanism control information Gell rinse
93. according to the following rule 1 Text without function character Frame character and one character after it 2 characters in total 2 Photometry assay calibration text Frame character function character channel No STD count and calibration alarm 8 characters in total 3 ISE calibration text Frame character function character and ISE type 4 characters in total Upon Occurrence of Any Error During Communication The details of the error and all characters up to occurrence of the error are stored However if send time out occurs during sending from the analyzer to host only frame character function character and sample information are stored the same as in normal communication in 1 above 16 8 3 Trace Data Storage Timing 1 In any other than Transfer of Analytical Data Alone a trace function is activated after sending a text from the analyzer and receiving a corresponding text from the host after receiving the end of data code b The trace function is activated upon change from YES to NO for communication trace on the communication parameter screen Transfer of Analytical Data Alone The trace function is activated on completion of transferring the text sent from the analyzer after sending the end of data code 16 43 16 8 4 Resetting of Trace Data Trace data is reset when CLEAR is specified for communication trace printout on the mechanism check screen 16 8 5 Trace Data Storage Capaci
94. akwa s mnm ANGCN 065 J2 Z c gt 5 7 HEATER ON OFF Pt DEBE EMIO100 BOARD J P 26 12 100 T 1 200W Z 2 e J306 27 13 ind j 3 s i 4 BT lt 4 SW T ACDIST BOARD BOARD EMOT200 BOARD amm ua m w ET m MOTHER BOARD LL 114 SOURCE SW J18 COOLING Al UNIT mi Bl J17 d AD DC POWER mel B bV 24V J13 etc ee a ERO G ACDIST BOARD B3 e ns POWER UNIT Vo DC POWER SUPPLY LAMP MINI CLEAR SUPPLY REQUEST J 14 725 412 ACDIST BOARD 1308 7 T J306 CN2 El C25 DRV BOARD BOARD gt IC FY EMOT200 BOARD Sc LL m J P 22 100 J14 E l M 8 IC Hb wi j 4 3 to gt wn lt gt NE an gt FF n D0 ACDIST BOARD DRV BOARD EMOT200 BOARD _ J P510 Yellow lt ISE ARM UP DOWN io j P620 1313 1241 Red 93 1016 1304 IC G11 IC B13 H ISE d 21 13 BT 5 15 67 SYRINGE Brown 9 5 ET AT
95. by stop key input Printout can be stopped after the contents of trace in one cycle have been printed b Atext is printed on two lines when it is longer than 20 characters Table 2 6 Control Codes and Corresponding Character Strings Printed Character String NUL Control Code NEX Use in AU Analyzer Unit 05 ENQ 06 ACK 07 BEL 1A SUB 1B ESC 1C FS 1D GS 1E RS 1F US 5 Communication Trace Printout 5 0 5 0 Communication Trace 94707725 16230 t tle gt 5 A 10110ABCDEFG Occ dg s Oe ee el HOS T AU 10110ABCDEFG DO 06205209 gt 5 VO7LOABCDEEG 08205200 5 gt 2 0o 04 LO AU HOST A 10210ABCDEFG i t Communication start and end time points Communication mode and error message 08 03 00 08 05 01 Communication text example HOSI SAU CHAR ERR A 05105ABCDEFGHIJKL LO LO 10104 2 6 4 Cumulative Instrument Operation List Cont Control serum SIAT Stat sample 1 Routine Routine sample 3 2 Calib Calibration solution 4 Cum rFerations List 95711 7358 17 43 Power 445 Feration 158Hr Test Count Test Routine Cali ST 1 12782 5 12784 15785 15786 TSTB 5 88 TSTB3 13118 TST11 TST12 TST13 TST14 TST15 TST1 amp TST1 TST153 15713 15728 TST21 T3122 15725 13724 T9125 ES za Co Ca Co
96. d Alarm Category Level Description Remedy xm TEMP WARNING The water temperature of Check the thermistor CONTROL incubation bath is higher or thermostat of than 45 0 heater WARNING The water temperature of Same as above incubation bath is outside a range of 37 0 5 C This is checked only at operation WARNING The water level of Replenish water or incubation bath is too low check the drain solenoid valve 701 REF period of 24 hours has Exchange incubation WATER passed since exchange of bath water incubation bath water 711 DISTILLED _ The water level of distilled Check the water level WATER water tank is too low sensor This alarm will not be issued during initialization and water exchange 712 DIST pee The water level of distilled Same as above WATER water tank is too low 721 DIST Kl icis The water level sensor in Check float switch WATER distilled water tank is SENSOR abnormal 724 The waste solution reservoir Check waste solution is full tank detection 711 SIPPER EN The negative pressure of Check vacuum level vacuum pump is too low at vacuum suction 781 VACUUM WARNING Water is accumulated in the Check SV12 or SV14 TANK vacuum tank 811 to PHOTOME WARNING In passed cell blank 1 Replace light 813 TER LAMP measurement a value of source lamp more than 3 3 Abs is 2 Check 12 V indicated in any one of 4 power supply measurements 3 times or less
97. detector ON OFF Alarm Remaining number cf pulses abnormally large NO YES YES ON Remaining number pulses 0 NO 2 28 In check procedure other than 7 and 8 motor running status is checked after time out When running a motor time out error occurs Operation check procedure at 2 pitch return of the sample disk is the operation check procedure at 2 pitch feed of the sample disk 9 is the check at resetting Alarm 10 HP detector ON Alarm 40 Inner track detector ON 2 3 gt Parameter Check Parameter check is carried out on the channel for which test is selected on the CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen at start of analysis 2 3 1 Processing Flow 1 Atinput of START key in STANDBY status Twin test simultaneous analysis parameter check NG STOP m OK Analytical method 1 check Serum index analytical method check Reagent relationship check at carry over cleaning CH ACTIVATE check Check result Calibration parameter check Volume check Upper lower limit value check Test to test compensation check sa STOP Analytical mode check NG 5 95 1 2 3 2 Details of Parameter Check No Designation Details of Check Remarks of Check Display 1 Check of The following are checked TWIN TEST 1 to 37 Details of this check parameters for measurable level 1 CH No are given in De
98. end ae Fig 12 4 Sample Probe Position Adjustment of Reagent Probe and Stirring Rod a b Place the 50 mL reagent bottle at channel 1 of the reagent disk and execute Probe Adjust R Probe Horiz Check the respective positions of the probe rinsing bath and reagent bottle each time the EXECUTE key is pressed Adjust the probe position by hand if deviated above the cell and through pulse adjustment if deviated above the reagent bottle Remove the reagent bottle from the reagent disk and adjust Probe Adjust R Probe Vert The R probe moves down and the height of the reagent bottle bottom is measured Adjust the distance between the cell holder assy and stirring rod end by use of the furnished spacer Press the Execute key and check the position with reference to the rinsing bath 12 9 Stirring 2 screw Upper end of spacer 7 3 7 holder Spacer Fig 12 5 Position of Reagent Probe and Stirring Rod 3 Check of Rinse Mechanism a Check the distance between the cell and nozzle tip b Execute Mechanism Check c Check the amount of cushion when the nozzles 6 pcs are moved down d Check if the bottom of the nozzle tip is oblique to the cell so the nozzle position should be adjusted by hand Hinse nozzle Nozzle tip ae e Reaction cuvette Fig 12 6 Position of Nozzle of Rinse Mechanism 4 Check of Rinse Water Volume Execute Mecha
99. excluding Error occurs when the following cases the position No of ST Routine Sample Stat Sample 5 is Disk 1 to 400 or space 1 to 50 or space specified range or 0 on the stat sample Position 1 to 35 or space 2 to 35 or space position setting No screen Sample Sample No information Position No ID Mode 1520 to 7E right justified NO ID Mode Same as above Error occurs when the control code of each test is any of 00 to 1F If any test is outside the specified range error occurs Inquiry Test 1 Test selecting information for a routine stat information selecting sample is any other than 0 to 4 information Channel count is outside the specified range 16 42 16 8 Specifications of Communication Trace 16 8 1 Overview This is an auxiliary function for outputting the stored data onto the printer as a logging in order to check the contents of communication between the analyzer and host This function is selectable on the communication parameter screen 16 8 2 Trace Data The time point of communication execution the direction of communication and the contents of message are stored The data to be stored differs between the cases below 1 In Normal Communication Frame character function character and sample information are stored However only frame character and function character are stored for the text without sample information NOTE NOTE Storage is made
100. for the number of retries on the communication parameter screen 2 Retry Due to Communication Error If a communication error NOTE 4 occurs retry is made immediately before the end of current communication cycle When the number of retries NOTE 5 exceeds the maximum number of retries allowed before communication error NOTE 6 the relevant resent data will be canceled and the next text will be sent NOTES 4 Hardware error or text error 5 The number of retries made consecutively 6 Sameasin NOTE 3 of 1 above 16 18 16 5 Status Transition 16 5 1 Status Transition Matrix only in non transfer for analytical data alone Table 16 7 Event from Host MOR analytical data req SUS REC SPE RES specific Time out Error in Data of 2 or Final Data resending suspension suspension TS sample req Hardware Text More Samples req req req specification Event from Analyzer Host Host TS Inquiry Real time Transfer Batch comm comm Req TS Data Out Req for Transfer Status in Analyzer Param Param managem from 902 Specific Req from N Y Y N 7 Sample Screen ANY transfer 2 Initial status NO for host communication parameter Idling no data to be transferred on analyzer and host sides LPR transfer wait before LPR tansfer HPR transfer wait before HPR transfer HPR LPR transfer wait before HPR LPR transfer SPE transfer wait be
101. gae LED 63 A 65 ap 5 171124 Programmable NON oscillator Si 2 58 9 ALT Us 5 1 IPRNT95 19 s 15 1 VR2 1 VH1 L D x HC i HARE ELS T OP177 17903 REF 01 2881 je 1 16 VR3 VR4 AD converting section 10 10 3 LED and VH lt BI IN BSY1 BSY2 R LED1 LED2 LEDS TI JJ lt VR2 VR VR4 LED Function Lit upon interrupt request from EMIO100 board Extinguished during operation of ADC channel 1 3 4 Extinguished during operation of ADC channel 2 Extinguished when HB command is abnormal Not mounted Not mounted Not mounted VR Function For ADC ADS7807 span correction For ADC ADS7807 offset correction For adjustment of indicated temperature value For adjustment of actual temperature in incubation bath VH1 and VR2 are not adjusted after shipment from the factory already adjusted with exclusive tool Differences from Conventional AD System gt Described below are the differences between the ADC mounted on the EMIO100 board and the conventional one by comparing with the ADC V board ECC ONE ADC V EMIO100 A D System Number of ADCs Number of channels Data averaging Double integral type Sequential comparison type 1 pc 4 ch switching type Analog averaging with Avera
102. i The number of remaining pulses is zero ii Abnormal fall detection is activated within 2 mm of the cup bottom level recognized in probe adjustment C Other than A and B Pre detection refers to liquid level detection till a time point just before sample aspiration since start of probe fall 2 O Output x Space 3 O Issued x Not issued 2 4 5 Alarm Check Method 1 Photometry Assay Calibration Check a SD check of approximate expression When SD in the difference between the automatically generated calibration curve and the measured absorbance value in non linear calibration is larger than SD limit absorbance comment SD is printed SD value is printed under the test name in the result of calibration Unless check is desired input 999 9 Duplication check In measurement of reagent blank and standard solution comment DUP is printed when the difference in absorbance between two measurements is larger than duplicate limit absorbance Unless check is desired input 32000 Sensitivity check When the difference in absorbance between reagent blank STD1 and standard solution having the maximum concentration if there are multiple standard solutions comment SENS is printed Unless check is desired input O Standard solution 1 absorbance check When the absorbance of reagent blank standard solution 1 exceeds standard 1 absorbance range comment S1 ABS is printed In an end point assay test the absorban
103. if it is an analytical data text is resent to restart communication REC Sent from host when it wants analyzer to suspend communication for the specified time In this case the analyzer judges that host could receive the analytical data text normally and the analytical data text is not resent after reception of MOR frame 16 14 Basic Control Procedure Events on analyzer side RUN highlighted gt CANCEL for host communication parameter on start condition screen First data transfer for sample No 1 Final data transfer for sample No 1 Analytical data transfer for sample No 5 RUN highlighted gt CANCEL for host communication parameter on start condition screen ANY ANY SPE SPE SPE ANY FR1 END END END ANY ANY Events on host side State of communication Communication start SPE SPE _ TS request SPE MOR MOR MOR MOR RES MOR HEP MOR Analytical data request Analytical data transfer Analytical data request for sample No 5 request MOR Neither analyzer nor host has data MOR to be transferred Communication stop Contents of Each Frame Contents SPE TS request for one specific sample SPE TS response for one specific sample FR1 END Analytical data transfer HES Analytical data request for specific sample HEP Resending request 16 15 16 4 4 Termination and Restart of
104. minute reaction time at cell position 38 to 47 10 Feed of cell 48 to S pipetting position 11 Repetition of no 1 to 10 on 18 second cycle _ 1 O 4 Mechanical Operation when Sample is Short rata of Internal Alarm SIpper Data Output Standard Aspiration Aspiration Occurrence Solution x x x x x x x 9 For details of A and B refer to the specifications of the sample probe Sample probe alarm occurrence conditions and mechanical operation Error Handling Upon occurrence of error in ISE hardware WARNING or STOP alarm is issued For the sample already pipetted into the cell data is not output if an error occurs before sipper aspiration because data is not verified Mechanical Operation when Reagent is Short ISE Diluent Internal Standard Reagent Short Solution Aspiration Aspiration Data Output Internal standard x solution Aspiration discharge is conducted if a liquid level sensor is provided 5 3 Configuration of ISE Hardware ISE Hardware Configuration AMP AMP w s m m electrode Vn K electrode Vk electrode Vc G 1 G 20 ADC control Software Ref electrode Vr Reference voltage V2 AMP AMP Reference voltage V8 G 1 G 1 Driver Application Reference voltage VO ADC controller Vo
105. more 1 Supervised only during preparation operation and sampling stop The others are supervised in all statues 7 19 0c Z Control Cyclic processing system instrument control system Instrument monitoring Key input control Time chart control Alarm management e Status transition control be Batch processing system qon TS management Pede Reagent management z Interrupt processing system 7155577 Mechanism control eet ADC control 596565 Barcode communication control Water level e Timer E START e Temperature e Power on time Fuse S STOP unavailable in easy analysis mode STOP T M e Emergency Scheduling Channel registration Sample management e Reaction disk e Sample probe S disk e R probe disk Stirrer ISE e Data processing request Alarm level updating Retry management Alarm logging Status transition Routine sample STD sample Printer request Alarm control e Alarm for indication e Control sample Stat sample Remaining reagent volume management S probe down Photometry Photometer check Temperature control Sample ID probe down ISE potential conversion e Cell blank measurement JO 7 7 3 1 Status Transition routine easy analysis Status Transition routine analysis mode 54 POWER FAIL PARAMETER CHECK S STOP 13 Resta
106. of main frame Switch No Factory Setting Validity or invalidity of forced panel data initialization 205 starts in a special operation mode where only the SW2 1 ON initialization of panel data memory is carried out At startup the memory initialize menu is displayed OFF NT20S starts in the usual operation mode O Panel display language mode SW2 2 Messages are indicated in English OFF Messages are indicated in Japanese O System menu cannot be indicated If an error has occurred SW2 3 at start the system menu is automatically indicated but O transition to transmission mode cannot be made swe4 ON 5 I Brackets indicate the factory setting 15 16 e Wiring Wire Color Signal Direction Shield Purple Output Brown Input Pink Output Blue Input Black Yellow Input White Output Gray Output Red Input BL 180 5 V e Pin Arrangement Pin No Connector Case CO OI 5 N 9 4 3 2 1 D sub 9 pins female O O O O specifications terminal definition 4 40 screw male 9 8 7 6 OK 15 17 Signal Direction Input Input Output Output Output Output Input Input e Connecting Procedure Described below 15 the method of connecting 205 and host with RS 232C Connector Pin Arrangement of NT20S gt The connector has the following specifications Electrical characteristics C
107. of the corresponding test is being done or not being done when analysis for two tests is not being made at the same time When analyzing two tests at the same time the analytical parameters are not identical Sub codes 1 to 36 4211 TWLN 1 to 36 WARNING TEST ch 2 16 signify the channel numbers d Alarm es Category Level Description Remedy 4201 to Unassigned Replace the 4203 reference electrode Liquid level detection for IS DIL solution solution with new one Check the ISE reagent volume otart setting in order from the tests that are designated by the Measured Point of the first half of the 1 channel 2 Test Analysis Method 3 Point 1 Point and Rate Rate B When not analyzing two tests at the same time do not designate Two Test Analysis for the Analysis Parameter With the Analysis Parameter screen for the applicable test unify all the parameters below for the Simultaneous 2 Test Analysis Test Analytical Method Reaction Time Sample Volume Reagent Pipetting volume R1 R3 Calibration Method Calibration Point Standard solution volume Standard solution position d Alarm Sub Description Remedy 4511 to CHEMISTRY 1 to 36 WARNING 1 The relationship Correct the 4548 PARAME ch between assay code and parameter TER photometric point is improper 2 The assigned ph
108. preset photometric points are P1 and P2 and the difference in absorbance between two wavelengths at photometric point P is E 1 In 1 point assay PC value p2 1 K Ep2 p k Liquid volume correction factor Note that k 2 1 when 1 lt P1 2 lt 5 6x P1 2 lt 16 17 lt P1 2 lt 33 34 lt P1 2 lt 73 Prozone check is not carried out if P2 0 2 In 2 point assay PC value P2 P3 Ep Note that check is not carried out if P3 0 or lt 100 x 10 Abs When P2 0 P2 is used In either case of 1 and 2 prozone check is not made for STD 1 measurement Data Alarm Printer S Reaction limit Over All points NG Only one point OK Only two or three points OK Photometry assay only In 2 point rate 1 point amp rate rate A or rate B assay the main wavelength absorbance at the photometric point to be used for calculation exceeds the reaction limit value value obtained after automatic correction of input reaction limit value The error condition varies depending on the number of photometric points within the reaction limit range as shown below 1 The reaction limit is exceeded at all points in the input photometric range The reaction limit is exceeded at the second and subsequent points excluding the first point The reaction limit is exceeded at the th
109. reference electrode priming Cycle 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SEC 3 M 8 1 13 3 L Reaction table 5 1 9 1 Stop Stop Stop 32 cell rotation Sampling mechanism wash 12 cell rotation 5 cell rotation J PCP check S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 OFF S nozzle outside wash OFF SV8 Reagent dispensing Upper dead point mechanism H syringe R syringe SV3 OFF H nozzle outside wash OFF SV6 Stirring mechanism Upper dead Stirring rod rotation DER Stirring rod outside wash OFF SV5 Heagent disk Stop Sample disk Stop 3 0 Upper dead point ISE sipper mechanism Down 24 3 7 Upper dead point 17 4 ISE syringe 9 0 0 4 4 7 aspiration Discharge 2 4 2 6 ISE syringe SV16 ON OFF 2 6 3 7 17 4 SV17 17 4 ON 2 4 OFF 17 4 SV18 OFF 0 4 2 5 Pinch valve SV19 ON OFF Y 2 9 Stop at upper dead point Cell ri hani 2 02 ell rinse mechanism N Mi die 0 7 1 5 Concentrated dilute 0 1 1 4 1 9 2 5 3 1 vacuum waste solution SV14 ON ON OFF 2 9 9 0 14 0 Concentrated waste solution SV13 OFF ON 9 0 14 0 Dilute waste solution OFF ON SV12 Cell blank SV10 OFF 1 2 2 2 Cell rinse SV 11 ON OFF Trough rinse SV 9 OFF 1 Internal standard aspiration 280 uL 5 18 ISE Priming Time Chart 1 2 3 4 5 Reaction tabl eaction table Stop Sampling mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 Reag
110. repeated as follows W1 W2 W3 W1 The probe moves down 5 mm 90 pulses deviated from upper dead point and aspirates 3 uL of air The cup position is repeated as follows no 1 no 2 no 35 no 1 on the outer track 1 Previous page Reagent dispensing system No operation 6 Reagent disk M 39 Sampling at Pos 1 to Shift above discharge position 39 probe moves cell into rinsing down 5 mm and does bath not aspirate reagent 5 Probe moves down Shift to cell Rinsing bath to liquid level sensor activating point maximum amount of descent but does not aspirate Hitergent S o o 0 p D e 4 This operation is conducted in 18 seconds 1 cycle refer to the operation time chart Input of the End key is checked at the beginning of processing and itis terminated if input 5 probe operation is conducted at R3 R1 R2 discharge timing 6 probe operation is started from aspiration timing in cycle and conducted at R3 R1 R2 discharge timing H Previous page 6 d Stirrer rotation Stirring Stirrer rotation cell Rinsing bath cell Descent to cell rinsing bath This operation is conducted in 18 seconds 1 cycle refer to the operation time chai Input of the End key is checked at the beginning processing and it is terminated if input Stirrer operation is conducted at R3 R1 R2 stir
111. rinse bath 24 R1 cell side detector 11 Rotation motor 26 R2 cell side detector position 20 detector Upper dead point detector HP 21 1 upper dead point detector Resistor type liquid level sensor 14 Up down motor 13 Home position detector above cell 22 R2 upper dead point detector 7 R1 up down motor lt 3 Detector for ADC 8 R2 up down motor 2 Up down motor 7 Reagent 1 4 Disk Mechanism 7 Home position 2 Serum Sampling Mechanism 1 detector Rotation 2 7 Abnormal descent detector 13 Rotation motor 12 Upper dead point detector N 8 Detector for count Resistor type liquid level sensor 11 position detector above cell 11 ISE Mechanism 1 2 Up down motor 3 Sampling Disk Mechanism 6 Home position 5 detector 17 S upper dead point detector HP 7w 1 8 R1 upper dead point detector HP 19 R2 upper dead point detector HP 17 R1 up down motor 16 5 up down 18 2 up down motor 15 Rotation x K Upper dead point detector 9 Motor Detector Arrangement Analytical Unit Up down motor 4 Inner outer 5 Intermediate track detector track detector motor 8 5 Sensor Logic Inversion Unit Name Condition upon Detection Outpu
112. serum index measurement is specified Table 16 18 Channel No bbb Measured value bbbbbb Data alarm D 5 BLANK 1 to 4 6 characters each The transfer format of each cell blank data is shown below Transfer sequence 10 10 10 M L unit 1x 10 Abg Example bbb 50 6 Point count 3 characters The number of photometric points to be transferred in one text is transferred EU CUR Transfer sequence 10 10 10 Table 16 19 7 ABS 1 to 35 Absorbance data in the entire reaction process difference data between two wavelengths at each photometric point is transferred in the same format as of the above cell blank data When the point count is less than 35 data is closely transferred in sequence starting from ABS 1 Point count 16 34 Transfer of photometry assay calibration data from analyzer to host Composition of text STX I Gui Channel No STD count Calibration alarm STD data 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 32 Each parenthesized numeral indicates the byte count STD data 6 SD value information ETX BCC Variable 32 8 1 1 1 Frame character 1 character 7 is transferred 2 Function character 2 characters G __ is transferred 3 Channel No 3 characters A test code in photometry assay calibration is indicated in a three digit integer Test numbers are bb1 to 536 which correspond to test 10 10 10 codes in the analyzer
113. size number of transferred words between STX code and end code is selectable between the two given below NOTES 1 The end code character is settable up to four characters So calculate the maximum number of transferable channels according to the expression shown below Fractions are rounded down and a numerical value 48 indicates the total byte count of fixed length n in Table 6 4 Text size 256 or 512 bytes Textsize 48 10 In batch communication in the 256 byte mode data is sent in up to five texts for each sample In this case the analyzer sends the first text and then the next one soon after reception of the MOR frame from the host The total number of analytical data to be transferred is variable according to the number of specified channels When ISE data or serum indexes extend into the next text they are set in it for transfer When the absence of ISE unit is set on the system setting screen or by the DIP switch the analytical data of ISE tests will not be sent 1 Channel count 3 characters The number of channels to be transferred in one text 15 sent Maximum number of transferable channels Ec Ed Transfer sequence 10710 10 Example 561 or 001 b10 Channel count right justified NOTE The analyzer transfers data for up to 36 channels in both real time communication and batch communication When including serum indexes three tests of lipemia hemolysis and icterus electrolytes three tests o
114. solution in a container and immerse the reaction cells 6 sets in the solution Before turning on power set all reaction cells 2 Fill at least the deionized water tank at least 7 full with deionized water 3 Take of the water return tube from pump to tank at the tank side to de activate the pump 4 When the water raised up in this tube fix the tube again 12 8 Operation after Turning On Power 1 Turn on the main switch 2 Turn the power switch 3 The initial screen copyright notice appears 4 Enter the date 5 Execute Reset to eliminate air bubbles from each syringe 6 Execute Incubator Water Exchange 2 or 3 times Check if Hitergent is injected in the incubator with the R probe at water exchange 12 9 Adjustment and Check of Each Part 1 2 Adjustment of Sample Probe Position a b Place the sample cups at Pos 1 and W1 on the S disk and execute Probe Adjust S Probe Horiz Check the respective positions of the probe sample cup and rinsing bath each time the Execute key is pressed Adjust the probe position by hand if deviated above the cell and through pulse adjustment if deviated above the sample cup Place the sample cups at Pos 1 2 and W1 on the S disk and execute Probe Adjust S Probe Vert The S probe moves down and the height of the sample cup bottom at each position is measured i Cell reaction cuvette EDS lo Liquid level sensor Probe
115. specified for a reagent photometry assay 15 also specified for other photometry assay 2 The same reagent position is specified for both carry over cleaning agent and photometry assay or ISE test Analysis does not start 5481 CLB IS 108 1 WARNING When ISE is provided Check the position POS calibrator or control for control positions are set at 55 to 57 calibration Analysis does not start 5511to ACI ERROR 114 1 106 WARNING Barcode IC malfunctions Replace RSDIST 5516 Unassigned PC board Unassigned Sample Unassigned Unassigned Transfer 2 19 d Alarm Sub Control Category 2242 Description Remedy No 5561 to FD WRITE 119 1 5568 119 2 i i l i l i 5571 to FD READ 120 1 5578 i i 1 Clean the FD 2 Replace the FD A hardware error has occurred in writing the routine sample with a new one measurement data 3 Replace the FD A hardware error has drive occurred in writing the stat sample measurement data A hardware error has occurred in writing the control sample measurement data A hardware error has occurred in writing the individual or cumulative alarm information A hardware error has occurred in writing the parameter data A hardware error has occurred in execution of FD formatting copying into FD or FDD cleaning A hardware error has occurred in writing the cell blank data A hardware error
116. specify test selection HES To request a specific sample b Transmission procedure in special case Even if the host sends any other frame than MOR while the analyzer is transferring a sample having 2 or more tests to the host the analyzer responds to the relevant frame and resumes sending from a succeeding text upon receiving the MOR frame Transfer sequence 3 Same sample Analyzer HOST Effect of this system 1 No delay for SPE 2 Identifiable by host because sample identifying information is provided for each text 16 13 5 gt Resending Request analyzer lt gt host Resending is requested if there is any abnormality in the contents of the text received from the opposite side or to request the same text again for some reason From analyzer to host Occurrence of error Resending request Same text b From host to analyzer Resending request Analyzer Test selection directive HOST Occurrence Test selection of error Inquiry c For resending with other than REP Suspection request Same text Analytical data transfer Analytical data Positive response transfer Frame A Description SUS Sent from host when it wants analyzer to suspend communication for the specified time In this case the analyzer judges that host could not receive the text for some reason and when communication is restored MOR frame is sent from host the finally sent text
117. syringe moved to upper Syringe moved down 50 dead point 3 pulses and then up Air purge A A OK S disk returned S disk moved to OK 1 pitch reset position ie e NG 1 pitch feed NG Air purge A A A 7 5 2 Wash 1 Rinse Mechanism Rinse water Cycle 1 to 50 supply SV11 B x Hinse water Cycle 1 to 50 supply SV10 i Cycle 3 to 9 E 2 R Probe Mechanism NG A Reagent probe up down detergent aspiration Reagent probe rotation rinsing bath detergent bottle A A 3 Stirring Mechanism Stirring mechanism rotation cell gt rinsing bath Stirring mechanism rotation rinsing bath cell 4 Sampling Mechanism lt 9 probe rotation OK S probe up down OK s probe rotation probe rotation Wie rinsing bath gt detergent aspiration R WA cell cell rinsing bath lt W1 position NG A OK YES lt gt SV1 ON SV1 OFF SV4 ON SV4 OFF 7 5 3 Mechanism Check 1 MAINTENANCE screen by operator No Mechanism check required Yes Judgement Input of Execute Mechanism check Input of Stop Abnormal Operation check Normal END 3 Alarm indication 4 FD alarm logging Function The reaction disk sampling system reagent dispensin
118. that data at initialization is discarded At this time ADC CALIB alarm is issued if A or B is out of the range given below 7546 lt A lt 8341 22640 gt B gt 25023 d Number of conversion bits 16 bits e The RESET command is issued to the ADC controller at initialization and T M resetting 7 2 1 ADC Timing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 gt gt 18 0 Photometry 222 5 9 2 18 0 12 2 12 7 Temperature ADC S Start R Read 7 14 7 2 2 Configuration of Photometry ADC Hardware Configuration of Photometry ADC Hardware MPX LOG AMP output for 12 wavelengths Buffer amplifier ADC controller 171 Driver Application software software DPRAM 1 Le Reference voltage 2 V ADC control Heference voltage 6 V 1 The ADC controller converts the analog values of the LOG AMP output voltage reference voltage 2 V and reference voltage 6 V to the digital ones upon receiving the instruction from the application via the driver and stores the digital values into the DPRAM The values are taken in the application via the driver 2 The application accesses to the driver but does not control the ADC directly ADC Setting Parameters e Integration 32 times e Hardware trigger time out 150 msec e Software trigger interval 30 msec 7 15 7 2 3 Configuration of Tempera
119. the procedure for installation of the product program In case of a failure in screen information transfer the next screen is displayed 12 17 5 Displayed in Case of Failure in Screen Information Transfer Screen data is destroyed ocreen information transfer has failed Execute installation again After initialization of the LCD module memory refer to 12 12 5 carry out Procedure for Installation of Screen Information installation again 12 11 5 Procedure for Initial Setting of LCD Module Explained below is initialization of the LCD module memory 1 Display of System Menu Power on the 902 main unit When there is no image data System Menu is displayed When the operation mode RUN lamp lit is set press the touch switch to display System Menu Initial Screen Display immediately after turning on power when image data is not registered space display Display immediately after turning on power when image data is destroyed System Menu Menu End Transfer Mode Maintenance Mode Screen data is destroyed 12 18 3 How to Display System Menu Upon simultaneously pressing 2 touch switches at the corners of the screen positions marked below the system menu is displayed L L System Menu Screen Execute operation for display of System Menu when image data Is not registered System Menu Menu End Transfer Mode Maintenance Mo
120. transfer of analytical data 16 21 16 5 3 Status Transition Diagramm analytical 16 23 16 6 Gontfiguralorn Table ies head usage epe ls uet haut Rad o Ced iod 16 24 16 6 1 Gompositomol Each nuy un 16 25 1662 Goni ua 16 38 16 7 Error GRECK 16 42 16 8 Specification of Communication 16 43 16 8 1 M 16 43 16 0 2 Trace xe na 16 43 16 8 8 Trace Data Storage eene mnnera 16 43 16 8 4 Resetting of Trace Data 16 44 1685 Trace Data Storage Capacity eec hentai De 16 44 C Ls 16 44 16 9 Hardware Specifications a ned eg Fate ee atc a 16 44 16 44 16 9 2 Board 16 45 169 Interracesltafial 16 47 16 94 HS 292C GCOHIUnICallOD varese sereni ritui ncs Ne US ER IG S E ei eo 16 48 16 9 5 iut uasa at 16 50 169 60 Gom
121. value temperature 8 Average incubator for incubator values temeprature in cycle 3 A 80 Information at acquisition of each counter value is 1 average of 4 calculated temperature set for error information values is set to the relevant temperature ADC return information storage area indicated by the pointer 2 Error InformationData 0 Normal 1 Inthe event of error in reference 2 V 6 V 1 Reference 2 V counter value abnormal measurement O is set for both 2 Reference 6 V counter value abnormal temperatures indicated by the pointer 3 Time out 200 msec 2 Inthe event of error in incubator 4 I O error temperature measurement 0 is set for the temperature 3 temperature is 0 unless cycles pass after initial startup because all temperatures are not set unmeasured area A ULONG Average incubator temperature in 3 cycles 1 Set the average value in cycles value rounded to 1st decimal point and multiplied by 10 2 If O error is acquired at least once for the temperature cycle 1 to 0 is set for the relevant temperature In addition alarm judgement at occurrence of error is not made In the event of error 0 C is output to the external object 3 Temperature acquisition is made before the lapse of cycles after intial startup 0 C is output 7 17 Temperature Measurement Sequence Dummy lead Dummy lead Dummy lead Dummy lead Dummy le
122. volume Db 2 Unused 3 Unused 4 Volume determined by analyzer side left to analyzer NOTES 1 The above channel count bbO to b37 is the number of effective channels from photometry assay channel 1 If bb3 is specified channels 1 to 3 are reflected on the analyzer with channels 4 to 37 ignored When there is at least one requested test it is desirable to set 37 Example 12 3 4 5 36 37 90000000000 Not reflected on analyzer analyzer side is followed Reflected on analyzer Channel count The analyzer side is obeyed if test request is made in a channel number beyond the specified channel count To avoid analysis for an unnecessary test set channel count 37 and request for only a test to be specified 2 Request for ISE is specifiable in the 37th channel i Specification of any other than 0 Select Na and Cl on the screen ii Specification of 0 No request Note that it is impossible to select a request for any of Na K and Cl from the host 16 40 In request for the isozyme test compensation test the other test necessary for isozyme calculation or test to test calculation is automatically supplied for analysis and tests added for serum indexes are transferred as well 4 When request for the calculation test is made judge and request the channel for the test necessary for the calculation When request for the A G ratio is made for example send test selecting information cons
123. width 225 x height 270 mm excluding coolant bath 15 2 3 Specifications of Electrical Components 1 Power relay Type G L 1A TJ Rated voltage 12V DC Rated current 158 2 Operation capacitor Electrolytic capacitor 210 V 20 uF JSU21 x 206AQC 3 Overload relay Type MRA98929 Minimum operation current 8A 4 Fan motor for capacitor Type PA2H3 AC fan 115 V AC 15 W 2 poles class E 15 4 15 2 4 Refrigerator Wiring Diagram 100VAC L Cooling unit 100 V AC Symbol Part Name CM Refrigerator FM Fan motor PM Pump PTC PTC starter OLR Overload relay TC Temperature regulator TH Thermistor SK Noise killer CN Connector 1990 15 2 5 Circuit Diagram of Refrigerator Control Circuit ACIOUV M n y LL 4 ae 5 187 tab terminal For FS Off at iow 9 water level Ic Time Chart of Temperature Control Power supply Thermistor temperature at bath bottom Pin M of IC2 for judgment of compressor ON temperature Pin 1 of IC2 for judgment of compressor OFF temperature 5 minute delay Compressor PRESS G7L relay Thermistor detection temperature Compressor PRESS relay 4 187 tab terminal 2 N Varistor N 15 Transformer 187 tab terminal 2 GND connection of unused terminal 87 tab terminal pd
124. 0 1 20 028 4501 Q2 L 197 10 211 A 13 9313 4313 J313 J313 J313 J313 4513 J313 J313 9313 x 4 7K x G24 1 041 15585 IC16 R93 24V4 MPO NAE D29 050 01 20 BI AUO1 20 042 15585 v a 16 R04 e O 043 15585 7 gt 4 7K 044 15585 1 N C x 4 7K 9 624 7 2 045 15585 5 pose 4 4 7K D31 032 AUO1 20 BT AU01 20 046 15585 4 7K bo 047 15585 w 1016 R99 Q4 EX e 048 15545 E x R i 5729 624 10 37 BIS 4313 Sample Syringe ISE Syringe GM OUTO 4 GM OUTO 5 GM OUTO 6 GM OUTO 7 GM OUT1 0 GM OUT1 1 GM OUT1 2 GM OUT1 3 GM OUT1 4 GM OUT1 5 GM OUT1 6 GM OUT1 7 GM OUT2 1 GM OUT2 2 GM 3 GM OUT2 4 4305 GAS 9305 9305 A19 9305 810 43050 9305 38 J305 OAS 9305 5 43050 4305 85 _ o M R IC17 1017 1 98 7 1017 4 1017 1018 4 1018 1018 4 1018 1018 4 A 987 97 OE IC18 lt IC18 4 IC18 4 1019 2 IC19 IC19 IC19 5 5n 55 4 DRV Circuit 2713520
125. 1 Communicating function Receiving function w s o HA o qa y me w H wu Sending of test selecting information inquiry for routine and stat samples Receiving of test selecting information inquiry for routine and stat samples Sending of analytical data for routine stat and control samples Sending of calibration result data photometry assay ISE Sending of absorbance data inentire reaction process routine stat Receiving of test selecting information for routine sample Sending of analytical data for routine stat and control samples Real time communication ml ol Batch rcommunication ee gt gt am 8 e e e e el 2 91 16 3 Each frame represents the purpose of a text contents of message Table 16 4 lists the frames Table 16 4 Frame List AU Analyzer side HOST System side pee e End 3A Frame directive Used for TS inquiry for only one specific sample bd TS Test selecting information HOST Used for TS direction HOST uses SPE for TS inquiry from HOST using SPE from AU as well HOST Specific sample Used when send data extends o
126. 1 6 10 R113 4 7K 24 5 o z 5 G24 24V5 7 _ E 1000p 1900p G24 24V5 79 e 10 38 6 9314 360 9314 9314 87 4314 A80 9314 Be 9314 904314 022314 4314 9024314 Alio 9314 3110 J314 A120 4314 O 4314 Ai30 J314 J514 SV 5 SV 6 SV 7 SV 8 SV 9 SV 10 SV 11 SV 12 SV 13 SV 14 SV 15 SV 20 DRV Circuit 27135201 7 10 M OVERFLOW N 3 J307 o1 R121 5V 1026 60312 je irrer Ro se 88 9312 Rotation GM OUTO 0 24 4 ONE ALG 9314 GM OUTO 1 9305 C 4314 Water Input p GM OUTO 2 J305 5 E 34 4315 S Syringe I E Je 4315 SV3 GM OUTO 3 J305 B2 gt Er 380 4313 R Syringe ET x 1000p oe 1019 R120 A12 4513 SV 16 m 4 7K 1000 GM OUT 0 J306Q 4 8729 p 313 4315 ISE Syringe EN O 72 624 LED ON OFF P DO bit 6 LED FOD5V 4502 LED ON P 8107 930 DO bit 7 10 39 DRV Circuit 27135201 8 10 HEATER T EA ENABLE N 9306 816 GM OUT 7 to AC Brd 12 V SWR S 2025 Se ON N J306 OR gt A4 9308 5581 GM OUT 5 12 V SWR 7 i Ic25 ua
127. 1 3 11 1 Discharge 11 7 11 1 Remainder discharge 11 3 11 0 tx n 10 9 11 4 13 1 13 5 16 8 11 Stirring 13 Wash 10 6 11 7 12 8 13 8 16 5 ON ON 10 4 11 5 125 137 16 3 11 0 13 2 16 8 ON 13 6 14 0 Rotation 14 0 ON 14 0 ON Routine plus ISE Time Chart Cycle 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SEC 3 2 5 1 8 1 9 1 13 3 Y Reaction table Stop Stop Stop 32 cell rotation cell rotation i Sampling mechanism 12 rotatio 5 cell rotation 13 5 14 0 17 3 18 0 wash m 14 7 16 6 PCP check Air aspiration ED S syringe S aspiration 5 1 to 50 uL iaa Bl 6 6 28 4 8 11 8 13 4 147 163 S syringe SV2 ON OFF ON 2 6 4 6 9 2 10 3 11 6 12 8 S nozzle outside wash ON OFF ON ON 5 8 Diluent agent diluent water 8 0 9 8 11 3 Reagent dispensing Upper dead point 7 7 Internal mechanism Rinsing bath tandard 10 2 11 1 8 6 9 2 H syringe 7 6 8692 102 11 3 1 2 3 4 1 7 11 1 H syringe SV3 OFF 6 2 7 6 11 3 i 5 9 7 5 11 0 R nozzle outside wash OFF SV6 4 4 Upper dead point 10 9 11 4 13 1 13 5 ise Stirring mechanism Wash 11 1 Stirring Wash 8 7 10 6 11 7 12 8 13 8 16 5 8 6 10 4 11 5 12 5 13 7 16 3 Stirring rod rotation OFF ON ON ON Pere 8 1 11 0 13 2 16 8 rod outside wash ON ON 5 0 73 Reagent disk Stop Rotation 2 Y 13 6 14 0 Sample disk Stop i Rotation ISE sipper mechanism Upper dead point ISE syringe ISE syringe SV16 OFF Na K CI SV17 OFF KCISV18 OF
128. 15 to 38 A 37 d 5 127 148 149 R syringe dag oba ns i discharge 90 94 HI discharge B Discharge 5 6 Discharge OOO NL ss ss 660 HL 48 153 aspiration as LIONS See mV piration OFF only Tr 2 122 Cycle 15 to 39 7 OFF Fox OFF R nozzle outside wash SV6 LOW de 1 and 392 ZON only cycle T4 and 3972 01 397 0 6 Upper dead point 5256 65 AA y Upper dead point 142146 8 x 179 Stirring mechanism Moved down in rinsing bath gt A 2911 cycle 14 and 39 17 15 to 39 Stirring rod rotation only in cycle 14 and 39 0N OFF y 0 8 se 76 17 4 Stirring rod outside wash only in cycle 14 and 39777 0 3 5 i 5 0 6 5 Reagent disk motais Stop at position no 39 10 8 12 3 _12 7 Cycle 1 Sample disk Stop at W1 position 5 pitches 1 bitch 4 W1POS Upper dead point ISE sipper mechanism ISE syringe Upper dead point ISE syringe SV16 OFF SV17 OFF SV18 OFF Pinch valve SV19 OFF 29 Stop at upper dead point 90 20 2 6 rinse mechanism Up Z Middle Middle 07 415 97 105 High low concentration i ETET EET 91 104 10 9 11 5 12 1 e TUE waste solution ON ON OFF ON ON 29 gt m H9 255 High concentration water ON ON drain SV13 3 2 8 2 12 2 172 Lew oon entrano water ON ON Cycle 11950 rain 12 Cell blank SV10 OFF ER
129. 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Reagent dispensing 0 36 8 4 5 4 9 5 6 8 5 8 7 mechanism RESET Reagent bottle 53 5 8 8 0 8 Y 1 4 3 9 injection 4 1 9 Reagent syringe 1 4 2 9 2 ra 3 9 Discharge Hitergent aspiration 550 uL 9 5 18 5 Reagent syringe PFS HE OFF ON 9 5 18 5 Reagent probe OFF ON outside wash SV6 23 28 550 uL x 15 times 8 25 mL Reagent disk Stirrer 135 20 Incubator water ON OFF supply SV4 130 OFF ON Incubator heater 140 Light source lamp SHE ON 130 Incubator water ORE ON circulating pump Vacuum pump VP 1 OFF Feed pump ON Incubator water 20 drain SV15 ON OEF Hitergent injection volume must be 1 of incubator capacity Operation ends at 175 sec 7 2 1 2 Forty nine cells are measured in each cycle Thirty nine measurements 4 cell blank measurements 35 sample absorbance measurements are made in each cycle In case of at least one ADC failure in thirty nine measurements data is 0 and ADC alarm is added ADC Time Refer to the description of ADC parameters 16667 X 63338B 25000 0 Calibration equation x100 000 ABS in terms of 10 mm cell measured with 6 mm cell Calibrated ADC count for 2 V voltage B Calibrated ADC count for 6 V voltage C Measured ADC count c Immediately after calibration subtraction is made atB initialization resetting upon operation start and T M resetting Note however
130. 2 3 indicates that absorbance falls due to excessive antigen Heaction Rate Ratio Method In 2 point assay check is performed according to the ratio of the initial reaction rate after addition of antiserum to the mean reaction rate s Check Abs R1 Rn antigen antiserum Time Fig 2 3 Antigen Readdition Method R1 Hn nth reagent Time 1st reagent Fig 2 4 Reaction Rate Ratio Method Antigen Readdition Method Reaction Rate Ratio Method 1 point assay 2 point assay Absorbance for concentration _ A A Am Ama calculation A XOT Ama 2 2 2 Prozone check value PC value Ama pc Am An m n 2 2 lt Judgment gt In case of limit value comment xxxP indicates PC value is printed when PC value is larger than the limit value In case of limit value below the comment is printed when PC value is smaller than the limit value e Prozone check will not be performed in the following cases 1 In STD 1 measurement 2 Ap Am lt 100 x 10 Abs 2 57 5 ISE Calibration Alarm Check Alarm Name Standard error Slope abnormal ISE prepare Internal standard concentration abnormal Calibration abnormal Alarm Check Method alarm setting condition Calibration is invalid Any of the following alarms has occurred ADC abnormal sample
131. 296 necessary storage capacity kb i Maximum storage i 1440 3 8000 at development 8000 capacity kb NOTES 1 The usable area on the application side of CRAM is 3 2 After FD formatting in IBM compatible format disk capacity is 1 44 MB However because of 512 bytes cluster too many files will degrade memory storage efficiency 3 Both system disk and data disk must have an FD file format of MS DOS 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 FLOW PATH DIAGRAMS LISHOI SOlENOIG V 55 3 1 3 2 Flow E 3 3 WASI T C 3 4 3 4 1 Details of WASH Processing 3 5 Carrty over Evasior cba oe mod Su REDE aa 3 6 3 1 SV No SV 1 SV 2 SV SV 4 SV 5 SV 6 SV 8 SV 9 SV 10 SV 11 SV 12 SV 13 SV 14 SV 15 SV 16 SV 17 SV 18 SPV 1 3 FLOW PATH DIAGRAMS List of Solenoid Valves Open Close 2 way ENT Sway Type Energized _ Voltage m Application Bway Reagent probe outside lesse sob oed probe outside 11 Rinsing and nozzle tip Rinsing and cell washing 2 Waste solution discharge 5 2 Waste solution discharge sway
132. 308 1307 ri AC FUSE 45V mg J Br 109 A28 4 4 GMCONT DRV BOARD MOTHER BOARD 200 BOADER gt O n F il A 1302 1308 2 12V J14 res das di ACDIST BOARD 1307 IC B13 18 i i i 9 1 1 1 8 gt MOTHER BOARD 200 BOARD DRV BOARD DI BOARD 8L LL SUPPLY VALVE S SYRINGE VALVE S SYRINGE VALVE INCUBATION WATER SUPPLY J P650 J314 J P600 9313 CX 8 J PB10 4313 ei i 88 j P653 334 24 x N2 T B IC 67 w ERR mM me p LOWM FY uO YY 6 m J305 16 FT Q5 1617 ool 16 97 GMCONT 57 cn d gt jte ca 9 C ea lt gt pa c GNCONT re 3305 TM lt a lt gt DRV BOARD EMOT200 BOARD 6L LL 1 2853 J34 x 124V STIRRER ae d N IC F7 o n T s a GGG 3 9653 J314 f x s CN2 C P x pamat e 4 941 PROBE in WASH Q6 1611 m db di Eee eee s s lt gt an cn lt j Pb3
133. 430402 GP5M1 PS 5304 24 DG 3040 20 GP6 MO 1 AY 6 0 2 3040 At GP6 3 ve AL 6 0 4 1304 GP6 0 5 3040 DG 304 DRV Circuit 27135201 4 10 5V R155 R157 47K 10 36 24 5 R156 R69 24 5 R158 47K 5V 5V REFS Are C46 4 7 38 4 401312 1636 x J312 10 149 J312 LA7021M ours 0 BIS J312 15 ____ 4 4312 axe 650 2200 624 020 2 2K WRP32 R67 024 AIS ey 4312 88 1312 15 090 5273 SLA7021M ori 84131 ouri iid HIF 4 40P T 624 Stirrer Arm UP DOWN ISE Sipper Arm UP DOWN GP7 1 GP7 2 MO 3 GP7 MO 4 GP7 M1 1 GP7 M1 2 GP8 MO 1 GP8 MO 2 GP8 3 GP8 MO 4 GP8 1 1 GP8 1 2 GP8 M1 3 8 M1 4 J304 A19 4504 43040 4505 9504 4304 A8 J304 C 84 J304 4304 O 9304 0 x x x x x IC15 pee e gt IC15 1 IC15 DRV Circuit 27135201 5 10 D33 15885 24V4 lt 054 15585 035 15585 R87 4 7K 056 15585 R88 4 7K 037 15585 2494 R89 4 7K 001 20 638 15585 R90 4 7K D39 15585 R91 4 7K 040 15588 001 20 025 026 001 20 4501 Q1 6 624 027 eL
134. 56 transferred data 8 End of data code BCC CR LF ETX BCC ETX ETX ETX LF CKSH CKSL CR 9 18 7 JISSbisorASCI 10 Synchronization Asynchronous system system Start stop transmission 11 Transmission Determined by host control procedure id Numbrofprs _ Nontransparent mode ASCI 14 Cable length 15 m max RS 232C 7 2 Features a The communication cycle is not synchronized with the analysis cycle So analyzer replies upon receiving a response from the host b The data bit stop bit parity check baud rate maximum volume of transferred data and end of data code are selectable by the user 16 1 3 Outline of Text The format of communication text is shown below Transfer sequence End of data code 1 to 4 characters Data field variable Frame character 1 character Start of data code 1 character Each block of text is detailed below a Start of data code 1 character STX code ASCII code 02 b Frame character 1 character Refer to Table 16 3 c Data field variable When there is no data field non specific request text There is no data field because ANY REP 505 and are control frames i When there is a data field specific request text Frames other than in i above The data field includes a function character d End of data code 1 to 4 characters Any of the fo
135. 7 1 0 Cell blank SV10 OFF ON Cell rinse SV11 1 2 ON 22 NT 0 3 06 Trough rinse SV 9 OFF ON 5 13 Routine plus ISE Time Chart Reaction table Sampling mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 Reagent dispensing mechanism H syringe R syringe SV3 nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism Stirring rod rotation Stirring rod outside wash SV5 Reagent disk Sample disk ISE sipper mechanism 0 1 2 3 3 2 Stop Same as routine 3 0 4 12 cell rotation 5 6 7 8 5 1 Stop Upper dead point stop 5 cell rotation 4 2 ISE syringe ISE syringe SV16 Na K CI SV17 KCI SV18 Pinch valve SV19 17 5 0 0 0 4 17 5 4 ON 0 3 ON 17 9 17 5 0 4 OIN Cell rinse mechanism Concentrated dilute vacuum waste solution 5 14 Concentrated waste solution SV13 Dilute waste solution blank SV10 Cell rinse SV1 1 Trough rinse SV 9 4 20 2 6 2 9 Up Middle 0 7 1 5 0 1 14 19 2 5 3 1 ON ON 2 9 0 7 1 0 ON 12 122 oS 06 OFF Discharge internal standard diluent water 4 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 10 0 ON Stop at upper dead point OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 9 0 ON 9 0 ON 13 13 3 12 4 12 9 lt gt ISE ADC 13 1 14 15 16 32 cell rotation Cycle 8 17 18 SEC PCP check 14 0 14 0 OFF ON on Cycle to 8 ISE
136. 8 0 4 Pinch valve S 19 Cell rinse mechanism Concentrated dilute Vacuum waste solution SV14 Concentrated waste solution SV13 Dilute waste solution SV12 blank SV10 Cell rinse S V1 1 Trough rise S V9 Incubation bath water supply SV4 Incubation bath heater Light source lamp Incubation bath circulating pump 2 Incubation bath water drain SY15 Feed pump 1 Vacuum pump VF 1 11 1 19 1 11 7 73 7 9 1 9 3 Remainder discharge 8 11 4 Airaspiration 8 0 9 0 113 14 5 OFF Discharge oN Ll o _ 11 0 14 4 OFF ON Upper dead point OFF OFF 5 0 3 Stop Rotation Stop at internal standard position no 37 Stop 3 0 Upper dead point Upper dead point Z Discharge rinse solution interna standard Simas from ON 525 OFF cycle 10 and then internal standard aspiration a ON repeated 3 times OFF 2 5 ON OFF 1 5 29 Stop at upper dead point 2 1 2 5 U Middle 4 1 4 1925 31 ON ON OFF 2 9 9 0 140 ON 90 14 0 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 SWITCH SETTING Short Pins on Mother Board dap e esta as dui sates 6 1 Setting of DIP Switch on ECPU237 Board 6 1 Setting on DIP Switches on EMOT200 6 1 LOG AMP P N 707 5009 5222 ua 6 2
137. 8 2 A29 c29 30 A31 lt HQ 2 O H Di O Gi ai e g g 4 I 1 e 1 Tm mm m m m a 1 621 ax a Q 9205 5 gt 15V 15V C Q o e Q e Q Q o Q 2 Q e C Q Q REV ADSTART SWSTATUS HEATER 10 22 vio 12 12 thd 012 62 0 ni o ni o TIJA 85 3 92 2 2 22 2 1353 Q 10H 54 250 MVSB100 5 5 558 250 AGt 81015 6101577 AS t 1075 6101577 ZIDA AS 21015 1101577 7122 419 Vivdu 10 23 10 6 DI Board 1 Explanation of Circuit Board This circuit board is a buffer board for waveform shaping of input signals of sensors photo interrupter water level sensor etc and has the following functions Reset circuit SYSRESET ACFAIL signal supply to VME bus Generation of ADC timing signal for photometry hardware trigger DC voltage monitoring 15 V 12 V Generation of 15 V voltage for analog use DC DC converter External View Hes
138. 8 omc iB Sr asss in 58 T 59 MAL m v 12 313 A3 ye tes 03 110 E 516 D Y D6505ACJ 60 53 661954 Do 4355 040156 bF 8 d Lu Hin 13 63 9514 31313 518 Y AS ABE A4 MODS QH544 9 mi 88 REF Hw 9 tt re VRIO RIO su i o cc A TRAE a 1 28 ES rus 9 4 i D 2 R2 Ri2ss ju E xb n YF X lt o ae 10 51 10 11 ISE Board 1 Explanation of Circuit Board This amplifier is intended to amplify the ion selective electrode ISE signal The input signal includes Na K Cl Ref 2 External View 07251 Tz 15 TE 4 9 4 3 ISE Board Signal Address SignalName EK W speeraddes 7 L s 4 3 SW1 address NO NO lt Confirmation of ISE AMP Voltage gt Confirm the voltage between TP1 and TP2 a Select ERef SW no 4 with the multiplexer and confirm that the output is 4 69 lt ERef lt 5 05 b Select E2 SW no 3 with the multiplexer and confirm that the output is 2 00 0 005 V adjustment of c Select E8 SW no 2 with the multiplexer and confirm that the output is 8 00 0 005 V adjustment of VR2 10 52 4 ISE AMP circuit diagram
139. 9 for SD limit absorbance on the parameter registration menu Data Alarm Printer S V Calibration error Photometry assay In linear 2 to 6 point or isozyme P calibration the calibration condition is checked at calculation of parameter K This error is indicated if there is a difference of 20 or more between the current and previous K values ISE The calibration concentration or slope level for display does not satisfy the following expression Previous value current value Previous value current value 2 x100 gt COMPENSATE LIMIT ISE This error is indicated if the difference between the maximum and minimum potentials is within the following range at three of the five measuring points for each test on internal standard or sample Na 0 7mV lt FIV 2 FIV 4 1 0mV lt FIV 2 FIV 4 Cl 0 8mV lt FIV 2 FIV 4 cont d Remedy Same as in SENS Pay attention to storage method and the time period of placement on the sample disk If the result is satisfactory operation can be continued After measurement record parameters on the maintenance menu to store the K value oet reagent and perform ISE priming with internal standard solution and diluent once Make sure O ring is fitted to each electrode and its holder and it is not fitted doubly After reattaching perform ISE priming with reference electrode solution
140. 9mV or e Make sure that the 68 1mV lt Slope value standard solution is WARNING K 45 0mV lt Slope value ree from lt 49 9mV concentration or 68 1mV lt Slope value 3 92 WARNING 39 9 lt Slope value 7 Sure hat tre lt 35 0mV or electro es a K 7 1 V gt l Cl are within their 68 1 gt Slope value Guaranteed life 4181 to ISE SLOPE WARNING 1 In the result of Refer to alarm 4183 calibration the slope codes 92 1 to 3 value is within the following range The response characteristic of electrode is poor in case carry over rate A is as indicated below Na 1 SLOPE 45 0mV 0 K 1 SLOPE lt 45 0mV Same as above 2 0 160 lt WARNING TN 35 0mV Same as above RENE 4191 to ISE IL STD WARNING The 5 of internal Replace STD 4193 standard solution C IS is and carry out within the following range calibration Na C IS lt 120 0mEq L or again 160 0m Eq L lt C IS 2 Replace the internal standard solution WARNING C IS lt 3 0mEg L or Same as above 7 0mEq L lt C IS 94 3 WARNING CI C IS lt 80 0mEg L or Same as above 120 0mEq L lt C IS 2 15 Unassigned Same as above WARNING The volume of reference electrode solution is 30 mL or less 1 when analyzing two tests at a time the assigned method for the corresponding test is inadequate Assignment
141. ATE A This check is made only when the tests are measurable In the RATE A test with serum indexes H2 must be specified when sample blank correction is carried out More than 2 types of CELL C O 1 to 10 Check and correct carry over evasion cell the carry over are specified for 1 test evasion cell Sub codes 1 to 10 signify the evasion types H1 type is not specified for ISE C 1 to 40 Check and correct ISE test of Reagent Probe the Reagent Probe Carry Over Evasion carry over evasion 2 3 3 Details of Twin Test Simultaneous Analysis Y ze CH 1 to 37 Assay code for twin test P Designates opposite test P Q Q Designated by opposite test OK P Q Designated by one test alone Note 1 simultaneous analysis OK NG 7 uem Identical in Check result O all parameters with opposite test Note 3 OK Not paired NGNote 2 NOTES 1 Unmeasurable channels are excluded However in twin test simultaneous analysis alarm occurs when either one of the two tests is unmeasurable 2 Alarm is registered with a channel No assigned for subdivision Refer to Details of Parameter Check in 2 3 2 Se 2 4 Data Alarm 2 41 Data Alarm Registration Flow Photometry assay Cell blank abnormal ADC abnormal Absorbance ovy Prozone error Cellblank Sample R2 R4 Photometry Absorbance cei blank abnorm
142. B Changeover with MODE SELECT signal 2 0 MB When MODE SELECT signal is LOW 1 0 MB When MODE SELECT signal is HIGH gt gt 5 3 modes 2 0 1 6 1 0 Changeover with inserted disk plus MODE SELECT signal 2 0MB When HD disk is used and MODE SELECT signal is HIGH 1 6 When HD disk is used MODE SELECT signal is LOW 1 0MB When DD disk is used regardless of MODE SELECT signal o S 3 modes 2 0 1 6 1 0 MB Changeover with inserted disk plus MODE SELECT signal 2 0 MB When HD disk is used and MODE SELECT signal is LOW 1 6 When HD disk is used MODE SELECT signal is HIGH 1 0 MB When DD disk is used regardless of MODE SELECT signal o 2 modes 1 6 1 0 MB Automatic changeover with inserted disk 1 6MB When HD disk is used 1 0MB When DD disk is used Note The recording capacity mode is changed over with the logic level H L of MODE SELECT signal H2 Selection of HIGH DENSITY signal output pin H4 H2 H4 Function S Output to J1 2 pin O Output to J1 4 pin O EH Not output open DEM Function DC Selection of J1 3 4 pin output signal function HY DC RY Function O Output of READY signal S O Output of DISK CHANGE signal Open 050 1 Drive selection Function of short plug S Shorted O Opened cont d 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 1 5 7 6 7 EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS aa EHI LIH C Ip IEEE 7 2 7 1
143. CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen 1 List of Calibration Output Media Output Medium Output Data NER iu S CALIBRATION LIST Calibration curve parameters S1ABS A B C SD value CALIBRATION MONITOR O Serum index blank CALIBRATION LIST x Blank level x Absorbance or absorbance CALIBRATION MONITOR O change rate O Initial or final observance CALIBRATION MONITOR NOTE In plotting of measured absorbance values the currently measured STD alone is taken 2 Relationship between Alarm and Output in Calibration Displ Data Klarmi Name Updating of Screen Screen Display Remake MEE NNNM p Alarm S1ABS error STD error SENSITIVE erro CALIB SD error No alarm NOTE For CALIB and SD errors is output on logging for discrimination 2 5 Retry Code Table Code Description Allowable Remarks Retry Count Alarm fuse blown 1 50 ms 12 V for lamp 1 4 5 sec Check is not made when lamp is turned off during initialization water exchange or sleep 3 15 V for CPU rack 1 50 ms 4 15 V for CPU rack 1 50 ms 14 Liquid in vacuum tank 1 4 5 sec 15 Vacuum pressure abnormal 1 4 5 sec Check is not made within 10 sec after vacuum pump turns on NI 16 Waste solution tank 1 4 5 sec 17 Incubation bath water inadequate 100 4 5 sec Checked in the following statuses standby operation sampling stop 18 Distilled water short 1 10 6 sec Water supply 2 50 6 sec Warning 3 150 6 sec STOP 19 Ch
144. CONT 2 DRVBOARD EMOT200 BOARD Ji 78 107 _ 1303 CNI IC H10 9 11 57 S ARM 5 15 59 GPCONT 3 EMOT200 BOARD 48 107 1303 ON IC IC Ele k 7 18 2 810 820 18 2 46 Z nie s ato HH cis 4 4 u UP DOWN 10 6 14 B17 12 8 43 11 2 i 2 we 12 GPCONT 3 green eee o e A DRV BOARD EMOT200 BOARD LIL ARM ROTATE ARM UP DOWN STIRRER ARM ROTATE 1 13 J P550 1312 241 107 1303 IC Hil 5 15 87 B14 5 15 57 LT 1038 222 J P550 green IC B8 J P560 1312 241 1611 1304 IC G8 Yellow 51 3 16 4 B25 A50 18 L us Green D Ooms lt 2 lt gt gt NON de e 17 lt gt fi A EMOT200 BOARD DRV BOARD 9 1 STIRRER ARM UP DOWN STIRRER ROD ROTATE J P560 1312 g Oo 5 A green J P560 J312 I 8 I A n 124V ee r c s r cr gol R121 R122 R123 A8 1026 1017 gu wr SS r Wm 10 FY IC 06 8
145. Circuit 27135201 1 10 lt C 4311 I g24 103 MR GP6 M1 1 gt z 1 4 7u 38V _______ 520 0311 R137 R138 4 E 47K 47K 624 IC27 ii tH 5311 54 GP6 M1 2 3040 LA7021M 80 150 Oe b ours 18 8475 4311 90 RSB uz o M LUE T HIF4 40P 1 3 3040 5 22004 624 2 2K RP GP6 1 4 02956 Als 624 GP6 1 PS 304 O 304 14 v R7 R6 24 1 94311 GP1 1 1 82 4 74 35 16509 4511 8138 lt 140 262 x 624 Qu GP1M1 2 3036 2 lt EO 96 GP1 M1 3 GP1M1 4 GP1 M1 PS BK 45V DG 305 D 814 24V1 8 9511 GP2 MO 1 05 2 4 C11 4 Tu 38V TEE 4311 R142 4 IC29 GP2 2 FZ 80 GP2 MO 3 GP2 MO 4 GP2 MO PS BK 10 33 DRV Circuit 27135201 2 10 IC3 24V1 4311 GP2 M1 1 303 5V C16 4 4311 R143 lt 8144 2 g 28 47 47 624 1630 92 GP2 M1 2 M 15 130 331 25 SLA7021M 812084 314 190 4311 LEQ REFB E c19 c20 HIF4 40P GP2M1 3 3030 2200 2200 j 024 D8 GP2 M1 4 1303 0 2 2K 2 2K HRP32 R24 R25 108 R26 624 624 GP2M1 PS 3030 wee 1 BK 10K 5V DG pe 7 R28 R27 DE lt 24 2 nM GP3MO 1 3030 81 45V ana 9344 e R145 lt 8146 v 47K 47K G24 IC31 lt 2
146. E iMi Connector for FDD DS supply connector O de oo pp o o r ____ v 44 1 c D 10 18 250 MVSB100 1 5 J1C3 J102 9101 SOUTN STN 7P Q7N 4P 5 z 2201 2 e oy o Uu IRQ4N 1 IRQ3N AQ2P IRQ2N AO9P AO1P IRQ N Qu Ve lt lt moo 0089 9 2 ACFAILN SGOINN 011 DO4P BGOOUTN D12P DO5P 8G1INN 015 DO6P BGTOUTN D14P 007P BG2INN 15 BG2Q0UTN SYSCLKP B8G3INN SYSFAIL WRITEN BR2N AM5P BRIN 25 DTACKN 2 2 3 9 IACKN SERCLKF 7 IACKOU A16P 4 A15P 6 IRQ6N A13P AQSP IRQSNW A12P AO4P 3 Di ju wl onde 225 14 814 14 C15 Ban A31 851 631 A32 a A2 A30 oleo lt a a 21 525 2 823 cz aio gt 1 gt m ii I Ato 10 10 ele 22 JP4 LC vcc2 1 10 19 250 MVSB100 2 5 4105 2104 e H TE mum TUE HH thi s a Ss an GM wa m Dr a i in i Hi da 12110 REUS w
147. ETHOD CALIB TYTE Note 5 1 1 5 6 6i 6 NER co 1 a STD 1 Fe EE gt ae Pot pe OPO tf 1 11 Satata taata Te STD 1 6 11 xl Sto 6points 7 ATO sm C O T xL Kon EE MEE 4 2 4 3 E STD 1 ____ 1 4 points End cL LEE Simo po IEEE pu Pa RR TO Tx FOR DR Qcame T1 1 1 T T peu mm rc RE TOT T T T Tx lt RES BONE URN A ee me LOGITLOG S est tt te 01161 TOPOL TL STD 2 LOGIT LOG 1 WTIUOTATATATAUDATO EE SD c 310 6 paints mir TO ICO IC ICO ICO IGO O parame 1 1 1 31 K 5 STD 1 RU MON 12115 BN SDN mo UP ONERE NON s Cpons ee ne m ma GR TEN SS ET TRE TOL
148. F Pinch valve SV19 OFF 29 Stop at upper dead point 4 2 6 Cell rinse mechanism Up Middle 0 7 1 5 Concentrated dilute vacuum waste solution arent 19 25 31 SV14 OFF 2 9 9 0 14 0 Concentrated waste ON solution SV13 OFF 2 9 0 14 0 Dilute waste solution SV12 OFF ON 0 7_1 0 Cell blank SV10 OFF ON Cell rinse SV11 N 22 0 3 0 6 Trough rinse SV 9 ON 1 Aspiration 240 uL 2 305 uL 3 Discharge 505 uL 4 Remainder discharge 5 11 Routine plus ISE Time Chart Reaction table Sampling mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 Reagent dispensing mechanism H syringe R syringe SV3 nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism Stirring rod rotation Stirring rod outside wash SV5 Reagent disk Sample disk ISE sipper mechanism 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 1 81 91 Stop 3 2 Stop 12 rotation 5 cell rotation Same as routine N Upper dead point KC aspiration E A _ i a e J a e a U U U _ ISE syringe ie ES OFF 001 0 4 ISE syringe SV16 OFF 17 5 0 3 Na K Ci SV17 OFF 17 5 10 3 KCl SV18 OIN OFF Pi 17 5 0 4 inch valve SV19 ON OFF 3e 29 Stop upper dead point i i 2 0 Cell rinse mechanism Up Middle 0 7 1 5 Concentrated dilute vacuum waste solution 0 1 1 4 1 9 2 5 3 1 SV14 ON ON OFF 2 9 Concentra
149. For 480 505 nm Sample blank compensable on Chemistry Parameters Screen Total Liquid Volume LL Absorbance First half test A m 0 0 S V1 gt 180 lt lt lt lt lt 35 2 lt Second half n p 0 0 3 lt l lt m lt n lt lt 35 Mode When wavelength is different from that in first half test When wavelength is different from that in first half test test B n 2 p First half test A 1 m 0 0 5 V1 gt 180 AA Mode lt 1 lt lt lt lt 9 lt 35 2 lt Second half n p q r test B lt lt lt lt lt lt 35 n 2 lt p p 2 lt q Legend Photometric points Sample volume V1 V2 V3 Each set volume of reagents 1 2 and V Total volume of reagents added C to Passed cell blanks A Absorbance at photometric point x Absorbance change rate per minute between photometric points x and y as obtained by least squares method t Time minute between photometric points and m Liquid volume compensation factor S V S V Vb Total volume of reagent added up to photometric point a or b NOTE The absorbance value indicated or output by the instrument is the one obtained by multiplication with 10 and compensation with the cell blank value corresponding to each analytical method For calculation the indicated or output value should be multiplied by 10
150. ISEJAMIP P N 707 5023 tides o Det 6 2 Setting and Function of YD 702D 6539 Short Plugs 6 3 6 SWITCH SETTING 6 1 Short Pins on Mother Board Make sure that the mother board MVSB100 is provided with short pins JP5 and JP10 in the unoccupied slots 2nd and 3rd slots should be shorted 6 2 Setting of DIP Switch on ECPU237 Board Set the DIP switch 8 pins on the ECPU237 board as follows 6 3 Setting of DIP Switches on EMOT200 Board The following table shows DIP switch settings on the EMOT200 board 1 SWl SWNo Function Description 1 Photometer wavelength OFF For domestic use and Asia ON For Europe and USA z 4 6 ON Test count clear probe adjust pulse input enabled 7 ON Alarm release 8 ON Watchdog release 2 Swe SW No Description Z Sample transfer External personal computer Unused Sample ID SE Unused Unused Unused With sample transfer With external personal computer 2 With sample ID With ISE Z 2 GC PO 6 4 LOG AMP P N 707 5009 SW No Type SW 1 Rotary Remarks oelection of main wavelength O Fale SW2 Rotary Selection of sub wavelength SW3 Toggle Multiplexer F manual setting 6 5 ISE AMP P N 707 5023 SW No Type SW 1 Rotary Address setting Remarks O O gt I 6 6 Setting of YD 702D 6539 Short Plugs Setting of D
151. K 10k 5 GND 2 N BX7356 MDI1 5 GND BX7356 011 8 OND BX8049 MODIRI esv E 5v 16 Bx8049 MDIR 5v OND 107 8 8049 MDIRI T 5V GND 18 pi sy Q GND 7 BX8049 MDIR1 5 GND BX8049 MOIR 1 5 GND BX8049 MDIR1 GND BX8049 MDIR3 5 18 P 5V onb IC8 8 8049 MDIR3 5 s 18 5V GND BX8049 MDIR3 18 5V eno di 81803 J2 C18 J2 _ T HnH lt j B sL 624 42 3 c J2 Ato J2 h cy J2 10 J2 Alley J2 42 5156 42 814 J2 C120 92 cs ADSTART To EMIO100 GP6 M1 L1 GP6 1 12 GM 0 4 GP2 MO L GP2 0 12 GP4 11 GP4 1 11 1 12 GP4 M1 L3 GP5 M1i L GP5 0 11 GP5 0 12 10 26 127135200 2 5 Ircul DI C 5V 8049 MDIR1 5 GHD 8 8049 MDIR1 FN GNO VOU J 3043 Sample Disk Outside J3pyA28 s 239427 JIC ASE Sample Disk Inside JIC ASS Count 930 J 30433 Sample Disk Home Pos 4304321 d x Rinse U D P Sample Arm Home Pos Sample Arm U D P J3QA22 3 NF12 1 PE escen Detection J 30418 13 1 J 37421 7756
152. Lest Wo 4041 1400 Routine Result Oelete Status Start Delete the routine data First 141 400 4061 4005 Routine Result ASCH DATA DISK Target FDO2 First 141 400 Last 4041 400 STAT Result Disp First No 11 50 First 141 50 Last 40 lt 1 50 gt STAT Result Send First 1 lt 1 80 gt Last 40 1 50 STAT Result Delete First 141 50 Last 4041 50 gt tart Delete the routine deta STAT Result ASCH DATA OISK Fool Target Disk FDO2 First Wo 11 60 Last 40 lt 1 50 gt Contret Result Print 17 619 First 1014101 530 gt HE rs Last 102 lt 101 530 01 paa First 101 lt 101 530 gt 3 Last 102 lt 101 520 gt First 1 lt 1 6 Last Ne 241 5 gt laput test name Test Meme ALT 080000005 lest Paran Carry Over Test Paraesters Channel 1 lt 1 36 gt gt 40 685 Test Parameters Channel 141 365 Input test name Test Name ALT cH 1 11213 1410161718 19 1 1 Cale Cale Test Calc Carry Over Evasion Select mode b diri 8 Probe Comp Test Comp Wo 141 82 Peremeter 1 l
153. Measured data 563 2 400 x 14088 i 3 Photometer check value 0 1 3 0S 400 1 Daily alarm cyclic system 128 0 2 Stat sample previous value Work area 500 cycles x 2568 1 Search table 0 8 1 Application work area 1500 50 x 168 4 Probe position adjustment 0 05 2 Work area for TM program 400 2 Cumulative alarm 256 day 131 2 2 70 4 data cycle 50 x 14088 i 256 days x 5128 100B 5 Routine sample sequence 0 01 No lt gt Controi sample 6 Reaction bath water 1 Routine sample test selecting I 38400B x 10 psc 10008 replacement date i information information 1 Header block 400 samples 13 4 Parameters analysis i 2 Data block 400 samples 103 system i 2 Measured data routine 400 5 Cell blank data 160 control calibration I 3 Original Abs routine sample 8 Data of 35 samples maintenance 6 Encircled data in Encircled items Subject to Parameters Determined I 32 0 column i C RAM RAW data gt 7 Routine sample test select I Other 32 0 information 1 Communication trace 400 samples x 2568 400 At installation Disk for installation Unnecessary 2 DIP SW data i 0 02 Application program 2 Time chart program 3 OS 4 Screen data i 3688 02 Maximum 904 46 640 8
154. N E NECR R Monitor Screen STD error STD In calibration measurement this alarm is set at any of the data alarms in 2 excluding data alarms 6 to Slope SLOPE CER Ml Electrode PREP preparation Internal l STD standard concentration abnormal Calibration CALIB error lt gt Routine sample measurement E Stat sample measurement Control sample measurement STD Calibration measurement 2 Data Alarm ISE Alarm Output g k Priority CRT S F Processing on Operation Da Monitor Screen Alarm 1 ADC ADC A A Hegistration is made on abnormal the operation monitor in ADC task 2 Sample short SAMPLE At occurrence of this x alarm the calculation disabled alarm is also set for making output data 4 Leveleror error BRENNEN 5 Ll value R EON x abnormal 6 Calculation x disabled 7 Test to test CMP T Check is not performed in x compensation ISE data processing disabled 8 Test to test CMP T x compensation error 3 Registration of Data Alarm sample short Measured Sample Note 1 Data Output Data Alarm e Note 2 Note 3 1st Time 2nd Time Other than STD 1 A x O B O O C O X STD 1 A x O B _ O O C X Water O x discharge NOTES 1 A Pre detection is not made B Pre detection is made and at least either one of the following is encountered
155. N ON ON ON ON ON ON R nozzle outside wash SV6 1200P 30 0 31 8 ON 31 4 1200P 30 0 31 8 ON 7 1 5 Probe Adjustment 0 0 S1 S2 S3 Out cir of R cup Reset Horizontal adjustment of sampling mechanism 05 Rinsing Above cell 3 0 Descent at bath 0 5 25 Rinsing bath Input of Execute key Detection of abnormal descent Vertical adjustment of sampling mechanism Rinsing Descent at bath constant speed Detection of 259 abnormal descent Repetition Horizontal adjustment of reagent dispensing 0 5 1 0 0 5 1 0 mechanism Rinsing 0 0 5 bath Above celi Rinsing Out cir of bath R cup Input of Input of Input of Execute key Execute key gt Execute key Vertical adjustment of reagent dispensing 0 5 mechanism Rinsing 4 0 Descent at bath constant speed f 9 5 Detection of d abnormal descent Repetition Horizontal adjustment of Y stirring mechanism 0 5 0 5 1 0 Rinsing 0 0 5 bain Above Input of Input of Execute key Execute key Cautions 1 For vertical adjustment of the sampling mechanism place the cups at POS1 POS2 and W1 To sample transfer at option position on outer inner track constant speed Above sample cup Above sample cup Ascent at Input of Execute key Ascent at adjustable speed 11 5 Ascent at adjustable speed 11 5 2 For vertical adjustment of the reagent dispensing mechanism remove the reagent bottles adjustable speed 17 0 18 0
156. NEL 5701 d Alarm Sub Control Category ned Level Description Remedy No 5771 CELL C O 145 1 to 10 WARNING 1 More than 2 types of Check and correct carry over evasion cell the carry over are specified for 1 test evasion cell 2 Sub codes 1 to 10 signify the evasion types Check and correct 5821 ISE C O 146 110 40 WARNING R1 type is not specified for ISE test of Reagent Probe Carry Over Evasion carry over evasion the Reagent Probe 2 1 1 LCD Display Alarm Output of Boot Error Boot error is output to the console and the buzzer for small size automatic analyzer beeper is used Output is issued unconditionally to the console whenever connected For the small size automatic analyzer on the other hand either of the destinations shown below is selected depending on system For selection method refer to 3 1 Output to Console Output to the console always uses a log message This is because output cannot be issued in the EAT format within a period from system start to EAT task start Upon output a message is sent out line by line by scroll up method as in the logging message of VxWorks Note that a line is fed before and after a message Output format is shown below For contents of output refer to 4 Buzzer Output for Small Size Automatic Analyzer The kinds of output are the same as the three kinds in the small size immunological system Each out
157. NG Photometry assay gt gt Photometry assay 3189 ch In calibration the e Replace STD STD absorbance data sample is indicated with e Check the alarm concentration 2 In calibration data parameter calculation is ISE assay disabled Same as above lt lt ISE assay gt gt 1 In calibration the potential data of standard or internal standard solution is indicated with ADC error insufficient sample alarm noise alarm or level alarm 2 In calibration data calculation is disabled The result of calibration is not updated nor saved onto FD 3251 to CALIBRA 1 to 40 WARNING Photometry assay gt gt Photometry assay 3291 TION ch The factor value K ISE assay determined in calibration Same as above differs from the previous value by more than 20 lt lt ISE assay gt gt The calibrator concentration value and slope value determined in calibration differ from the previous values by more than the compensation limit 3401 to CALIB SD 1 to 36 WARNING The mean error determined Replace STD and 3438 ch in multi point calibration is check again larger than the SD limit input value 2 13 d Alarm Description Remedy 3551 to SENSITIV 1 to 36 WARNING In linear with 2 to 6 points or The result of 3588 ITY ch nonlinear calibration a calibration is not difference between the mean updated nor saved STD 1 absor
158. Priming Time Chart internal standard priming 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SEC R 3 2 5 1 8 1 9 1 13 3 eaction table i Sto St Sto 32 cell rotation PCP check 12 cell rotation 5 cell rotation Sampling mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 OFF S nozzle outside wash OFF SV8 Internal standard Internal standard 11 1 12 5 Reagent dispensing Upper dead point 7 1 7 4 Vr Wash mechanism 8 0 9 1 Aspiration 10 1 11 1 11 7 syringe 7 3 7 5 ds 9 3 discharge Only Air aspiration 80 90 Discharge 3 14 5 syringe SV3 OFF ON 11 0 14 4 nozzle outside wash OFF ON int Stirring mechanism upper nead Stirring rod rotation OFF Stirring rod outside wash OFF SV5 5 0 6 4 Reagent disk Stop Rotation Only in cycle 3 Sample disk Stop int ISE sipper mechanism dedu pel ISE syringe ISE syringe SV16 Sr Na K Cl SV17 oT KCl SV18 EE Pinch valve SV19 OFF 2 9 Stop at upper dead point Cell rinse mechanism 2 0 S Up Z Middle 07 1 5 Concentrated dilute 0 1 14 19 2 5 3 1 vacuum waste solution ON ON OFF SV14 29 9 0 14 0 Concentrated waste OFF ON solution SV 13 9 0 140 Dilute waste solution OFF ON SV12 OFF Cell blank SV10 1 2 2 2 Cell rinse SV11 ON OFF Trough rinse SV 9 OFF 5 15 ISE Priming Time Chart internal standard priming Reaction table Sampling mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 S syr
159. SERVICE MANUAL FOR MODEL 902 AUTOMATIC ANALYZER Copyright O Hitachi Ltd 1997 All rights reserved Printed in Japan Part No 713 9039 KN K H LT 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MODEL 902 AUTOMATIC ANALYZER CONTENTS PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS uu u dius e amu n mam shua asa 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING naso 2 1 PATRUDIAGRAILHVIS iube a MER Rana PROS 3 1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 4 1 EIE EE E TOR EI RE E TEE TET 5 1 VV Cell N S y ER ESSA 6 1 EXPLANA TON OF FUNG TON coses 7 1 MOTORS DETECTORS AND FUSES u u e 8 1 ANAL X 9 1 GIRGUIT DIAGRAMS u Quya u vat ses 10 1 CROSS WIRING Qu mauwa ERR A 11 1 US IE VC MH TEES 12 1 MAINTENANCE AND 13 1 ADJUSTMENT 5 0 000000 nennen nnne 14 1 E ROTER 15 1 c u u teak NP CPU Dua susta 16 1 10 11 12 13 14 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Overall SYSE M PME PMID PME M 1 1 vez ima M t OE eet ane nner 1 2 Reagen ME EE 1 3 T m 1 4
160. SPENT 10 3 11 3 Remainder 6 discharge 6 1 7 7 Det t discharge 15 4 16 3 S syringe SV2 1 to 5 pL ON 45 Air aspiration discharge ON Air aspiration 2 4 3 92 103 118 13 4 S nozzle outside wash SVB ON ON 11 6 12 8 Discharge 4 9 52 uL o 4 8 4 8 8 10 3 13 Sampling mechanism into cell Za Wash detergent at 8 8 103 195 WIE with wash 5 1 to 50 uL W1 position Holding 0 6 9 L 6 1 7 S syringe 0 6 1 9 2 9 35 Detergent 8 Idi 5 1 to 50 uL 5 3 5 6 Holding 9 14 S discharge Remainder 10 3 I discharge Detergent discharg S syringe SV2 28 ON 48 ur du Qe lis aspiration 2 6 4 6 3 al 8 5 nozzle outside wash SVB ON ON S aspiration volume In ISE Routine assay 50 For system water calibration Carry over evasion with system water 3134 4754 6210 3 17 Sampling mechanism with detergent at 948 8 17 3 17 8 wash Wash wi ZOT Wash 08 2 E 10 3 Y S syringe i 3 5 4 1 12 0 12 6 2 0 to 50 uL 53 56 Detergent 8 0 Holding 13 8 System water aspiration Hokding aal 138 aspiration Th n anme watar ramannor eT 11 3 mainder 15 8 ischarge ischarge OMEN dg ni Detergent discharge 13 S syringe SV2 ON BBpiration raf ON ON 13 5 R3 discharge 31 44 i ag 103 11 16 2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 5 ON H2 discharge ON ON 12 8 74 i 13 6 Wash 2 3
161. View of DIP Switch Block Diagram of ECPU237 Board Lr D Sac Ethernet qGz2 2 AU 34 Rog o ae 32 MHz option 55 option CLK DRIV 020 68882 MBS LSI i CONTROL 16 MHz 15 MHz 16 MHz REG Mene CFG 20 MHz TIME 1 BASE 15 MHz Data ILLI V7 22222 21222 16 LOREM Een mmm Lp z II puo V EE III LLL m E 2 7 32 7 x noon M BUF EPROM lt E t 256KB MEMORY EEPROM kzz PROTECTION E Foc sec 52 32KB REA TTL SEQUENCER 3 p oT 32KBX2 RTC Memor Data Oo MEMORY 3 MAE gt gt a He A a H YME BUS I F 3 6V 50mAh Gate array range 10 6 J1 J2 RS 232C 1 channel Connector Signal Table Ethernet Connector Signal Table RSCN 8850 20 AUICN w a E No Signal Name No Signal Name _ ____ 9 2 2 10 po 3 11 GND 4 4 GND 12 DI 5 CTS 5 Die 13 12V 6 6 GND 14 GND 7 GND 7 GND 15 GND sf mE ___ 10 5 232 4 channels Connector Signal Table MBCN 8850 34 mo GND 3 4 5 mo enD 7 8 9
162. a a HA A qu gt A a oe di dip gt e Reaction disk S Cell rinse High low Cell Wash High Low mechanism concentra rinse blank SV9 tion SV11 SV10 vacuum waste solution SV14 NS Reaction disk concentr concentr ation ation water water drain drain SV13 SV12 Air Purge only in photometry assay 7 1 4 Air Purge 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Reset Y 41 48 6 2 69 83 90 104111 125 132 146 152 167 174 188 19 5 20 9 22 9 27 4 S syringe 01 3 6 200 5 3 5 7 2009 7 4 7 8 2008 95 9 9 200 200P 200P 200P 200P Up 400P 26 9 Down 1000P 11 6 112 0 137 14 1 15 8 116 2 17 9 183 20 0 120 4 23 4 Down 1000P Down 100P Down 100P Down 100P Down 100P Down 100P Down 100 Down 100P Down 100P 0 1 3 7 50 61 71 82 92 103 113 124 134 145 153 166 176 187 197 20 8 23 3 27 3 S syringe SV2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 5 nozzle outside wash SV8 41 48 6269 83 90 104 111 125 132 146 153 167 174 188 195 209 22 9 27 4 R syringe 0 1 3 6 2007153 5 7 200P17 4 7 8 200P9 5 200 200P 200P 200P 200P Up 400P 26 9 Down 1000P 9 9 11 6 i20 137 14 1 15 8 16 2 17 91 18 3 20 0 204 234 Down 1000P Down 100P Down 100P Down 100P Down 100P Down 100P Down 100 Down 100P Down 100 0 1 3 7 50 61 71 82 9 2 103 113 124 134 145 155 166 176 187 197 208 23 3 27 3 R syringe SV3 ON ON ON O
163. ach the thumbscrew and remove the rinse mechanism arm section 3 Remove connectors 4530 and J531 4 Detach retaining screws and remove the mechanism 14 2 10 FDD 1 Detach retaining screws on the FDD front panel and pull out the FDD carefully 2 Detach the connector at the rear of FDD remove the FDD and replace it 14 2 11 DC Power Unit 1 Remove the front right side cover 2 Open side panel R and remove connector J300 on DRV board 3 Reaching through the opening in the right side remove two connectors at the rear of DC power unit 4 Detach retaining screws at the front of DC power unit and pull the unit forward Removing the front connector wiring of FDD and circuit board rack will make it easier to pull out the unit 14 11 14 2 12 Probe Adjustment START 1 Reference value change required Operator judgement Required Circuit board EMOT 200 PCB DIP SW ON SW 6 Required 2 Maintenance screen Operator judgement Select from functions 1 to 4 for execution and display STOP input E 5 alarm logging Alarm display Operation check Data entry for reference value change END 14 12 Functions Adjust stopping position of S probe rotation Adjust cup height for S probe descent Adjust stopping position of R probe rotation Adjust stopping position for stirring rod rotation Adjust R probe descent to bottle pos
164. ad Dummy lead 1530 300 ZOL 1011001 70 JUL 10 ZOU T 200 200 UU WG 200 Reference Lead Lead Lead Lead Lead Lead 2 V incubator incubator incubator incubator incubator changeover changeover changeover changeover changeover changeover AD AD START AD START AD START AD START AD START 3 cycles 54000 Temperature Required time 400 msec x 6 cycles 2 4 sec Cycle 1 Cycle 2 lt Cycle 3 e Calculation alarm judgement are made in the past three cycles The temperature is judged according to the status and an alarm is output The temperature used for judgement is calculated in the following manner 1 Average of 4 temperature values measured in a single cycle 2 Average temperature in 3 cycles 3 Alarm judgement by value rounded to 1st decimal point and multiplied by 10 1 MPX Data 2 7 2 Temperature Calculation Formula 1 Incubator Temperature Pt feeler T 29 0 x Y A B A 7 96 T Incubator temperature C Y ADC count value at measurement A Count value for reference voltage 2 V B Count value for reference voltage 6 V NOTE The interrupt register is 100 msec before A D start 7 18 3 Alarm Specifications Item Range Abnormal control T 37 0 gt 0 5 1 Out of control T 45 0 heater off Count value for reference voltage 2 V Count value for reference voltage 6 V ADC time out 100 msec or
165. agent Pipetting mechanism Reagent addition timing Carryover evasion One disk 40 positions 20 positions each on inner and outer rows Cooling water circulating system 3 to 15 C option for China destined instrument 50 mL 20 mL adapter necessary without barcode concentrated reagent unusable HITERGENT 50 mL position 40 fixed for addition to reaction bath Detergent 1 for reagent probe stirring rod rinsing reagent probe carryover evasion reaction cell carryover evasion Detergent 2 for reagent probe carryover evasion reaction cell carryover evasion settable on reagent disk inner row Internal standard solution position 37 fixed Diluent position 38 fixed Pipetter driven by stepping motor 20 to 350 uL test in 1 uL steps 3 steps 0 1 5 and 5 minutes throughput is maintained even when adding 3 reagents Rinsing for carryover evasion possible throughput may decrease by specifying carryover evasion 1 4 Reaction System Reaction disk Reaction cell No of reaction cells Reaction cell control oample pipetting position Reagent pipetting position temperature otirring otirring position Reacting solution volume Photometric position Cell rinsing Carryover evasion Turntable type disk 10 minute reaction per rotation Optical path length 6 mm area 6 x 5 mm 48 One rotation one pitch feed 18 seconds One position fixed One position fix
166. agent addition the reagent pipetting mechanism aspirates the reagent and the necessary volume is discharged into the reaction cuvette from the reagent probe After discharging each reagent the reacting solution is stirred by the stirring mechanism Note that if the reagent pipetting volume is not set in the analytical parameters for a certain reagent 1st to 3rd the addition and stirring for that reagent will not be made Also stirring without reagent pipetting can be specified as well Rinsing At the completion of analysis the reacting solution is aspirated and drained and deionized water is injected into the reaction cuvettes to rinse them out Analytical result output The measured absorbance data undergoes concentration conversion at the data processor is output to the printer transferred online to the host computer and saved in a floppy disk Values from which the water blank value is subtracted are used for the data processing lt Analytical Flow Figure 4 2 shows the flow of analysis Initialization reset Reaction cuvette rinsing Sampling of sample H1 addition Stirring R2 addition Stirring R3 addition Stirring c gt qo a xX c E Q Aspiration of water minute reaction 11 measurements cuvette minute reaction 14 measurements cuvette minute reaction 17 measurements cuvette 10 minute reaction 35 measurements cuvette per test item 6 minutes
167. al Reagent short change rate Sampie short Absorbance over ADC abnormal Reaction limit over Linearity abnormal Level error amp Noise error ADC abnormal Potential calculation Sample 1 Sample short abnormal Preparation abnormal Slope abnormal Internal standard concentration abnormal STD error Calibration error Photom etry assay calibration STD error G anda jad absorbgncol Sensitivity error alculation disabled Calibration error Duplicate error aiibration error Sensitivity error SD error Test to test Point to Point compensation unexpectedly Test to test compensation error compensation disabled disabled C 9 Sample value abnormal ISE alone Test calculation calculation test error ISE calibration Greparation abpormal standar alibration error ncentration abnormal Slope abnormal Calculation disabled 2 4 2 Data Alarm Code List No Data Alarm ADC abnornal NOOR OD Cell blank abnormal Prozone error Reaction limit over at all points Reaction limit over except 1 point Reaction limit over except 2 or 3 points Linearity abnormal at 9 points or more Linearity abnormal at 8 points or less Standard 1 absorbance abnormal Sensitivity error Calibration error concentration abnormal Sample value abnormal Test to test comp
168. aracter in the data field one character before end of data code and the lower two digits of the calculated checksum are converted to the ASCII code Example xXloi iewioi iwidoirnrioio ia imaui jioi x m oc AIK 6 9 ul lt Calculation range 16 3 16 2 Communication Functions 1 Tables 16 2 and 16 3 list the host communication functions provided with the Model 902 Automatic Analyzer Table 16 2 Communication Function List for Test Selecting Information A Analyzer side H Host side Inquiry from Instruction from Function to H H to Conditions Test selecting With ID Valid when NO is specified information inquiry for the transfer of analytical communication on data alone on the routine sample communication parameter Screen Wiouti o 0 Sameasabove otat sample With ID x Valid when NO is specified for the transfer of analytical data alone and YES is Without ID specified for stat sample test selection Table 16 3 Communication Function List for Measurement Result Data Real time Batch Specific u Function Communi Communi Sample Conditions TT cation Request Routine and stat Specific sample request is samples invalid when YES is specified for the transfer of analytical data alone as a system parameter 0 x Calibration X measurement result data Absorbance Valid whe
169. arcode reader in the following procedure In case of sample barcode reader Use the settings made by the manufacturer Details of setting are given in Table 14 3 oW 1 EMOT200 board SIVE Settings of each SW at shipment SW1 SW2 12345678 12345678 12345678 7 8 m ON BEER Fig 14 2 Barcode Reader DIP Switch Settings 14 4 Table 14 3 Barcode Settings Readable Barcodes ITF CODE 39 NW 7 Modulas 10 Modulas 16 CODE 128 Check digit MOD10 MOD16 Without with without With Without With Without With No of digits read Variable length Signal line monitoring Yes INZONE signal Yes Communication speed 9600 bps Frame configuration 7 bits even parity 1 stop bit Data format ETX Readout system CCD 14 1 6 Barcode Reader Positioning Position the barcode reader in the following procedure lt Positioning procedure gt Check of disk stopping position Make sure the sample disk stopping position is aligned with the cutout in the jacket NOTE shift the disk stopping position when positioning the sample probe And absolutely avoid changing the disk stopping position Make sure the cutout in the jacket comes to the center of the test tube S Test tub O O Barcode reader Sample disk Jacket 14 2 Adjustment Disassembly Reassembly of Mechanisms Reaction Main unit Printer Arm cover bath cover cover cover Arm cover B
170. ata alone on the communication parameter screen and CANCEL is specified for original Abs New sample Press the registration key on screen by the number of samples to be analyzed Sample registered for stat TS through screen New sample Press the registration key on screen by the number of samples to be analyzed Sending is unallowable New sample Specify the analysis start No and the number of samples to be analyzed through screen Sample registered for stat TS through screen 2 Characters Function Character Space Ignored Space Ignored A 1 to 400 Space Ignored Space Ignored D N E D L N E Ignored Space Ignored Space Ignored Space Ignored Space Ignored Sample Information Recommended Character in Parens 5 Characters 1 Character 3 Characters 13 Characters 15 Characters 2 to 35 Caution 1 2 to 35 Caution 1 Stop Specification from HOST Desired ID No blank unallowable oample and ID No registered on screen blank unallowable Space Ignored Desired 13 characters blank unallowable Space Ignored Unallowable Unallowable Unallowable Desired ID No blank unallowable Space Ignored Sample and ID No registered on screen blank unallowable Space Ignored Sample No Routine 1 New sample 1 to 400 Space Desired 13 S
171. ata or the isozyme P channel is not measured Calculation for a calculation test has been attempted with the data having a data blanking alarm control sample e Smaller than the lower limit e Larger than the upper limit value value C IS lt 120 0mEQq L or cont d Remedy Confirm monthly flow path washing Replace the diluent and internal standard solution Check the data alarm name and take a proper measure The data is left blank Prepare appropriate standard solution The data is left blank Determine the cause of failure to color development such as improper kind of standard solution wrong set position and clogging of sample probe Dilute the sample or reduce its volume and perform analysis again This alarm is not indicated for serum index Correct setting on the parameter registration menu 1 screen Alarm Printer S VF 15 The sample concentration C S is within the following Sample value abnormal Test to test compensation error Test to test compensation disabled SD absorbance over CMP T gt R lt 10 0mEq L gt 250 0mEq L lt 1 gt 100 0mEq L lt 10 0mEq L C S lt 250 0mEq L 1 In test to test compensation calculation any data alarm other than shown below is indicated for the compensation data In isozyme Q channel concentration calcu
172. ation data from analyzer to host Composition of text B Byte count 2B 1B 72B Type A E ONE Us Na data alarm Na calibration data 1B 72B 1B 1B K calibration data Unused 153 bytes STX H ISE type Na calibration data data data 1 character 1 character 15 transferred 2 Function character 2 characters H is transferred 16 36 ISE electrolyte type 1 character Table 16 21 ISE Type Test A Na K Unused Data alarm for each channel 1 character A data alarm corresponding to each channel is transferred For details of data alarm refer to the data alarm code list ISE calibration data 72 characters This data area has eight data items electromotive force of internal standard solution electromotive force of LOW solution electromotive force of HIGH solution electromotive force of calibrator slope level for display concentration of internal standard solution concentration of calibrator and compensation factor Each data item is composed as shown below Space remains blank when there is no relevant data x Transfer sequence T Data alarm 1 byte Measured value 6 bytes Data identification 2 bytes bb when there is no data Table 16 22 It Data Decimal Point em Identification Position Electromotive force 6 digits with sign and 1 digit of internal standard decimal point solution Elect
173. bance and the onto FD mean STD N Note 7 absorbance is smaller than the sensitivity limit input value NOTES 7 N 2 for linear 2points 2 to 6 for nonlinear and linear 3 to 6 points Span point input value If either STD 1 or STD N alone has been measured the absorbance value of the other STD is checked using the previous data 4151 to ISE LEVEL WARNING The mean potential value 1 Replace STD 4153 EAV at three out of five and carry out measurement points of calibration internal standard solution is 2 Replace the Na outside the following range electrode Internal standard Na 90 0mV x lt 10 OK 90 0 lt EAV lt 10mV 1 Same as above OK 2 Replace the K electrode 3 WARNING 100 0mV lt lt 1 Same as above 180 0mV 2 Replace the CI OK electrode 4161 to ISE NOISE WARNING A difference FIV between Carry out reagent 4163 maximum and minimum priming and check potential values at three of for bubble five measurement points of formation internal standard solution is outside the following range standard 0 7mV lt FIV 2 FIV 4 2 14 d Alarm odi Category Level Description Remedy 4171 to ISE PREP WARNING Upon calibration the slope Make sure that the 4173 value is within the following standard solution range and reagent are set Na 45 0mV x Slope value properly lt 49
174. be then moves to above the reaction cuvette at the sample pipetting position and descends until the probe tip reaches the bottom of the cuvette whereby the sample is discharged Thereafter the probe moves to the probe rinse bath where its inside and outside are rinsed with deionized water 1st reagent addition and stirring When the reaction cuvette containing discharged sample stops at the 1st reagent adding position the reagent pipetting mechanism aspirates the required volume of reagent Then the reagent probe moves to above the reaction cuvette and discharges the reagent A liquid level sensor is also attached to the reagent probe which stops the probe when its tip contacts the surface of the reagent The necessary volume of reagent is discharged by the reagent pipetter After the reagent discharge the probe moves to the probe rinse bath where its inside and outside are rinsed with deionized water After the 1st reagent addition the reacting solution is stirred by the stirring mechanism And after the stirring the stirring rod is thoroughly rinsed with the rinse water Photometry After addition of the 1st reagent measurement of absorbance of the reacting solution starts The absorbance during the reaction is measured at 18 second intervals 4 f 2nd and 3rd reagent addition and stirring About 1 5 minutes later the 2nd reagent is added to the reaction cuvette and about 5 minutes later the 3rd reagent is added As with the 1st re
175. ce lamp lamp OFF ON 1 Hitergent is pipetted in 9 seconds 1 cycle over 30 to 175 seconds water exchange time chart 7 5 6 Cell Blank MAINTENANCE screen Cell blank measurement required Judgement by operator NO 5 Cell blank data 2 print Storage of blank data FD Cell blank measurement Data output 3 Input of End indication m Abnormal Operation check m FD alarm logging END Function blank value is measured for all cells 48 cells Required time 10 min 24 sec reset 20 sec 12 sec cycle x 52 cycles Details of Processing Reference Document 1 Start from MAINTENANCE screen Screen specifications 2 Refer to the next page 3 At cell blank measurement operation is checked and Screen specifications alarm is displayed if operation is abnormal Alarm code specifications 4 The above alarm is stored in FD 5 Raw abbsorbance values and difference data for all cells Report specifications 48 cells are printed on the report and all raw absorbance pp specifications values are saved in FD Hemarks 7 5 7 Photometer Check 1 MAINTENANCE screen No Photometer check required Judgement by operator Yes 3 Input of Execute Photometer data print Photometer check Storage of photometer data Data output Abnormal Operation check Memor Alarm indication No
176. ce value on the left side of calibration result printout is checked and that on the right side is checked in a rate assay test Unless check is desired input 32000 to 32000 Qd Limit Level Check When concentration or enzyme activity is abnormally high in a rate assay test correct data is unobtainable because the substrate or coenzyme in reagent is consumed completely Therefore the upper or lower reaction limit absorbance is set for check Check is made on the absorbance at the main wavelength alone Relationship between Alarm Name and Photometric Point gt When 4 points or more over the specified photometric range are within the reaction limit measurement is carried out normally In case no point 1 point or 2 points are within the reaction limit a reference value is obtained depending on an absorbance change between the first two points In case 3 points are within the reaction limit with comment LIMT2 the value obtained depending on an absorbance change among the first three points is printed as a reference value ABS ABS Reaction limit level Input photometric range with comment LIMTO ABS Time Input photometric range with comment LIMT2 Time Input photometric range with comment LIMT1 ABS Heaction limit level Input photometric range with comment LIMT2 Fig 2 1 Reaction Limit Level Check Automatic Correction of Reaction Limit Level gt
177. cified number communication is stopped 16 16 16 4 5 Priority When multiple processings concur in response to a request from the host the analyzer assigns priority to them for returning its response to the host However batch communication is suspended in units of text for transferring to the host the text which has a higher priority than batch communication when it interrupts batch communication under execution restricted to the cases where analytical data in the real time mode is output from analyzer and analytical data alone is transferred in response to RES frame Discrimination between real time communication data and batch communication data depends on the function frame Then batch communication is restarted Table 16 6 gives the details of each frame and the priority Table 16 6 Details of Each Frame and Priority Priority Item 1 Sending of SPE stat sample 2 sending of SPE routine sample frame 3 sending of REP resending request frame 4 sending of analytical data in response to RES from host transfer of data read from FD 5 Sending of higher priority analytical data transfer of data read from FD 6 Sending of lower priority analytical data analytical data in real time communication 16 4 6 RESULT ONLY Mode In this mode only the measurement result data is transferred to the host This mode does not accept a resending request REP frame from the analyzer or host and a specific sample data request When YES i
178. circumference Returning from water 3 0 2 supply pump L min Flow rate through lamp 0 30 or more a with the lamp coolant tube disconnected at the lamp inlet L min a 3 4 WASH 3 4 1 Details of WASH Processing START Operator s Function Washing of each mechanism judgment Necessary WASH cell 15 min 20 sec WASH ISE 5 min 44 sec WASH 20 min 20 sec Maintenance screen Execution input STOP input Operation check Abnormal Alarm indication Normal e FD alarm logging Step No Contents of Processing Reference Document Start MAINTENANCE screen ocreen specifications 2 next page When mechanism operates its operation is checked If abnormal Screen specifications alarm is indicated Alarm code table Alarm will be saved into the alarm FD FD specifications Remarks 1 Start method and resulting action a Specify DAILY All cells probes S and R stirrer and ISE mechanism are washed 6 Specify reaction cell c Specify ISE The ISE mechanism is washed NOTE opecification of ISE for WASH when without ISE mechanism Input cannot be made from the screen Specification of all mechanisms when without ISE mechanism Operation is carried out according to cell specification Details of WASH Processing Reaction Disk Quick Cell feed 5 cell Ri
179. d therefore the analyzer adds not ETB but ETX For the host a frame character is the final message when the data for one sample is sent in more than one text So pay attention when taking in the data As a rule the analyzer sends the ANY frame to the host in response to a request from it in the following cases a request for analytical data transfer from the host the relevant sample is not stored on the FD b Analytical data cannot be read from the FD due to occurrence of an error in it during batch transfer of analytical data The communication controller in the analyzer is initialized in the following cases Power supply is turned on b RUN highlighted is specified for host communication parameter any of baud rate parity data bit stop bit end of data code and text length is changed through the screen At this time the first event request RES SPE from the host is ignored After changing a communication parameter attention should be paid to event If an error is detected on a text transferred from the host the analyzer sends REP resending request until the normal text is received oecure at least 100 msec before transfer from the host to analyzer 16 53 9 91 16 11 Operation Flow Diagram Operation flow for use of this host communication is shown below Operation start xecution of N communication requested Y Each parameter changes specified for host c
180. d pulse count shall be used 2 Descent amount Should descend to lowermost point 117 at constant speed 14 15 3 Stroke Identification for Sample Container o1 Height identification of standard cup on sample disk outer row No 1 position 52 Height identification of cup on test tube Sample containers same as for S1 No 2 position 53 Height identification of standard cup on sample disk inner row W1 position STD CONT 51 tubes are settable only on the outer row Model 902 allows height identification for two kinds of sample containers 4 Setting of Sample Containers at S probe Adjustment Container Standard Used Cup on tube Standard Test Tube Cup Test Standard Cup Test Tube Set Cup Tube Cup on tube Cup on tube Position o1 Standard cup Standard cup Standard cup Standard cup Test tube 52 Cup on tube Standard Test tube Test tube Cup on tube Cup on tube cup on tube 53 W1 Standard cup Standard cup Standard Standard cup Standard cup Standard cup 2 After S probe readjustment check if the stroke down to the sample container has changed 14 16 5 R probe Rotation Adjustment a Details of operation Above cell Above reagent bottle outer row Above reagent bottle inner row Rinse bath Probe is not moved vertically b Extent of operation 1 Rotation angle Reference value pulse count is subjected to no of co
181. dard solution 1 x 10 448 1 445 Rounding off S1ABS Lo 2 446 5 x 447 447 15 indicated on the monitor menu 2 screen Calculation of K factor EUR A B Co Concentration of standard solution 2 C4 Concentration of standard solution 1 A gt Printed absorbance of standard solution 2 x 10 B Printed absorbance of standard solution 1 x 10 In the calculation of K value each concentration value is rewritten into the integral part and exponential part and calculation is carried out while ignoring the fractional digits and the exponential part The number of fractional digits is counted with reference to the concentration value of standard solution 1 Therefore 0 0 is rewritten into 0 x 10 and 5 3 into 53 x 10 and values 0 and 53 are used for calculation The value 202 obtained by calculation is indicated on the monitor menu 2 screen 53 0 53 L 20 3050 2027 i 445 lt 10 3074 447 x 10 2 2 Calculation of Sample Concentration Given below is an example where the measured absorbance of a sample is 0 1637 Cx Ke Ax B Cx Concentration of sample K Calibration factor Ax Absorbance of sample Concentration of standard solution 1 Absorbance of standard solution 1 S1ABS IF Instrument constant assumed to be 1 0 Instrument constant B assumed to be 0 0 Cx 202 0 1637 0 0447 0 0 1 0 0 x 101 2 39 g
182. de Press Maintenance Mode from the system menu to display Maintenance Mode Menu The next screen is displayed How to Return to Operation Mode a Press Menu End b Avoid touching the screen for 10 seconds or more avoid pressing the touch switch Maintenance Mode Menu Screen Maintenance Mode Menu Menu End DIP SW Setting Status PT Setting Status Check Memory Initialization Memory Switch Memory Switch Setting of memory switch DIP SW Setting Status Confirmation of DIP SW setting status Memory Initialization Initialization of image data memory Press Memory Initialization key The next screen is displayed 12 19 6 Memory Initialization Memory Initialization Menu Menu End Image Data Initialization Select Image Data Initialization Is it desired to initialize image data memory Yes No Select Yes The image data memory is initialized Initialization is under execution is displayed during initialization Upon completion of initializing the image data memory execute installation according to Procedure for Installation of Product Program 7 Memory Switch Setting 1 NOTE Each switch is set as shown below Setting change may disable startup of the instrument So avoid changing the setting Keying Sound OFF Stop Buzzer Sound ON Back Light Off Time 10 Min Screen Automatic Commu Write nication Recovery Check
183. ds 1 2 Sampling System Sample container Sample disk Detergents Sampling mechanism Pipetting mode Insufficient sample detection Sample ID Automatic rerun Stat sample analysis oample carryover Sample conveyance Hitachi standard sample cup Sample tube diameter 13 to 17 mm length 75 to 100 mm 60 positions Outer row 35 positions routine and stat samples with free adapter barcode reader attachable Inner row 25 positions standard control samples 22 rinse solutions 3 3 kinds W1 W2 for sample probe rinsing HITERGENT for sample carryover evasion ISE RINSE SOLUTION for sample carryover evasion HICARRYNON Pipetter driven by stepping motor 2 to 50 uL of sample test in 0 1 uL steps Normal prescribed volume discharged at cell bottom system water solution for sample probe internal rinsing usable as STD 1 Sample pre dilution not performed Aqueous sample Resistance detection method Barcode reader option Following code shemes are usable in combination CODE 39 CODE 128 INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 NW7 Modulas 10 Modulas 16 Auto rerun function not provided Routine sample analysis interruptible for stat sample analysis Sample carryover evasion function available 2 kinds of detergents settable on sample disk inner row Can be sampled directly from belt line 1 3 Reagent System disk cooling Reagent bottle Detergents ISE re
184. e error and level error Sensitivity error Photometry assay Sensitivity check is carried out only for linear 2 to 6 point non linear or isozyme P calibration This error is indicated if the difference in mean absorbance between STD 1 and STD N is smaller than SENSITIVITY LIMIT input value N Linear 2 point isozyme P calibration Non linear linear 3 to 6 point calibration input value for SPAN POINT Note however that N 2 2 when CALIB POINTS 2 in non linear LOGIT LOG 3 4 calibration For the mean absorbance of STD 1 in span calibration the following data is used Linear Previous 51 ABS Non linear Sensitivity check is not made in R B calibration Previously updated mean absorbance Photometry assay This error is indicated upon completion of non linear calibration or if the SD value in linear multi point calibration is larger than SD LIMIT input value cont d Remedy The parameters on the screen and FD are not updated Set the standard solutions and reagent properly Prepare the standard solutions newly Check the sample syringe for leakage clogging etc Unless check is desired input O for sensitivity limit absorbance on the parameter registration menu Set in correct concentration series Replace the seal piece of pipettor Check fastening of joints Unless check is desired input 999
185. e the printer Insert the relevant disk 5581 INSERTED d Alarm Description Remedy 5631 to SYSTEM E Lou A reception time out error Check the cable 5643 has occurred system I F heck th te A transmission time out ML error has occurred communication WARNING A error or checksum trace error has occurred Check c WARNING A parity error has occurred contents of mo line analyzer WARNING A framing error has Check if a occurred change has occurred in occurred parameters WARNING Text length error au WARNING Function character error WARNING Sample information error WARNING Test selecting information error WARNING Comment information error WARNING Reception cannot continue up to the end code because an illegal character is received from the host Example A null code is received from the host 5681 BATH EXCHANGE FAILURE WARNING The start key has been Do incubation bath pressed despite failure in water exchange incubation bath water again exchange WARNING An error has occurred in 1 Check the LCD display module communication communication cable of LCD Communication error 2 Replace the appears on the LCD LCD display 1 to 36 WARNING Either reagent positions R1 Check and correct to R3 or reagent volume the contents of alone is 0 no parameters H1 to specification H3 5696 PA
186. eader Coil spring gt High concentration waste solution header Ca HD uium ASIE Water supply High conceniration waste walter lank Silicone rubber tube Brown 4 x 2T Fig 3 1 Overall Piping Diagram 3 3 Flow Rate at Each Location Location 2 Remarks 9 probe Outside 270 30 SV unit restrictor 1 5 tube L 80 restrictor 2 1 0 tube L 650 washing Tube Tygon 03 17 x 06 35 Inside 99 5 washing R probe Outside 270 30 SV unit restrictor 2 1 5 tube L 80 restrictor o 1 0 tube L 820 washing Tube Tygon 03 17 x 06 35 Inside 120 20 washing Stirring and washing 320 30 SV unit restrictor 1 5 tube L 80 restrictor 21 15 L 1000 Tube Tygon 03 17 x 06 35 Rinsing High 90 10 SV11 branch tube tube L 395 high concentration concentration waste solution probe Restrictor 01 0 Mies solution Tube Tygon 22 38 x 23 96 Low 90 10 Same as above concentration waste solution probe Cell blank washing 450 150 SV unit restrictor o 1 5 tube 580 specials tube 500 Tube Tygon 23 17 x 06 35 tube B Silastic tube 01 0 x uL 0 8 220 Nozzle washing 140 15 SV unit restrictor 1 5 tube L 1080 Tube Tygon 22 38 x 03 96 Incubation bath flow After pouring water into the incubation bath with cells set flow rate velocity on water surface should be measured with cells removed in sec
187. echanism UR Midi Rotation INZONE iddle i r High low concentration 0 7 5 25 34 Poter gont pipetting rotation vacuum waste solution B cus barcode rotation SV14 ON 0 1 1 4 1 3 2 9 9 0 14 0 High concentration water drain SV13 9 i48 Low concentration water ON drain SV12 0 7 1 0 Cell blank SV10 Cell rinse SV11 ON 0 6 Trough blank SV9 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 R3 aspiration Air aspiration R2 aspiration System water discharge Remainder discharge System water aspiration 7 1 2 Reset 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Reset Time Chart 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 10 7 8 8 4 15 2 15 8 16 4 1 rotation 48 cells 2 rotations 48 cells HP o gt 01 5 20 76 85 3 cells 1 9 Rotation to HP 87 Sampling mechanism Deviated from HP Moved down 01 Moved up when not located 7 8 8 3 x at upper dead point 8 4 11 6 12 5 12 9 S syringe E Moved up ial ro HP Deviated from upper S syringe SV2 dead point 8 7 ON 12 8 OFF S nozzle outside wash SV8 8 9 ON 12 5 OFF Rotation to HP 4 ogs 55 42 45 5 7 dispensing mechanism Deviated from Moved down 0 2 Moved up Mer na located 56 88 97 104 T H syringe Z Moved up Deviated 7 9 0 9 3 Moved up syringe SV3 upper dead point 5 9 ON 10 1 OFF R nozzle outside wash SV6 6 1 ON 9 7 OFF 17 1 1 0 17 4 ISE sipper mechanism Moved up when not located 16 5 16 8 upper dead point
188. eck is not made during initialization water exchange or wake up Only at power on 32 Only at power on 38 Only at power on T Only at power on 35 Only at power on 36 Only at power on 37 Only at power on 38 Only at power on 46 Only at power on a7 Only at power on 48 Only at power on g 50 Only at power on 71 Checksum error detected in operation 1 unit 72 Checksum error detected in analyzing unit 102 5 108 22 07 k 2 5 1 Logging Program List 1 Monitor printout Real time printout Specify print on Real time the start condition menu screen and batch Printout is made when the specified values in all tests for one sample are calculated during operation Batch printout Specify sample number on the data monitor screen 2 Calibration result Printout is made when calibration is time printout selected on the start condition menu screen and the result of calibration is output 3 Remaining opecify remaining reagent volume Batch reagent volume printout on the start condition menu printout screen 4 blank printout Specify cell blank on the Batch maintenance screen 5 Reproducibility Specify reproducibility check on the Batch check printout maintenance screen 6 Cumulative Specify cumulative mechanism Batch mechanism information on the mechanism check information menu screen printout 7 Param
189. ed 37 0 1 C warm water circulating system By means of stirring rod rotation Timing for stirring after each addition of R1 R2 R3 Stirring possible for a minimum volume of 100 uL One position fixed Minimum Maximum 250 uL minimum required volume for photometry 500 uL temperature control rinsing upper limit One position fixed After completion of photometry rinsing 3 times rinsing with detergent not performed Rinsing for carryover evasion possible throughput may decrease by specifying cell carryover evasion 1 4 1 5 Photometric System Photometer Wavelengths Monochromator Detector Linearity Photometric method Correction 1 6 ISE option Electrodes Multiwavelength photometer absorptiometry 12 wavelengths 340 376 415 450 480 505 546 570 600 660 700 800 nm Grating Photodiode Up to 2 5 Abs 10 mm cell conversion Direct photometry of reaction cell at one or two wavelengths Cell blank correction prior to analysis passed cell blank measurement alone Flow cell type liquid membrane ISE cartridge Reference electrode flow path 1 MKCL liquid flow path Measuring temperature oystem Measuring cycle Measured items Measurable samples Linearity Reagent bottle 36 C 2 C warm water circulating system Indirect dilution potentiometry 50 times dilution 36 sec sample 18 sec for sample 18 sec for internal standard solution Na K Cl S
190. ed sample 110 400 otat With ID No set sample blank Stat Without Sample No Ignored sample set 1 to 50 16 25 3 SPE Text for test selecting information inquiry from analyzer to host a Composition of text Fu Function character Contents of text For the contents of text refer to 16 6 2 Contents of Text Text type Text for a routine or stat sample alone is sent Condition for inquiry to host 1 When test selection on the analyzer side includes a sample for which no test is requested provided YES is specified for full time inquiry 2 When an ID read error has occurred with the barcode reader is provided At this time ID No becomes blank Condition for rejecting inquiry to host YES is specified for the transfer of analytical data alone on the communication parameter screen Whether test selection inquiry is made to the host for every sample or only when no test is selected on the analyzer side is selectable by the full time inquiry parameter on the communication parameter screen 1 When YES is specified for full time inquiry inquiry is made regardless of test selecting registration on the analyzer side 2 When NO is specified for full time inquiry inquiry is made only when test selection on the analyzer side includes a sample for which no test is requested When YES is specified for the original Abs test selection inquiry is not made to the host At inquiry in t
191. ed are referred to as all samples Z Status Transition routine analysis mode Tres v o ny oy gt 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 Automatic End STOP STOP Without T START S STOP STOP Mechanism ee Standby dab do M ERE SN Reset before s Operation sampling S stop without reset 8 s Stop Emergency stop T M mechanism 5 Used only for change of probe adjustment position Status transition is not made Transition is made upon achieving success in reset In routine analysis mode T S information for routine samples is not cleared but stored upon transition from stop status to standby status For stat samples however T S is cleared after completion of pipetting Transition is made after completion of reset Photometer check ISE check Barcode reader check incubator water exchange cell blank measurement probe adjustment reset mechanism check wash and ISE prime Transition to the standby status is made upon occurrence of STOP level alarm i in reset during initialization 7 3 1 Status Transition easy analysis mode Status Transition easy analysis mode processing POWER 1 2 STAND BY UP p 17 S STOP Restart enable 10 With mechanism reset 12 PARAMETER CHECK OPERATION SAMPLING POWER
192. ensation error Test to test compensation disabled Calculation test error Overflow Calculation disabled Expected value high limit Over Expected value low limit ove Electrode preparation SD absorbance over Ph Output String PRINTER 5 R I F T T D U o Y B G N L D amp C M O 5 O O O 5 O O g o Remarks Je Data may become blank space e Data may become blank space e Prozone value is output to the printer only when the monitor is in the real time mode a prozone value 5 digit O O O O O O O O OOOOOOO O O O O O O O OOOOOOO OOOO O O e Data becomes blank space e Data becomes blank space e Data becomes blank space e May concur with other alarm O OO O OO O OO O OO O OO O OO e May concur with other alarm e Data becomes blank space BM only NOTES 1 If any data caused multiple data alarms the alarm registered first will be output 2 When Specify is entered for measured value space parameter in the start condition screen 2 36 2 4 3 Data Alarm Codes Data Alarm Printer S UF Cell blank CELL Sample short SAMPL Reagent short REAGN abnormal The ADC value of main or sub wavelength only main wavelength in single wavelength photometry is Zero
193. ent 45 V 150 to 1 74LS14 or lt Open drain Cable length 1 5 m max 15 9 15 4 Printer 0200 5530 01 15 4 1 Configuration This printer consists of mechanical section and driver Driver Mechanical section gt STB BUSY 9 d D FEED ERR PE Positional Positional detection detection detection 24 V 15 10 15 4 2 Specifications 8 9 10 11 Printing system Dot formation Dot pitch Number of printing columns Character size Printing position Printing speed Character composition Character type Printing lifetime Printing density Thermal line dot system 140 line dots 2 8 dots mm 70 dots inch in column direction 20 columns in character mode 1 8 W x 3 H mm Normal size character mode 3 6 W x 3 H mm Enlarged size character mode See Fig 10 4 lines sec 80 characters sec Normal size mode 40 characters sec Enlarged size 46 dot line sec Graphic mode 5 x 7 dots q Character mode 8 x 17 dots line Graphic mode JIS II 160 types 2 million lines 20 million dot lines or more OD level 0 8 or more when printing on specified paper at room temperature and drive input voltage 24 7 V 15 11 15 4 3 Interface 1 System Conforming with Centronics standards 8 bit parallel 2 Transmission speed 1000
194. ent Definition of Control Variable Represented by optional position POS x y on the S disk x Track variable 1 outer track 2 inner track y Position variable 1 to 35 outer track 1 to 25 inner track Rotation Control System In rotation from POS 1 x y to POS 2 y the sample disk stops at position POS2 1 x 1 y 1 is fed 1 pitch back and stops the next position sampling position fore back gt 0 fore back lt fore D sample disk rotates in order of POS N y POS N n m nearby intermediary position in direction determined in 1 POS 2 1 1 gt POS 2 x The direction of rotation is determined in the same manner as in 1 Note that the sample disk moves back when POS N n m is ahead of POS 2 1 x 1 y 1 in the above direction of rotation NOTE 0915 angle between the current position and one position before the destination For rotation and stop in one cycle refer to the following page 7 32 Operation cell rinse mechanism 1 Function Reaction cell rinse wash with water 5 times including cell blank water 2 Status Transition for Cell Rinse 29 All cells contain liquid Start All cells are not empty to RG R7 All cells are empty All cells are empty cells have been washed and no blank Discharge water is discharged Some cell has
195. ent dispensing mechanism R syringe R syringe SV3 R nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism 30 cell rotation 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 7 6 OFF OFF Upper dead point OFF OFF Upper dead point Stirring rod rotation OFF Stirring rod outside wash OFF SV5 Reagent disk Stop Sample disk Stop 3 0 Upper dead point ISE sipper mechanism Down 3 3 7 Upper dead point 2 4 ISE syringe 0 0 0 4 5 Discharge 2 4 2 6 ISE syringe SV16 ON OFF 2 6 3 7 Na K Cl SV17 17 4 ON 2 4 OFF 17 4 KCI SV18 ON OFF 0 4 2 5 Pinch valve SV19 ON OFF Y 2 9 Stop at upper dead point Cell rinse mechanism Up Middle 0 7 1 5 Concentrated dilute 01 14 19 25 3 1 waste solution ON ON OFF e 9 0 Concentrated waste N solution SV13 OFF 9 0 waste solution OFF ON Cell blank 5 10 OFF 1 2 2 2 Cell rinse SV11 ON OFF OFF Trough rinse SV 9 5 19 Stop reference electrode priming 13 14 15 16 17 Cycle 10 18 SEC PCP check x v _ 14 0 14 0 4 Internal standard aspiration Reaction table Sampling mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 Reagent dispensing mechanism syringe syringe SV3 nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism Stirring rod rotation Stirring rod outside wash 5 5 Reagent di
196. equest absent Next test request present Inside outside washing Air aspiration Reagent aspiration Next test request present Backlash Reagent discharge Remaining liquid discharged Inside outside washing Next test request absent 22 uL Reagent 0 lt x lt 350 Dummy x 16 10 Amount discharged at nozzle ascent 17 uL Backlash 8 uL Amount discharged at nozzle ascent 17 uL Reagent 0 lt x lt 350 46 uL N Carryover evasion using system water Air exclusion Discharge Remaining liquid discharged System water 50 to 350 Remainder 40 uL Decreased amount 8 uL Air exclusion amount 93 uL Mechanism decreased amount 8 uL Air amount 93 uL Rinse water 50 to 350 uL 40 uL 3 Operation photometry ISE measuremment sequence 10 15 18 5 x MES ee cc ee E X ONMEE occus 42 222 777 251 E S NEN mu MENS cce a ISSUE HL pee ca onu bee resp CB2 CB3 Me a ee T a See LL 265 1240 Tq o e C cr PENES 12 SAMPLE Lb qoe eg m 0 0 ae aa en Mare cippo p loa s TUBE CRI ee
197. er SPE save 13 SPE transfer after SPE save 14 SPE transfer after SPE save 15 SPE transfer after SPE save 16 ANY transfer after SPE save 10 ANY transfer after SPE save 11 ANY transfer after SPE save 12 ANY transfer after SPE save 6 16 19 ANY transfer after RES save 4 ANY transfer after RES save 5 ANY transfer after RES save 4 ANY transfer after SPE save 5 SPE transfer after RES save 15 SPE transfer after RES save 16 SPE transfer after RES save 15 SPE transfer after RES save 16 ANY transfer after RES save 12 ANY transfer after RES save 11 ANY transfer after RES save 12 ANY transfer after RES save 15 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 IERZVatud FR LPR in Analyzer Ready for SPE transfer transfer wait Ready for SPE transfer transfer wait Ready for SPE transfer HPR LPR transfer wait Alarm registration communication stopped Alarm registration communication continued Event from Analyzer TS Inquiry Real time Transfer Batch Req TS Data Out Req for Transfer managem t from 902 Specific Req from task Screen SPE current TSy14 SPE current TSy15 SPE current TSy16 Alarm display registration Communication paramete
198. er of absorbance data in entire reaction process from analyzer to host 1 Specification of size The size of text is specifiable on the communication parameter screen Select either 256 or 512 bytes On selection of 256 or 512 bytes text is transferred divided as shown below i When 256 byte mode is specified for text size 1B 1B 2B 37 10B x 4 First Sample information Analytical data 1 6B 4 6B x point count 5 Analytical 4 BLANK1 SS BLANK4 Point count ABS Variable 1B 2B 37B 3B 6B x point count ma SIX Fu nioan ams 5 aco 1 When 512 byte mode is specified for text size 2B 37 10B x4 1B 1B Final E 5 Sample information Analytical data 1 E 6B x4 6B x point count L ana rna es 7 3 Variablo 2 Transfer unit This text is transferred in units of channel Even when the text size is 256 bytes transfer is completed in a single text if the point count is 24 or less The frame character at that time is not 1 but 3 Sample information Refer to sample information in 2 of 16 6 2 16 33 4 Analytical data 1 to 4 10 characters each i _ For transfer format refer to 2 of 16 6 1 ii Table 16 18 is followed when there is no relevant test for analytical data 1 to 4 iii When two channel simultaneous measurement is specified data for two channels is transferred and data for up to four channels 1 channel L H 1 is transferred when
199. erum and urine Na 1010250 mmol L 110100 mmol L Cl 1010 250 mmol L Internal standard solution 50 mL max Diluent 50 mL max Heference electrode solution 500 mL max 1 7 Installation Conditions Power requirement Deionized water consumption Waste liquid drain Ambient temperature humidity Analyzer dimensions Analyzer weight BTU Noise mean in operation 1 8 User Interface Application Display Keyboard Printer Multi language compatibility Printer 1 9 Deionised Water Pressure Conductivity Display 0 5 to 3 5 kgf cm 230 V 50 60 Hz less than 1 5 Less than 15 L hr 2 systems for concentrated and diluted liquids 18 to 30 C 20 to 8096 non condensing Temperature Humidity 720 W x 720 1085 mm Within 200 kg 1300 kcal hr max lt 55 dB Routine analysis for Asia version Backlighted LCD 256 x 128 dots graphic Touch screen keys 72 keys Thermal roll paper printer 20 digits Japanese English Chinese German Spanish applicable English alone 1 us cm or less germ free 1 10 Analytical Methods Assay modes Data alarms Standard solution Calibration types Calibration method Calculation channels Test to test compensation 1 11 Accuracy Control Control serum 1 12 Data Storage Routine sample data Stat sample data Control sample data One point One point end prozone check Two point rate Two point end prozone check
200. et circuit 719 5000 CANIN ON MES IC t VR1 for adjustment of ADC timing VH1 for confirmation of ADC start signal 233 35 10 24 3 Reset Circuit This board supervises the Vcc 5 V voltage with the power monitoring IC and generates a reset sequence signal ACFAIL SYSRESET for the main CPU at power on off Approx 4 8 V Approx 4 8 V Approx 4 65 V Approx 4 65 V 2 msec min 5 V ACFAIL 270 msec a SSS sapa SYSRESET 4 Generation of ADC Timing Signal The output from the photo interrupter for ADC start set to the reaction disk is connected to the ADC controller on the EMIO100 board via the delay circuit on this board For adjustment of the ADC timing use the VR1 arranged at the front 10 25 127135200 1 5 DI C NF Reaction Disk Home Pos Disk ADC Start Reaction Bath Water Level Reagent Disk Homa Pos Reagent Disk Count Reagent Arm Home Pos Abnormal Descent Detection Liquid Level Detection 9 0 Stirrer Arm Home Pos J 30840 J 34839 37838 BR1 220 3083 1 J35836 2 2 2 21 1 J B35 BR1 220 430834 Jy J 50833 3 NF17 1 k J 309832 BR 220 430831 4 1 2 3 J 30829 3 rig c cx 5 1 12 1000 680K BR4 1 n acis D O
201. eter printout Specify parameter on the Batch maintenance screen 8 Program check Specify program check on the Batch printout mechanism check menu screen 9 ISE check printout Specify ISE check on the mechanism Real time check menu screen 10 Photometer check Specify photometer check on the Batch printout maintenance screen 11 Alarm trace Specify alarm trace information on Batch printout DAILY the mechanism check menu screen 12 Alarm trace Specify alarm trace information on Batch printout the mechanism check menu screen CUMULATIVE 13 Original Abs Printout is made when original Abs is time printout specified on the system parameter screen and operation is executed 14 Communication opecify communication trace printout Batch trace printout on the mechanism check menu screen 15 Work sheet opecify work sheet printout on the TS Batch printout registration screen of routine analysis 16 Barcode Reader opecify Barcode Reader check on time check the mechanism check menu screen NOTES 1 The stop key is invalid during printout 2 The stop key need be pressed to stop analysis 1 Initialization of Printer Printout Stop by Stop Key In batch mode alone Effected when power supply is turned on or there is a printer alarm at start of printing one processing Paper Feed e Atend of printout At the end of each printout in batch mode of No 1 and in N
202. f Na K and Cl and calculation tests 8 tests data for up to 50 channels is transferable 2 Analytical data 1 to n 10 characters each gt 10 30 40 102 10 10 Data alarm 1 character Measured value 6 characters Channel No 3 characters right justified 16 31 i Channel Table 16 15 Channel No Remarks to 636 1 to 36 without ISE b38 to b40 bai to 643 b44 to b51 1 Measured value Table 16 16 Positive negative Decimal Point Max Digit Count Example Positive Absent 6 123456 23 45 Negative Absent 5 12345 bb 123 1 to 36 38 to 40 44 to 51 Present 4 12 34 b 12 3 b Space Table 16 17 aane Description Position of Decimal Point Remarks Concentration 6 digits with Decimal point position in value in sign and concentration value of photometry decimal point standard 1 on chemistry assay parameter screen Concentration Same as above Decimal point position in value of concentration value of LOW electrolyte solution on ISE parameter screen 41 to 43 Measured value 6 digit integer Zero at any time for serum index with sign Calculated 6 digits with Decimal point position in value in sign and standard value range lower calculation test decimal point limit on calculation test screen iii Data alarm For details refer to the data alarm code list 16 32 b Transf
203. ference electrode solution Drain Fig 5 1 ISE Principle 1 Movement of Reaction Disk Model 902 Cell rinse Diluent internal standard Sample rinse solution ISE aspiration nozzle The reaction sequence consists of processes carried out while the reaction disk provided with 48 cells turns one revolution on 48 cycles The processes are classified into operation process and measurement process Process Photometry Cell Position Senco I meee R1 R2 R3 Electrode aspiration e 7 Celine 38047 Measurement Cellblankmeasurement e Reaction monitor photometry 126 For ISE analysis two cells are required for each sample one cell for sample and the other for internal standard solution ISE No Operation Sequence Photometry Internal Standard 1 o pipetting into cell 1 and R3 pipetting into cell 18 Stirring of cell 18 at same poston 1 12 teed and R2 pipetting ito cene Stirring of cell 6at same postion feed and R1 pipetting gt Stirring of cell 1 at same poson Measurement at cell position 26 which passes optical axis at intervals of 18 sec and data acquisition 8 Aspiration of solution at cell position 7 into electrode after 6 cycle turning Rinsing of cell after lapse of 10
204. fore SPE transfer SPE LPR transfer wait before SPE LPR transfer SPE HPR transfer wait before SPE HPR transfer SPE HPR LPR transfer wait before SPE HPR LPR transfer Ready for LPR transfer Ready for HPR transfer Ready for HPR transfer LPR transfer wait Ready for SPE transfer lt VAA J J A ZI J A ZI ZI ZI ZI SPE current TS 13 SPE current TS 14 SPE current TS 15 SPE current TS 16 SPE current TS 13 ANY transfer 2 LPR transfer 10 HPR transfer 1 1 HPR transfer 12 SPE transfer 13 SPE transfer 14 SPE transfer 15 SPE transfer 16 LPR transfer 10 HPR transfer 1 1 AN TTN IN je transfer 12 SPE transfer 6 N LPR transfer final 2 HPR transfer final 4 HPR transfer final 10 Previous frame 2 Previous frame 3 Previous frame 4 Previous frame 5 SPE transfer 13 SPE transfer 14 SPE transfer 15 SPE transfer 16 Previous frame 10 Previous frame 11 Previous frame 12 ANY transfer 2 ANY transfer 3 ANY transfer 4 ANY transfer 5 SPE transfer 13 SPE transfer 14 SPE transfer 15 SPE transfer 16 ANY transfer 10 ANY transfer 1 1 ANY transfer 12 ANY transfer after SPE save 2 ANY transfer after SPE save 3 ANY transfer after SPE save 4 ANY transfer after SPE save 5 SPE transfer aft
205. from host FC Frame character same text gt Transfer sequence Same text is transferred after the first MOR reception After MOR reception not the same text but the next analytical data text 15 transferred If text FC 2 is the same as FC END the analytical data text of the next sample is transferred b In sending SUS frame from analyzer Example 1 REP frame is returned for ANY frame from the analyzer gt sequence Analyzer HOST Other than REP Example 1 Example 2 An error occurred on response to ANY frame from the analyzer Transfer sequence Analyzer HOST Text not followed Other than REP occurrence of error including occurrence of error Example 2 16 12 4 Transfer of Analytical Data analyzer gt host The analyzer can send analytical data to the host only when the host has transferred the MOR frame to the analyzer a Transmission procedure in normal case Transfer sequence _ _ Positive response Analyzer HOST from analyzer Frame A Description 1 to END Analytical data including calibration result and absorbance data in entire reaction process from host Frame Description REP When text in A is abnormal MOR To receive analytical data next time as well HEC To avoid reception of analytical data next time SUS To suspend communication SPE To
206. g system cell rinse system stirring system and ISE system are made to operate the same as in the operation status Required time Reset 20 sec mechanism check 18 sec cycle x X times Details of Processing Reference Document Start from MAINTENANCE screen ocreen specifications 2 Refer to the following page 3 At mechanism check operation is checked alarm is Screen specifications displayed on the instrument monitor screen if operation Alarm code table is abnormal 4 The above alarm is stored in FD FD specifications Remarks Operation is repeated until the End key is input Details of Mechanism Check C E 9 Y x 2D d D C Incubator water circulating pump ON To next page Reaction disk Reaction disk rotation same as in operation status Sampling system 1 2 3 Cycle 1 2 or 1 2 get Remainder of Sampling from cycle no 2 1 inner track of or 0 sampling disk Sampling from outer track of sampling disk This operation is conducted in 18 seconds 1 cycle refer to the operation time chart Input of the End key is checked at the beginning of processing and it is terminated if input The probe operates at W1 W2 W3 position the same as in the operation status sample aspiration volume is 3 uL However the probe discharges liquid into the rinsing bath without moving down to the cell The cup position is
207. ging through continuous integration circuit measurements and calculation 10 11 Conventional Type Double integral type A D x RAM controller wavelength E oub wavelength Operational waveform Discharge Charge Reset EMIO 100 Main wavelength Sub wavelength Sequential Exclusive compariso K A controller ISE n type ADC H8 330 Temperature Operational waveform us Teen 400 us Approx 13 msec 32 times The ADC whose conversion rate is 25 usec is operated at intervals of 400 usec 32 times and from the data thus obtained the maximum and minimum values are deleted After that the average value is calculated and output to the main CPU as a 16 bit A D value In case of simultaneous measurement at two wavelengths the above operation is conducted while changing the MPX at intervals of 200 and two 16 bit A D values separately calculated in H8 for the main and sub wavelengths are output 10 12 Block Diagram of EMIO100 Board VME bus 15 V 5 EMIO100 Gate array Address decoder VME bus control MB8421 x 2 Interrupt control ADC CTL control H8 330 Register Analog register Programmable Printer oscillator controller IPRNT95 gt i 5 8 M rm Sound unter 232C 4 S o 7 volume eo o 2 42 T 56 sz E oe 25 0 WS x
208. gned 7 4 5 8 8 9 9 Unassigned 10 Unassigned 2 1 Unused 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 4 I 5 1 15 1 2 OPTION 2 3 Unassigned 3 4 Unassigned 4 1 5 2 6 3 6 1 S 4 2 3 5 3 5 6 4 6 7 5 4 8 9 6 4 9 Unassigned 7 7 1 Unassigned 8 3 2 2 1 Operation Check Procedure at Occurrence of Alarm Operation command Detector ON OFF Time out YES Remaining number of pulses NO Remaining number pulses 0 OFF Alarm 3 2 Abnormal Which detector interrupted to cause stop 1 Foritems other than 7 and 8 check whether the motor remains running even after timeout NOTE If so it should be identified as a motor time out error 2 Operation check method for 2 pitch returning of sample disk 3 10 Operation check method Remaining number of pulses outside normal range Operation command Abnormal descent detected for 2 pitch feed of sample disk 4 tem 9 Check at resetting 6 Yes Alam Notes 1 7 Detector ON Operation command Detector ON 8 Operation command OFF 9 Operation command YES Remaining number of pulses abnormally large Count detector ON OFF Alarm Alarm D YES Remaining number pulses 0 10 Operation command Alarm D ON Outer track
209. hanisms The 902 consists of sample disk sampling mechanism reagent disk reagent pipetting mechanism reaction disk reaction bath stirring mechanism rinse mechanism photometric system touch screen type LCD etc The analytical operation will be explained with reference to the 902 system configuration in Fig 4 1 a oet sample cups or test tubes containing sample on the sample disk and reagent on the reagent disk Also set the test items requested for the samples plus the measurement conditions on the LCD At the start of analysis the operations below will be carried out automatically cuvette rinsing and water blank measurement The reaction cuvettes are rinsed and the absorbance of the cuvettes containing water is measured four times The measured value becomes the water blank value for each cuvette After completion of the water blank measurement the water is aspirated from the cuvettes Sampling After water blank measurement the reaction cuvette rotates to the sample pipetting position the sample disk turns and the sample cup or test tube containing sample is brought to the sampling position The sample probe then moves to above the sample cup or test tube and descends into it A liquid level sensor is attached to the probe which stops the probe descent when the tip of the probe contacts the surface of the sample The necessary volume of sample for analysis is aspirated by the sample pipetter The sample pro
210. has occurred in writing the routine sample test selecting information A hardware error has occurred in reading the routine sample measurement data A hardware error has occurred in reading the stat sample measurement data A hardware error has occurred in reading the control sample measurement data A hardware error has occurred in reading the individual or cumulative alarm information Hefer to alarm category No 119 d Alarm ZUM Category Level Description Remedy 5571 to FD READ WARNING A hardware error has Refer to alarm 5578 occurred in reading the category No 119 parameter data WARNING A hardware error has occurred in reading the channel assignment 120 7 WARNING A hardware error has occurred in reading the cell blank data 120 WARNING A hardware error has occurred in reading the control parameter 121 1 2 WARNING System disk is not set in drive 1 or data disk is not set in drive 2 5601 FD 123 1 2 WARNING A write protected disk is Unprotect the disk PROTECT inserted 5621 10 PRINTER WARNING Power supply is turned off Check the power 5625 or the connector is supply or connector disconnected WARNING Paper has run out or the Set paper or lower printer head has risen the printer head WARNING A hardware error has Check the printer occurred on the printer WARNING A time out error of the Check the printer has occurred printer cable 2 Replac
211. he real time mode with or without ID a sample No is added Sample information is detailed below 1 Items to be set with ID Sample No position No ID No 2 Items to be set without ID Sample No position No ID No treated as comment allowed even if inquiry ID is different opecification of test selection from host to analyzer The composition of SPE text is shown below For the contents of text refer to 16 6 2 Contents of Text count information Test selecting information request from the host will correspond to sample information sent upon test selection inquiry If not however it is taken into the analyzer and inquiry is not made again If a time out error hardware error or any other error occurs the relevant sample is considered to have not been received and is ignored after occurrence of the alarm When no request is made for all of the test selecting information received on the host side it is registered that none is requested When the barcode reader is provided the analyzer ignores the sample No of routine sample even if it is sent from the host Even when the same ID No is transferred to the analyzer multiple times with the barcode reader provided registration will be made in response to position No 16 26 Where the barcode reader is not provided a test selection response from the host to the real time inquiry should be made within two cycles 2 36 seconds If this peri
212. he system I F specification 3 4 Printout System a Printout order Sequential printout starting from the latest communication b Presence absence of error message and printout system Details are given in Table 2 5 Table 2 5 Presence Absence of Error Message and Printout System Printout System communication Remarks text example None Both transmission None normal Only communication and reception function No and sample data BCC SUM HOST AU BCC error or All data printed In printout of checksum error communication text PARITY HOST AU All data printed example an ASCII control code is FRAMING HOST AU All data printed convened ino OVER RUN HOST gt AU All data printed character string and FRAME AU All data printed line is fed and LENGTH HOST AU Text length error All data printed communication text HOST AU Function character All data printed 5 printed error Note CHAR2 HOST AU Sample data error All data printed CHAR3 HOST AU Test selecting All data printed information error CHAR4 HOST AU All data printed TIME OUT Both transmission Transmission or Only time point and reception reception time out communication error mode and error Error Communication Contents Message Mode of Error message printed NOTE Control codes and corresponding character strings are listed in Table 2 8 Notes a Printout is terminated
213. however the result of calibration will not be saved automatically onto the floppy disk Before turning off power supply parameters should be recorded on the maintenance screen Table 2 1 Handling of Calibration Result with Comment Printed Calibration Result Alarm Name on Automatic Saving onto Comment display on screen Operation Monitor Screen Floppy Disk STD Not updated Calibration curve generation disabled The reagent blank S1ABS previous result remains code 70 1 to 49 and calibration factor of SENS Not updated Standard solution sensitivity abnormal the relevant test are not previous result remains code 73 1 to46 Abe deed onto CALIB Updated Calibration abnormal Xu E to new result code 70 1 to 49 SD Updated Calibration SD abnormal to new result code 72 1 to 46 2 54 3 Reaction Linearity Check In a rate assay test the linearity in absorbance change is checked Check value varies with the number of points N in photometric range ABS _ Photometric point Photomeric point Time Time Fig 2 2 Reaction Linearity Check lt When N gt 9 gt The difference in absorbance change quantity between the first half 6 points 5 sections and the latter half 6 points is obtained and then divided with the overall absorbance change quantity When result of this calculation exceeds the limit in linearity check comment LIN is printed together with the result of measurement AAf
214. ible Impossible indexes Sample volume Possible Impossible increase decrease kind and age ID basically Host inquiry ID disk position ID sample No space same as S No information mode ID read error Noinquiry to host Routine analysis support Inquiry allowed No inquiry to host through manual ID Simple analysis Input Inquiry made via ID space and position No Data S No ID Reaction process Batch transfer Real time transfer transfer data Data Retrieval via ID Available Unavailable review Addition change of ID comment Possible Impossible and data Handling of identical sample Routine sample Routine sample Handled in units of Handled in units of test overlay test overlay otat sample otat sample Overwrite NOTE oame as above Handling when analyzer has T S NOTE Condition Previous data TP 8 0 30 Current Data Stored Data Over lay TP 5 0 TP 5 0 GOT 30 Over write TP 5 0 TP 5 0 16 58 6S 91 16 12 3 Processing Flow Diagram of System Interface Analyzer side CO Frame Procesing System I F 1221 task 77 Interrupt factor analysis Transmission text Reception 4 text Flow of processing ng D at a reference management program 4 1 j i i i i i i I i i 8 i quA i o Pd 9
215. ication cycle or longer NOTE 2 after receiving the MOR frame from the host at time point when the final end of data code is recognized NOTES 1 When the following conditions are satisfied a There is no test selecting information to be sent to the host b Analytical data is not output in the real time mode C There is no request for the RES frame d Specification through the screen is not made 2 This time period is changeable on the communication parameter screen Default value is 2 sec 16 10 2 Transfer of Communication Control Message analyzer lt gt host Analytical data request us Positive response Analyzer Analytical data transfer HOST The RES ANY MOR SUS and REC frames are available for the communication control messages For details refer to Table 16 4 a HES frame The host can make a request to the analyzer side just called analyzer hereafter for analytical data of a specific sample by use of the RES frame However the analyzer sends the ANY frame in the following cases The analyzer has no relevant data FD error occurs during access to the relevant sample data Data is transferred in the received sequence starting from completion of transmitting the measurement result data in real time mode The analyzer is capable of storing data of up to 10 routine samples in each of ID mode and sample No mode That is data of more than 11 sample
216. idering the channels for TP total protein and ALB albumin 5 TS request for serum indexes cannot be made for each sample For request specify serum index test on the parameter screen and serum indexes on the start condition screen 4 Comment Information from host to analyzer Transfer sequence Presence absence of comment 5 Presence absence of comment 4 Presence absence of comment 3 Presence absence of comment 2 Presence absence of comment 1 Set 0 for all comment presence absence information items 16 41 16 7 Error Check Function If the contents of the received text fall under any condition shown in Table 16 25 the analyzer judges that there is an abnormal character and outputs an alarm Table 16 25 Attribute _ Details of Check Remarks Text Frame An irrelevant frame character is received information character For details refer to Table 16 3 Function character does not correspond to sample For details refer to the contents of text in 16 2 Function character Example Analyzer HOST Analyzer HOST A alarm not output alarm output A Routine sample An irrelevant frame character is received In test selecting information inquiry a function character differing from the contents sent from the analyzer to host is received Character check in the unassigned area of text Is not made on the analyzer side and alarm is not output Each number is outside the specified range
217. ine Press the registration key onthe Sample 1 to 400 opace 1 to 35 ID read with opace Even if a barcode read error occurs due analysis sample screen by the same times as the unregistered barcode reader to an unregistered sample inquiry is mode sample count for inquiry made with position No assigned Sample registered Same as Inquiry is not made when is above specified for full time inquiry and TS request lasts 1 channel or more otat When RUN highlighted is specified for stat sample D 1 to 50 opace 2 to 35 Same as opace oame as above sample test selection inquiry is made while reading barcode above from the position specified for stat sample position setting parameter Sample No Routine Press the registration key on the Sample N 1 to 400 opace 1 to 35 ID registered opace oame as above mode sample screen by the same times as the unregistered sample count for inquiry handled as Sample registered comment otat Inquiry is not made sample Routine ID mode Routine analysis sample mode Inquiry is made by reading Sample A Space Space 1 to 35 ID read with opace Inquiry is not made when an barcodes sequentially from unregistered L barcode reader unregistered sample causes barcode position No 1 read error Sample registered Same as Inquiry is not made when NO is above specified for full time inquiry and TS request lasts 1 channel or more otat When RUN highlighted is specified for stat sa
218. inge SV2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 Reagent dispensing mechanism H syringe H syringe SV3 nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism 30 cell rotation only in cycle 10 Remaining 5 cell and 32 cell rotations not performed OFF Upper dead point OFF OFF Upper dead point Stirring rod rotation OFF Stirring rod outside wash OFF SV5 Reagent disk Stop Sample disk Stop 2 3 0 Upper dead point ISE sipper mechanism Down Y 17 4 3 7 Upper dead point ISE syringe 0 4 2 4 3 Discharge 2 4 2 6 ISE syringe SV16 ON OFF 174 26 37 SV17 ON zn OFF 17 4 0 3 KCl SV18 OIN OFF 0 4 2 5 Pinch valve SV19 ON OFF 2 9 Stop at upper dead point Cell rinse mechanism 2 0 2 6 Up Middle 07 1 5 Concentrated dilute 01 1 4 1 9 25 3 1 vacuum waste solution ON ON OFF SV14 29 9 0 Concentrated waste OFF ON solution SV13 9 0 Dilute waste solution OFF ON SV12 Cell blank SV10 1 2 2 2 Cell rinse SV11 ON OFF Trough rinse SV 9 OFF 5 16 Cycle 9 and 10 18 SEC 32 cell rotation 1 PCP check OFF M M TQ T 17 4 KC aspiration 17 4 14 0 14 0 1 12 cell rotation 2 30 cell rotation Internal standard aspiration ISE Priming Time Chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 Reaction table Sampling mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 Reagent dispensing mechanism R sy
219. ionized water and distilled water Water supply capacity 20 L hr Water pressure 50 340 0 5 3 5 kgf cm Conductivity lt 1 us cm or less germ free Main unit intake Connectable to nipple of 16 mm in diameter and 28 mm in length Control signal Water aspiration via 100 V AC contact signal Deionized water supply unit 100 V AC 902 main unit mE Connector Hirose RM15QPH 8 P Wiring piping Within 5 m long 12 5 12 2 Check for Quantity Check each component for quantity referring to the packing list contained in the shipping crate 12 3 Unpacking Cushion Lower part of reagent dispensing mechanism Lower part of sampling mechanism Lower part of stirring mechanism Fig 12 2 Analyzer Packed in Shipping Crate 1 Unpack the shipping crate and carefully take out the main unit 2 Remove tapes ropes and cushions from the main unit as shown in Fig 12 2 12 6 12 4 Setting of Instrument oet the 5 disk Set the disk Set a bottle 50 mL containing undiluted Hitergent solution to channel 40 of the disk oet the roll paper to the printer Set the FD drive 1 Parameter Disk drive 2 Data Disk Connect the signal cable leading from the deionized water supply unit Wiring and Piping Measure the voltage of the power equipment prepared by the customer Plug the power cable into the main unit and fasten the cable with the cable fixture Connect the power plug to the
220. ird and subsequent points excluding the first two points or at the fourth and subsequent points excluding the first three points cont d Remedy This alarm is issued whenever the input photometric range values and m for calculation of the absorbance change rate do not satisfy 2 m Caution In 2 point rate assay check is made using not the input photometric range values and m alone but all photometric points between and m Dilute the sample or reduce its volume and then perform measurement again Prepare the reagent again Check for leakage or clogging of the reagent pipettor Input correct values on parameter registration menu Linearity abnormal Number of photometric points in reaction limit level range gt 9 4 lt Number of photometric points in reaction limit level lt 8 LIN W LIN 8 F Photometry assay only In 1 point amp rate rate A or rate B assay the absorbance at each photometric point to be used for calculation of the absorbance change rate does not satisfy the following relational requirement 100 lt Linearity limit value Where AE Absorbance change rate determined from absorbance at each photometric point in reaction limit level range by least squares method AE Absorbance change rate in first half AE Absorbance change rate in second half Assuming that the number of photometric point
221. is not conducted in 2 5 4 4 11 3 12 2 cycle 8 ON OFF Dilution 13 1 Aspiration of rinse Upper dead point 9 7 Y Wash 12 5 solution at W2 10 1 111 position Water aspiration Et 101 111 11 7 7 3 75 9 1 9 3 Remainder discharge 8 11 4 Air aspiration 8 0 9 0 Discharge OFF 8 0 ON 9 1 11 0 14 4 OFF ON Y Upper dead point iid 13 1 13 5 16 8 Wash 11 7 12 8 13 8 16 5 OFF ON ON 11 5 12 5 137 16 3 OFF ON 13 2 16 8 Stop Stop at W2 position Upper dead point Upper dead point OFF OFF OFF This cycle is repeated OFF 5 times Stop at upper dead point 2 1 2 8 Up Z Middle 0 7 1 5 01 1 4 1 9 25 31 ON ON OFF 29 9 0 14 0 OFF ON 9 0 14 0 OFF ON OFF 1 2 2 2 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON Reaction table B Stor ILL 12 cell rotation 5 ce ISE Wash Time Chart 17 2 4 5 5 7 9 10 12 13 17 1B SEC 5 8 3 3 2 1 4 l PGP check Sampling mechanism wash Conducted only in S syringe cycle 17 5 1 to SO uL S syringe SV2 OFF Not conducted in cycle 17 S nozzle outside wash OFF SV8 Internal standard internal standard Reagent dispensing Upper dead point 7 1 7 4 Vat Wash 12 5 mechanism 80 Th Aspiration 356 Repeated 3 times H syringe R syringe SV3 R nozzle outside wash V6 Stirring mechanism Stirring rod rotation Stirring outsida wash 5 5 Reagent disk Sample disk ISE sipper mechanism ISE syringe ISE syringe SV16 Na K Cl SV17 KCISV1
222. ition ecc Required time Unlimited 1 Turn ON circuit board DIP SW and reference value Screen spec circuit board change data area will appear on Probe Adjust screen DIP SW spec 2 otart from Maintenance screen Screen spec PROBE ADJUST 1 S probe rotation adjustment 2 Adjustment of cup height for S probe descent R probe rotation adjustment Stirring rod rotation adjustment Adjustment of R probe descent to bottle position 3 Refer to next page 4 Check operation at probe adjustment If operation 1 Screen spec alarm code not normal alarm will appear on Alarm Monitor table screen 5 Save the above alarm in FD 14 13 2 Details of Probe Adjusting Process For the probe adjustment first reset the mechanisms then carry out the following procedures Adjustment of stopping position of S probe rotation a Details of operation Above cell START lt Rinse bath Conditions for stopping 1 When abnormal descent of probe is detected 2 When STOP key is pressed 3 When mechanism STOP level alarm occurs Rack sampler Sample disk outer row In case of 1 press STOP key then probe returns to rinse Sample disk bath and operation stops In case of 2 probe returns to rinse bath and operation stops b Extent of operation 1 Rotation angle Reference value no of pulses is subjected to of correction pu
223. lation any data alarm other than shown below is indicated for the isozyme P channel concentration Calculation disabled test to test compensation disabled overflow random error systematic error QC error expected value over 1 In process of calculation for test to test compensation the denominator becomes Zero N 2 The test to be used for test to test compensation is not measured to test compensation has the data alarm of calculation disabled or test to test compensation disabled the data alarm which leaves the data blank At standard concentration of absorbance of sample or absorbance change rate is over or the same compared with presumptive absorbance or absorbance change rate 3 Any test to be used for test 4 Any compensation test has cont d Remedy Dilute the sample and analyze it again Direct measurement is impossible Utilize standard addition method etc the probe and correct clogging Check the channel data used for test to test compensation The data is left blank Make sure masking is not specified for the test to be used for compensation Check the calculation formula on the parameter registration menu 3 screen 2 4 4 ISE Data Alarms Alarm on ISE data processing has 2 kinds shown below calibration alarm and data alarm 1 Calibration Alarm Alarm Output Priority Operation Remarks
224. llowing five combinations is selectable on the host setting screen ETX NOTE 1 ASCII code 03 CRP UE aestatem ASCII code 0D 0A 03 DE zio cO ASCII code 03 N ETX CR ers ottobre ASCII code 03 0D 0A v ETX CKSL NOTE 2 CR ASCII code 03 h 1 00 The text length from a to d is selectable on the communication parameter screen 256 or 512 bytes 16 2 NOTES 1 BCC Block Check Character The RS 232C communication program is provided with a function to add BCC to the send text and support BCC check of the receive text for detection of an improper message e Condition 1 start of text character is STX 02 16 and the end of text character is ETX 03 6 e Condition 2 text data consists of characters nontransparent mode At this time BCC accumulation is started from the character following STX and carried out until ETX appears gt lt 22 gt x O e e accumulation range Calculation Method Dn n th character in hexadecimal notation 1 byte BCC Block check character 1 byte 01 02 03 Dj Dn E TX Exclusive CKSH checksum high and CKSL checksum low The checksum is calculated by adding all characters between the frame character and the final ch
225. lready turned on 12 o The serum probe moves Same as above down abnormally in descending action only at turning of the serum probe in adjustment STOP In rotation of the serum Check the upper dead SIOP probe it is not set at the point detector Note 2 upper dead point M STOP In rotation of the serum Check the home probe from the reset detector position it does not come off the reset position SIOP In rotation of the serum Same as above probe to the reset position it cannot detect the reset position 101 to SAMPLE 1 S STOP The sample disk cannot Check the outer track 106 DISK SIOP detect the stop position on detector Note 2 outer track 2 S STOP The sample disk does not Same as above SIOP stop at the specified position Note 2 on outer track 3 S STOP The sample disk cannot Check the inner track SIOP detect the stop position on detector Note 2 inner track 4 S STOP The sample disk does Same as above SIOP stop at the specified position Note 2 on inner track NOTE 2 S STOP may be issued only during operation cont d Alarm Category Level Description Remedy to SAMPLE At resetting the sample disk Check the home 106 DISK cannot detect the home detector position M At resetting the sample disk Same as above does not stop at the specified point of home position 107 BU Mii At resetting the sample disk Check the home DISK does not leave the home detector
226. lses set on System Parameters screen and corrected pulse count shall be used 2 Descent amount Sample disk inner outer rows H 5 mm Hi is no of descent pulses given in 2 2 When rack sampler is provided Explanation of symbols in operation diagram s mechanism operating direction YY temporary stop gt O proceed to S STOP gt connecting position for repeat 14 14 Adjustment of cup height for S probe descent a Details of operation End Cell stop tart Acceleration rinse bath deceleration Ascent Descent at constant speed Descent 51 Conditions for stopping 1 When STOP key is pressed 2 When mechanism STOP level alarm occurs Stops when abnormal descent is detected In case of 1 probe returns to rinse bath and and recorded as S1 S2 S3 operation stops NOTE Does not advance when S STOP key pressed Probe descent position S1 sample disk outer row 1 position empty sample cup 52 sample disk outer row No 2 position empty sample cup set on 216 mm x 100 mm test tube 53 sample disk inner row W1 position empty sample cup valid only for pos 58 59 60 Above positions are predetermined Operator must set cups at 3 positions before the adjustment 0 Extent of operation 1 Rotation angle Reference value pulse count is subjected to no of correction pulses set on System Parameters screen and correcte
227. m 8 HOST monitor 5 I ENG ATE zu 2 m ITE MES E PE CARD L gii BCR PRINTER LET PRNT 11 2 REACTION DISK ROTATE S DISK ROTATE D DISK ROTATE 500 4311 Yellow l A2 hiis 2 BESTE 8 I 4 83 SEHE J P510 1 5 M md tese ed rs NOW 6 B7 J P520 J311 Black Green mE 1027 41 5 3 e w rmaan ee o n 24 lt eee e pm 241 103 w D rr ie D w r 124V 103 eee eee ee DRV BOARD 1 Bio De amp ow w QU c GPCONT 6 w rmrr nr s EMOT200 BOARD e 5 Cc ca GPCONT 1 lt fie s e GPCONT 2 3 i gt T lt iO n EMOT200 BOARD 5019 LL v j p530 1311 041 103 1303 o C H9 16 110 1630 d 1 3 17 B31 5 15 RINSE Ce f ais p UP DOWN m X EE iE 6 14 re B28 16 4 43 10 2 1 2 Eae ib GP
228. mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 Reagent dispensing mechanism R syringe R syringe SV3 R nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism Stirring rod rotation Stirring rod outside wash SV5 Reagent disk Sample disk ISE sipper mechanism ISE syringe ISE syringe SV16 SV 17 KCISV18 Pinch valve SV19 Cell rinse mechanism Concentrated dilute vacuum waste solution SV14 Concentrated waste solution SV13 Dilute waste solution SV12 Cell blank SV10 Cell rinse SV 11 Trough rise SV9 Incubation bath water supply SV4 incubation bath heater Light source lamp Incubation bath circulating pump MD2 Incubation bath water drain SV15 Feed pump MD1 Vacuum pump 1 ISE Wash Time Chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SEC 3 2 5 1 8 1 9 1 13 3 Stop Stop Stop 32 cell rotation 12 cell rotation 5 cell rotation 13 5 14 0 17 3 18 0 11 6 J check uis 147 166 Air discharge Aspiration 10 9 14 2 B Air aspiration 120 1997 147 159 Man ed Air aspiration 11 3 12 2 OFF Upper dead point OFF OFF Upper dead point OFF OFF Stop 11 2 12 9 13 3 Stop Rotation 1 pitch feed Upper dead point Upper dead point EU ET RE OFF s edi eS OFF OFF 29 Stop at upper dead point 21 2 6 Up Middle 0 7 1 5 0 1 14 1 9 25 44
229. mechanism control information Cell stirring mechanism control information Heagent disk mechanism control information Heagent pipetting mechanism control information ISE measurement mechanism control information 7 4 3 Standby Status Each status Feed pump OFF Vacuum pump OFF Wait for startup of each processing 1 Ifthe water level in the incubator drops the feed pump and 5 4 are turned on for 1 second 2 The incubator pump and light source lamp remain turned 3 Incubator temperature control is made Standby Displayed alarm clear uM Parameter check OK Parameter Check Instrument monitor Instrument monitor WARNING display Heset For details of parameter check refer to the specifications of data processing functions 7 4 4 Operation reaction disk Photometer pipetting stirring R7 38 32 37 a5 34 33 Sample pipetting ISE sipper The reaction disk accommodates forty eight reaction cells The reaction disk rotates by one revolution one cell 49 cells in one cycle 18 sec The rotation stop timing in one cycle is as follows 0 5 19 15 18 Stop 1st Stop 2nd Stop 3rd 32 cell rotation 12 cell rotation 5 cell rotation Operation photometry assay e Relationship between 48 Cells Measured 1 Cycle Photometric Sequence and 10 minute Reaction Measurement Sequence R Disk Rotation 12 cell R
230. memory initialization Upon completion of initialization the next screen appears approx 30 seconds required for initialization 9 Display of Installation Start Load FD into drive 2 and press Start key Start Load the installation FD no 2 into FD drive 2 right FDD and press Start key The next screen is displayed 10 Installation Display Screen indicates that product program is under installation Installation is under execution FD EEPROM FILE NAME xxxxxxxx The name of file being installed xxxxxxxx xxx 15 displayed Upon completion of installing all files in the installation FD no 2 the following screen is displayed again 11 Display of Installation Start Load FD into drive 2 and press Start key Start Pull out installation FD no 2 from drive 2 right FDD load the installation FD no 3 into drive 2 right FDD and press Start key 12 15 12 Installation Display Screen indicates that time chart data and program is under installation Installation is under execution FD gt EEPROM FILE NAME XXXXXXXX XXX The name of file being installed xxx is displayed Upon completion of installing all files in the installation FD no 3 the following screen is displayed 13 Installation End Display Screen Installation has been completed normally Pull out FD from drive 1 2 Turn on power again and check operation XXXX
231. ment is made for each test in decreasing order of analysis time This means that the test assigned alter all the others is not necessarily output last Accordingly the last output test is searched and the expected end time is calculated from the analysis start time and analysis time for the test Expected analysis end time min Initialization time start time Note 1 analysis time Note 2 wash time required after completion of analysis NOTES 1 Starttime 18 0 sec x number of samples up to last output test 35 samples max 1 2 Analysis time Reaction time for last output test any of 10 min 5 min 4 min and 3 min 3 When carryover evasion is specified Example When n 2 th analysis is last output test 11 ti n 3 th n 2 th nth 18 0 5 0 0 Analysis end time Start time 18 0 sec x n 2 1 Analysis time Analysis time for n 2 th test Difference from Actual Analysis Time The expected analysis end time differs from the actual one in the following cases a o cho Qo N When unusable cell was on reaction disk excluding execution of cell wash Case in which an unusable cell was fround on reaction disk through cell blank check before analysis Presence absence of test for which carry over evasion is specified The processing time changes when wash for carry over evasion is carried out For details refer to the description of carry over evasion
232. meter Check 2 30 2 3 3 Details of Twin Test Simultaneous Analysis 2 34 Data asqa dos ea 2 95 2 4 1 Data Alarm Registratin FloW 2 35 242 Dalla uev a uU MEL 2 36 COGO ge ee MALUS ADM 2 37 244 ISE Data uoo pco indica onte 2 49 245 Alani Check Metod Pei eot a 2 52 2 4 6 Check and Set Alarm of Each Data 2 60 2 4 7 Details of Data and Alarm Outputs Resulting from Calibration 2 61 2 4 8 Output Check List for Each Photometry Assay CALIB METHOD 2 62 nis OCS mp RES 2 64 Pes ae e er ET 2 65 Daly Alarm TaGC eosam bt mua CI GM M CR C CR C UV 2 67 2 6 1 Cumulative Alarm 2 69 Zoe darameterGoge bleus e Osten Oe aa s tus 2 72 2632 GOMMUNICATION 2 74 2 6 4 Cumulative Instrument Operation List 2 78 2 6 5 FD File Management saves dedita b T ier nuit AR RR A TR AS 2 9 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 1 Alarm Code Table Categ
233. mmunication cycle or loner because HOST is not ready to receive any analytical data 16 4 Data Transmission Control Procedure 16 4 4 Establishment of Data Link 1 Upon input of YES for host communication on the start condition screen the analyzer side transfers ANY frame to the host This marks the start of communication 2 Once a text has been sent the direction of transmission is reversed and the receiver send the next response or text In subsequent steps the analyzer and host continue transmission alternately mE T Text contents of message Communication cycle E Transfer sequence Conversation Cluster 16 4 2 Response to Information 1 Upon receiving information the receiver sends a response or text see Table 16 4 to inform the sender of the receiver status and the validity of received information 2 Used for response is a text in which a character identifying its purpose frame character is put between STX and ETX When the 256 byte mode is selected for the transferred byte count the analytical data text may exceed 256 bytes including STX and end of data code depending on sample In this case the text is analyzed the analyzed text is put between STX and ETX and a frame character to identify the number of transmissions is added in the text 3 After sending a text sending should be avoided until reception of a response or request to for the text in a normal condition If sending is a
234. mo DRs __ 13 RXD 14 Unused 14 15 Unused 15 4 Connection Diagram RSDIST board J405 vr J402 RTS 150 Q sv Host side Current loop for RS 232C data monitor output SG 5 232 data monitor output JJ gt 22 3 Mi JJ gt 100 board Host side for current loop Fig 1 16 Connection Diagram 16 46 16 9 3 Interface Signal Table 16 27 lists the meanings of interface signals and Tables 16 28 and 16 29 list signal levels and their meanings Table 16 27 Meaning of Interface Signal 902 side Host side FG TXD RXD RTS CTS SG Table 16 28 RS 232C Interface Signal Level and Meaning Dd Positive NOTE 1 Negative NOTE 1 Signal Name TXD SPACE e MARK no signal RXD Start bit e Stop bit Data 0 NOTE 2 Data 1 NOTE 2 RTS e ON OFF DTS Data 1 e Data 0 CTS ON OFF e Data 1 e Data 0 e Data communication allowed Data communication prohibited NOTES 1 Output 12 V input 3 V to 15 V Negative Output 12 V input 3 V to 15 V 2 Data 0 and data 1 correspond to decimal numbers for the CPU to read write data or status respectively 16 47 Table 16 29 20 mA Current Loop Interface Signal Level and Meaning Signal Name Signal Current ON 20 mA Current OFF 0 mA TXD MARK SPACE RXD otop bit e S
235. mple D opace opace 2 1035 ID registered oame as above sample test selection inquiry is made while reading barcode position Nos on screen 221 for stat sample position _ gt When barcode reading is gP reader successful inquiry is made via the read ID When unsuccessful inquiry is made via the ID specified on screen Sample No Routine Inquiry is made for the specified Sample N 1 to 400 opace ID registered Same as above mode sample number of samples sequentially unregistered screen starting from the sample Li handled as specified in the analysis start comment No on start condition screen otat Inquiry is not made sample Supplementary Explanation 1 If no response is available from the host within 2 cycles 36 sec after inquiry to the host analysis is carried out according to the TS of main frame If the main frame has no TS request the relevant sample will not be analyzed 16 28 Operation Mode Simple analysis mode Houtine analysis mode Instrument Mode Sample No mode Sample Name Routine sample Stat sample Routine sample Stat sample Routine sample Table 16 13 Detailed Information about SPE Specification of test slection from host to anal Basic Condition for TS Specification RUN highlighted is specified for host communication on start condition screen CANCEL is specified for the transfer of analytical d
236. multi test analyzer not for all tests but for the tests selected through external instruction A system in which two instruments for data sending receiving or processing are connected via the communication line any other instrument is not connected between them and there is no instrument for control of data transmission for the whole system Sending to one of the instruments which communicate with each other whether the other is ready for reception or not and whether the received data is normal or not and a character to be transmitted for that purpose To escape from a deadlock which is caused by abnormality in the sender receiver or line Identifies the purpose of text and functions like a command No A general term for the physical transmission path from the sender to receiver via data transmission line and the logically set data transfer path An area for the contents of a message excluding the control code frame character and end of data code in a text An optional sample requested to the analyzer from the host A text which makes a request to the other side for a text having a data field Example SPE FR4 FR2 END RES 16 55 15 Non specific request test 16 ID mode 17 Sample No Mode A text which makes a request to the other side for a text having no data field Example ANY MOR REP SUS HEC RUN highlighted is specified for barcode reader test on the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen and CANCEL
237. muni ator a Sus eR e Di weenie 16 50 1697 Data Alarm 16 51 16 0 16 10 Cautions on Connection with External System 16 53 16 11 Operation Fow na au susu u uu u w aus 16 54 TOAZ 90 asus ani etn trafen nti aat sue dot ato 16 55 6 12 TREE 16 55 16 12 2 Differences in Communication Specification between Conventional Analyzers and Model 902 16 57 16 12 3 Processing Flow Diagramm of System 16 59 16 124 JASOGIEGOUSG T3bDl6S iocos toi EE ERREUR Se tpa et 16 60 16 0 16 SYSTEM INTERFACE 16 1 Overview Provided here are the signal form and protocol communication rules in case of connection between the Model 902 and an external system hereafter referred to as a host via asynchronous serial signal 1 Specifications of Communication The following table lists the specifications of RS 232C communication Table 16 1 Specifications of Communication Default Value Interface RS 232C or 20 mA current loop 2 Communication Half duplex method 3 7 or 8 bits Communication 7 bits 4 parameter screen 2 bits 5 6 7 No Baud rate bit sec 4800 9600 Even parity 9600 Max volume of 2
238. n 713 0282 6 72 e 18 pcs contained D C bath discharge filter 27 Light source lamp 20 W 705 0840 1 2 8 Printer paper 16F 6042 O A 29 Stirring rod 713 1264 _10 Seal piece for sample pipetter _ 714 0853 1 4 714 1360 714 1282 714 1361 11 Seal piece for reagent pipetter 714 2 8 O e 714 1362 714 1291 714 1363 12 O ring for pipetter 704 0409 _ _13 Water supply filter 305 2626 O _14 Radiator filter 713 1316 15 HITERGENT 986 8010 A _16 HIALKALI D 987 0126 A 1 17 Diaphragm mimo _ x x j Jj j 18 Floppy disk MF2 250HD R629134 _19 Light source lamp 30 W 20 Taper syringe 3825045 For reagent pipetter 21 Nozzei forining 707 0204 PS 22 Nozzle 2 for blank water 707 025 h O Jj R ll HH 23 Nozzle 3 for aspiration 707 0206 Jo HH 24 Nozzle 4 with tip for aspiration 713 0290
239. n YES is specified measurement for original absorbance result data in parameter Measurement result data communication entire reaction process original absorbance data Executable X Inexecutable 16 4 Supplementary Explanation a The above real time communication indicates a communication carried out while the instrument is engaged in analysis and the batch communication indicates a communication when specified through the screen Note however that test selecting information inquiry is not specifiable through the screen but specifiable only from the host To stop communication between the analyzer and host change RUN highlighted to CANCEL for host communication on the start condition screen In this case however remember that the entire communication processing will be suspended otat sample test selecting information is specifiable from the host in response to inquiry from the analyzer during real time communication However an independent specification from the host is invalid 16 5 9 9 2 902 system interface Functional Relationship with Model 902 System Interface Test selecting information Test selecting information inquiry communication inquiry communication for routine and stat samples Analytical data transfer Analytical data transfer for routine stat and control samples Calibration data transfer Transfer of entire reaction process data 22
240. n the cord properly Replace the electrode Remove the probe and correct clogging Set properly Confirm the proper combination of tube and reagent Make sure that the standard solution and reagent are set properly Make sure that the standard solution is free from concentration or deterioration Make sure that the electrodes Na K Cl are within their guaranteed life Data Printer S V Internal standard concentration abnormal Calculation test error STD CALC i disabled Expected value Over H ISE The internal standard concentration C IS is within the following range Na K 160 0 lt C IS C IS lt 3 0mEq L or 7 0mEg L lt C IS C IS lt 80 0mEq L or 120 0 lt C IS Any data alarm other than shown below is indicated for the test to be used for calculation Calculation disabled test to test compensation disabled expected value over Concentration value or activity value cannot be output within the specified range of digit count The test result is outside the expected value range outside mean value 2SD in case of a In process of calculation the denominator becomes zero An overflow occurs in logarithmic or exponential calculation In isozyme Q channel concentration calculation the data alarm of calculation disabled is indicated for the isozyme P channel d
241. nd minimum potential values at three out of five measurement points in each test is within the following range on internal standard and sample Na 0 7 2 4 K 2 4 Cl 0 8 mV FIV 2 4 This alarm is issued when a difference between maximum and minimum potential values at three out of five measurement points in each test is within the following range on internal standard 90 0mV lt 10 90 0 lt lt 10 OK 100 0 mV lt EAV lt 180 0 mV The sample concentration C S is within the following range Na C S 10 mEq L or C S gt 250 mEq L K C S 1 mEq L or C S gt 100 mEq L Cl C S 10 mEg L or C S gt 250 mEq L Due to zero division log X etc 2 4 6 Check and Set Alarm of Each Data 1 Calibration Potential of internal Noise error Level error standard solution I Cl Low potential of Na ADC Sample Noise standard solution abnormal short error Cl High potential of Na standard solution K Cl Calibrator potential Na K Cl Slope value for Na Preparation display abnormal abnormal Cl Concentration of Na Internal Calculation internal standard standard disabled solution concentra tion abnormal Calibrator Calibration Calculation concentration abnormal disabled Correction factor Calculatio n disabled 2 Routine Sample Measurement 1
242. ndard solutions are used 3 to 6 kinds of standard solutions are used 3 to 6 kinds of standard solutions are used 1 C1 S1ABS 1 exp b InCx CX 51485 Cx Ox C1 a l A a l b Cx STD 1 c l c l Cx STD 1 d l Neither printed nor a l Cx STD 1 indicated 1 point assay 2 point rate assay 2 point end assay Rate A assay 1 point assay 2 point rate assay 2 point end assay Rate A assay 1 point assay 2 point rate assay 2 point end assay Rate A assay cont d Type Calibration Curve Standard Solution Compatible Assay Parameter Calculation Kn A STD n 1 point assay Non linear Absorbance 3 to 6 kinds of method standard solutions 2 point rate assay POLYGONAL are used 2 point end assay Rate A assay C1C2 Cx C6 3 5 5 5 9 2 1 Description of Model 902 Polygonal Line Calibration Formula of calibration curve 1 Cx K X B C1 When CALIB POINT 1 a H B Reagent Blank Updating of STABS S1ABS X1 1 X1 2 2 unit 10 Abs When CALIB POINT 6 a b H B Reagent Blank oame as in 1 point polygonal line calibration Full Updating of S1ABS Same as Updating of K factor unit 10 Abs 2 104 x2 X1 K2 GIU
243. ng cycle The sample probe is washed in one cycle time Washing of the sample probe will not degrade throughput V Registration of carry over evasion specified pattern Up to 8 kinds of patterns for which the evasion of carry over due to the sample probe is specified can be registered VI Specification from screen From the screen the following need be specified a test for which washing of the sample probe is specified for carry over evasion and the detergent set position on the sample disk An example of specification is shown below AFP Wi Carry Detergent set position over W1 W2 W3 giving test CH1 to 36 Examples of evading procedure An example of carry over evading procedure is shown below A to C represent tests and W stands for washing Carry over Evasion specified Test Example of Evading Procedure TM B W A B C W A W A B dL lu oamplei Samplei 1 1 2 Sample 1 3 2 Priority of Carry over Washing On concurrence of multiple carry over washing timings priority is given on the principle below a Cell washing probe washing When the cell used for reagent probe washing requires washing priority is given to cell washing On this occasion probe washing is carried out after cell washing However when use of the detergent at the same reagent position is specified for both reagent probe washing and cell washing the reagent probe washing step can be subs
244. nism Check b Make sure that no water drops adhere to the top surface of the cell at the time of cell and nozzle wash with the rinse mechanism 12 10 12 10 Operation for Completion and Others 1 Turn off the power switch and remove the right cover and circuit board stopper from the inside of the front door of the main unit Pull out the EMOT200 board and turn off DIP SW 1 no 6 Return the board to its original condition and turn on the power switch Output and analyze accumulated alarm information in Alarm Log Print Delete alarm information Delete the contents of request on the Calibration Registration screen Delete all data for routine samples on the Monitor screen Make final check of the instrument attachment of covers tightening of screws etc Turn off the power switch of the instrument and the deionized water supply unit Also turn off the tap water Write the date of takeover on the date label and attach it to the 902 main unit side for example 12 11 12 11 12 11 Three floppy disks hereafter referred to as FD are available Install Program 1 Configuration Detailed below is the file configuration of each FD 1 Explanation of File name and contents of file e Installation FD no 1 VOL None rn ECPU230L Y SCRENXXX L SCRENXXX VO SCRENXXX SCRENXXX VXWORKS e Installation FD no 2 VOL None L VXWORKX1
245. nk value cell blank at main wavelength 1104 blank Calculation of Raw absorbance of compensation cell blank value cell blank at sub wavelength 1 to 4 Raw abosrbance at sub wavelength after cell blank compensation 1 to 35 max 1 to 35 max Raw absorbance at main wavelength after cell blank compensation lt Supplementary explanation gt The cell blank calculation method Note and compensated points vary with analytical method For details refer to the classification of analytical methods NOTE an alarm is indicated for any of cell blanks 1 to 4 the following table will be used Number of Data Alarm Alarms cell Slank value cell blank abnormal 1 Mean value of 2 data without alarm Not indicated 2 Indicated C C C C 4 3 Indicated C 4 9 12 9 4 Electrolyte Concentration Calculation An example of Na calculation with use of the printout example on the previous page is described here Calculation of SL slope value Bie log C _ 32 0 89 6 log 158 120 60 8 SL Slope value Electromotive force of HIGH solution 32 0 E Electromotive force of LOW solution 39 6 Cu Concentration of HIGH solution 160 0 C Concentration of LOW solution 120 0 Concentration calculation of internal standard solution Els EL Cis CLx10 35 4 39 6 1200x10 65 140 7 Cis Concentration of internal standard
246. not been washed blank water is discharged or rinse tip wash water is discharged All cells are empty all cells have been NOTE Operation for cells located washed no blank water is discharged under RINSE 1 to 7 and nor rinse tip wash water is discharged 3 Discharge of Cell Blank Water Cell blank water is discharged in the operation status and sampling stop status Note however that discharge and measurement are not made in two cycles after start from the standby status 4 Rinse Tip Wash The rinse tip R7 is washed over cycle 3 to 9 immediately after start of operation while cell no 1 shifts from R3 to R6 ve Z R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 Rz D B B SVO US SVi1 1 SVi1 f SV11 1 1 n 1 t i 1 1 E C A A Cell no NOTE 1 48 47 45 44 X 43 42 41 an Nozzle tip 1 Cell blank measurement 8 For discharge of purified water For aspiration of rinse water For discharge of purified water For aspiration of reacting solution For discharge of purified water for cell blank measurement For aspiration of purified water for cell blank measurement For discharge of purified water cycle x to x immediately after start of analysis O O gt NOTE Cellno indicates the number when the reaction disk is located at reset position 39 Nozzle tip 2 Sample pipetting position c 220 7 5 Maintenance Functions 7 5 1 Reset Details of Reset Incubator water circulating
247. nse washing of cell Rinse Mechanism wash with rinse Stirrer 1 to 2 cycles 3 to 17 cycles S R probes Cell only 6 probe S R syringes ISE Wash Quick Cell feed 5 cell S R disks 3 ashing of cell R t to 17 Water supply ISE Wash 18 cycles pump ON 3 to 17 cycles Stirrer ISE Wash 3 to 17 cycles ISE Wash Rinse mecha Wash Washing of cell Operation by this function is carried in 18 sec cycle For D to referto the ISE maintenance time chart Vacuum Pump ON 5 t D 5 t 77 h y o 5 a Washing of pipetter discharge into ceils 15 to 38 cycles stirrer Washing of stirring rod Stirring into cell 3 5 gt Evasion Function 1 Outline The carry over evasion function is provided to prevent occurrence of inaccurate data due to sample carry over in photometry assay and ISE tests This function works on routine samples alone and does not work on calibrator and control samples Carry over is evaded by changing the measuring sequence among the reagents or samples which may cause carry over or by execution of washing The kinds of evasion washing are listed below a Evasion of reagent carry over due to reagent probe and washing for evasion b Evasion of carry over between reagents due to cell and washing for evasion c Evasion of sample carry over due to sample probe and washing for evasion
248. o Remove Main Unit Top Cover 14 8 14 2 5 Sample u uu u u osa REO 14 8 T424 Reagent S 14 9 142 5 SUN v Ro 14 9 1426 e DISK ur MEE 14 9 14 2 7 Reagent Disk cooling unitlt 14 10 14 2 9 INCACHON O WR 14 10 14 2 9 Rinse 14 11 14 2 10 T DD itio odo rag eg 14 11 14 2 2 DO 14 11 T4242 Prope AG USUN CI u uu uu u nuyu S nutu Ru Maio qa 14 12 14 0 14 ADJUSTMENT SPECIFICATIONS 14 1 Electrical Adjustments 14 1 1 DC Power Supply Adjustment and Checks Carry out adjustment and checks of the power voltages shown in Table 14 1 Table 14 1 Analyzer DC Power Supply Adjustment Check Specifications Voltage V Adjusting Trimmer 14 1 14 1 2 LOG AMP Board Adjustment Adjust the LOG AMP board at the rear of instrument in the procedure below The standard lamp should be used for this Adjusting procedure gt 1 After turning on the instrument wait for at least 30 minu
249. od of time is exceeded the analyzer does not accept the test selection request Unless the barcode reader is provided the same position No as on the analyzer side is set and transferred opecification of test selection made from the host is ignored if the analyzer is set in the original Abs mode In test selection priority is given to the analyzer side Sample No position No and ID No sent from the host may become invalid depending on the mode of analyzer O Host s specification followed x Invalid With or o uon Routine With ID mode sample Without sample No mode otat With ID mode sample the same No as the inquiry No from analyzer Without sample Tod is not made in this No mode mode 16 27 Table 16 12 Detailed Information about SPE Text for test selecting information inquiry from analyzer to host TS Test selecting information Sample Information Inquiry Condition 2 Characters Operation Instrument Sample RUN highlighted is specified for host 5 Characters 1 Character 3 Characters 13 Characters Characters 15 Characters Characters Mode Mode communication on start condition screen NO is specified for the transfer of analytical data alone on Function sample No Unassigned Position No Unassigned Remarks the communication parameter screen and NO is Character specified for original Abs oimple ID mode Rout
250. ode is made in space for 102 109 40 10 routine sample lt From host to analyzer gt sample No is ignored for TS specification in Sequence No b1 to 30 the ID mode Control No bb1 to bb5 Unassigned Space Space 1 character Position No Transfer sequence Space lt From analyzer to host gt 3 characters p Blank space for control sample 10 10 lt From host to analyzer gt 1 For space the analyzer side is followed 2 Position is ignored for TS indication in the ID mode Position No bb1 to 635 Position No bb2 to b35 ID No lt ID mode and sample No mode opace 1 When ID No is within 13 digits it is right 13 characters justified and preceded by one or more Transfer sequence Space 2 In the NO ID mode the analyzer treats ID 1012 10 No a comment 3 In transferring the analytical data of control T sample in the ID mode the ID No of this sample is sent in space from the analyzer to host 16 39 3 Test Selecting Information from host to analyzer Send test selecting information corresponding to sample information Transfer sequence CO 12 3 4 5 36 37 ISE channel Photometry assay channel Channel count Details of Request for Each Channel b Space cc Function Character Details of Request Initial measurement Ab No request b 1 Normal sample
251. ogging Function Incubator water is exchanged twice and Hitergent is injected Required time 210 sec Details of Processing Reference Document 1 Start from MAINTENANCE screen ocreen specifications 2 Refer to the following page At water exchange operation check is conducted and alarm Screen specifications is displayed if operation is abnormal Alarm code table The alarm is stored in FD FD specifications Hemarks 1 Incubator water drain Drain with solenoid valve 2 Addition of Hitergent After execution of water exchange undiluted Hitergent is injected with the reagent probe into the incubator 550 uL time x 15 8 25 ev Z Details of Incubator Water Exchange dm meres eee Reaction when SV15 ON gt OFF SV12 ON OFF rotated 1 round R disk rotated to supply supply 700 Hitergent sea SV4 ON 5 Hitergent Hitergent ES aspiration from discharge into POS40 on incubator reagent disk Stirrer H probe H syringe R disk reset R probe rotated to rinsing bath Feed pump MP1 ON Vacuum pump VP1 OFF o UO o e D o 2 Incubator water Incubator water circulating pump circulating pump MP2 OFF MP2 ON Incubator Incubator temperature temperature control stop control start Light source Light sour
252. ommunicatio Change CANCEL to RUN highlighted for host communication parameter on start condition screen Change of baud ate required Change baud rate value Change of parity required N Change parity hange of data bl required Change data composition Change of stop bit required N Change stop bit Change of end code required Change end code Change of text Y size required Change text size Change CANCEL to YES for host communication parameter on start condition screen Press start key or execute host communication through screen Host alarm occur Y Check cause of alarm and take corrective measure gt End of operation 16 12 Supplementation 16 12 1 Glossary 1 2 13 14 Conversation Cluster Text Framing of text Length of text Test selection Point to point system Hesponse Frame character Data link Data field opecific sample opecific request text An exchange of texts between the analyzer and host computer A group of conversations between the analyzer and host computer A message transferred between the analyzer and host computer To provide a start character and end character at the beginning and end of a text for receiving it without fail and facilitating its check The total number of characters constituting a text Analysis by
253. on subsequent channel registration is stopped a Channel registration is stopped for TS not yet channel registered waiting for channel registration for the same sample b Channel registration is not changed when already channel registered for the same sample c Sampling is made as scheduled when CH registration is made for other sample d The alarm sample short is added to the sample for which insufficient sample alarm 15 issued Control Sample Calibration Sample Channel registration is not stopped even when insufficient sample alarm is issued for three tests in succession a The alarm sample short is added to the sample for which insufficient sample alarm 15 issued Calculation of Measurement End Time batch processing Outline The expected analysis end time at scheduling timing is calculated and displayed on the screen upon input of the START key from the standby status Basis for Calculation The analysis end time is calculated on the basis of a and b given below Calculation conditions The end time is calculated by taking the samples requested at input of the START key as samples to be measured Note that the expected time is calculated only in sample ID mode and neither displayed not calculated in host communication mode and when there is no TS request MODE End Time Display With ID x 9 Sample x O b Calculation equation In channel registration to the cell assign
254. onform with EIA RS 232C Connection signals Signal direction is as seen from the host side Connector Signal Direction Signal Name Symbol Protective ground or ground FGiNde 5 RD m 5 GS CTS Signal ground NOTES 1 FG is not connected inside NT 2 The pin without entry is not used 5 15 18 16 SYSTEM INTERFACE TOT Um 16 1 16 2 COImtmmunmecaleons FUDeLOFPIS uuu TIRES _______ 16 4 RET 16 7 16 4 Data Transmission Control Procedure 16 9 16 4 1 Establishment ot Data LINK uu un u ama a 16 9 16 4 2 Response to Information 16 9 16 4 3 Response to Information 16 10 16 4 4 Termination and Restart of Communication 16 16 IEAS 16 17 16446 hot 16 17 16 4 7 Of COMMUNICATION RM USC QUEUE 16 18 16 5 tatus odas daas taa a d aae tUe oue ONE d eek 16 19 16 5 1 otatus Transition Matrix only in mon transfer of analytical data alone 16 19 16 5 2 Status Transition Matrix in
255. or necessary STD POS Note that isozyme STD 3 and 4 are excluded 15 not regarded as ascending order 7 When 99 is entered for POS of STD 1 CONC must be 0 The following are checked VOLUME 1 to 37 When reagent for measurable photometry CH No volume 0 the tests relevant reagent is 1 The total liquid volume not used up to the final photometric point must be 500 uL or less 2 At least one of R1 to R3 volumes must not be 0 3 The reagent volume having a timing behind the reaction time is not 0 4 The minimum liquid volume must be at least 250 uL cont d Display Designation T 8 of Check 5 Test to test compensa tion check 6 Serum index analytical method check 7 carry 5 compensated test is measurable 1 The compensation test For formula No where CMP TEST 44 to 51 This check is not FORMULA performed in case NO of ORIGINAL ABS must be measurable In addition when the compensation test is already registered as a compensated test in any preceding formula No the check result for the formula No must be OK The compensated test must be on the right side of the formula When the compensated test is a photometry test no ISE test must be registered for the compensation test The assay code for tests S INDEXES 1 to 37 for serum index CH No measurement must be R
256. or SPE transfer HPR transfer wait Ready for SPE transfer HPR LPR transfer wait Alarm registration Alarm display registration communication Communication parameter RUN highlighted CANCEL To No 1 NOTE Ignore the blank boxes in this table stopped Alarm registration Alarm display registration To previous status communication continued 16 22 9l 16 5 3 Status Transition Diagram analytical data d Alarm registration No request Initial status 4 No data to HPR be transferred analytical data send rom analyzer to host wait i Ready to HPR analytical send analytical data send analytical data send wait data HPR analytical data send LPR analytical data send wait LPR analytical data send Example of description Status No Text to be sent Text to be Path of status transition when normal from host sent to host lt Path of status transition when abnormal time out hardware error Higher priority frame REC frame analytical data transfer Communication processing PS specified through screen u status in analyzer LPR Lower priority frame analytical data transfer in real time mode Event Change from CANCEL to RUN highlighted for host communication parameter on start condition screen Output of analytical data in real
257. orbance data END Variable Analyzer inentire reaction momo pawe lex lr sample information Analytical data 1 analytical data 4 BLANK BLANKA Point count ABS1 535 16 6 1 Composition of Each Text 1 2 Text for Non Specific Request text having no data area a b RES Composition of text ETX FR Frame character Table 16 10 shows the frame name and frame character according to the sending direction Table 16 10 Frame Character From Analyzer to Host From Host to Analyzer ANY VOR 7 1 o ss e o gt REC Sent Text of analytical data request for specific sample from host to analyzer Composition of text Sample information ETX Fu Function character Table 16 11 shows the contents of the text Note that alarm is issued on the analyzer side if any other than routine and stat sample information control sample or calibration information is sent from the host to analyzer Ignored in the table means that the analyzer ignores relevant sample information even if it is specified by the host Table 16 11 Function Character Sample Information From Host to Analyzer For from analyzer to host refer to 5 below e ithout nalyz OST YZ Sample No Position Routine With Ignored ID No set sample blank unallowable Routine Without Ignor
258. ory AlamName Category Alarm Name srRRER 38 2 39 5 SPROB o 4 po C s sok 4 gt ________ 4 ip 1 ir sson 48 ADC2 g 4 ADCS i 59 EARCODE i ii 2 S SYHNGE 52 16 REAG PROBE 55 7 5 2 5 ig 2 5 REAGSHORT 2 5 2 R SYRINGE s REAG LEVEL _ C 1 ISESPPER O o 2 gt 2 sese 63 27 6 2 tempecon 6 2 6 3 6 TSOVER DIST WATER 68 PATNTOVER DIST SENS 69 SAMP END T 34 RESERVOR 7 DCPOWER 3 Z POWER FAIL 3 sen O 74 cont d Category Alarm Name Category Alarm Name 19 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 na AGIERROR MOTORTOUT m 1 DE r FDWRTE mo FDREAD I JNO FD STANDARD ooa 13 FD PROTECT CAUB SD 14 SENS 1 PRINTER SYSTEM VF 827 om HSELEVEL 129 ISENOISE 130 WATER EXG IISEPREP
259. os 3 to 15 paper is fed by 3 lines Paper is also fed when printout is stopped by stop key input Page Length Page length is not determined Printing Performance 4 lines sec 80 characters sec 2 54 cm 6 lines paper feed in pitches of 4 23 mm line 1 6 inch Printing System Numerals are right justified with space at leading positions unless there is a comment Printout with No Blank Space e Channel number is not registered keyed in information e Measured data is unavailable For Leaving Blank Space Overflow has occurred at the location where measured data is to be printed 2 6 Daily Alarm Trace 1 Outline The alarm and retry data from power on to present time point are printed when daily in alarm trace data is specified on the mechanism check menu screen Details of Printout a Title The title Daily Alarm Trace date and time are printed The printing order of year month and day depends on the date printout order specification Time 24 hour base Time when alarm and retry data has been saved onto FD Instrument status Numerical value representing the instrument status For details refer to Table 2 2 Occurrence count Indicates how many times the same alarm retry data as that in a single cycle has occurred successively in the number of cycles within 1 to 999 Identification character A is printed out for alarm data and R for retry data Printout is not made when there i
260. otation 5 cell Rotation 123456789 10 11 12 Measurement sequence POS before measurement POS after measurement Photometric point 1 2 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 E24 E22 E20 E18 E16 E14 E23 E21 E19 E17 E15 E13 Explanation of Photometric Point CB1 to CB4 E1 to E35 R1 to R10 Passing cell blank Routine Invalid data 13 14 15 16 17 2 28 29 30 31 26 27 28 29 30 E12 E10 E8 E11 E9 18 19 20 30 31 32 42 43 44 32 33 34 44 45 46 11 12 13 31 32 33 43 44 45 10 11 12 21 33 45 35 47 14 34 46 13 32 cell Rotation 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 46 47 48 49 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 48123456789 10 15 35 36 3 38 39 40 41 42 47 48 123456789 14 EG E4 E2 R10 R8 CB1 R6 R4 R2 E35 E53 E31 E29 E27 E25 7 5 E1 R9 CB2 R7 R5 R3 H1 E34 E32 E30 E28 E26 Wavelength set by analytical parameter Abnormality in measurement causes occurrence of PHOTOMETER LAMP or other alarm For details of alarm refer to the alarm specifications sample disk Sampling position pack S barcode Crosslink 5 points sample disk stop position at reset Outer TACK uu u ut n 35 positions For routine and stat samples Inner track 25 positions For control serum standard solution detergent W1 W2 W3 1 position free except deterg
261. otometric point lags behind the specified reaction time Operation is impossible 4661 to CALIBRA 1 to 36 WARNING 1 The relationship Check parameter 4698 TION ch between assay code and and input it again PARAME calibration type is TER CALIB improper 2 Necessary calibration points for calibration type are not input 3 Necessary standard positions for calibration are not input The relationship between calibration type and calibration method 15 improper The standard concentration values are not set in ascending order Except for STD 3 and 4 for isozyme Concentration value is not zero when 99 is entered for POS of STD 1 The photometry assay data in other than manual mode is checked Operation is unallowable Check in 4 is made with regard to specifications of time out calibration lot to lot calibration bottle to bottle calibration and test selecting information 2 17 Alarm 4811 to 4848 VOLUME 1 to 36 WARNING CHECK ch 5261 CMP TEST WARNING 2 18 The total reagent volume up to the last photometric point is more than 250 to 500 LL The volumes of reagents 1 to 3 are all Zero The reagent volume having a timing behind the reaction time is not Zero The total liquid volume of sample and reagent is less than 250 LL When 999 stirring only is specified for reagent volume 0 pL is taken for the volume However
262. pace mode sample 2 Registered sample Ignored characters Ignored blank unallowable otat Sending is unallowable sample Supplementary Explanation 1 Basically text should be transferred with TS and comment presence absence information added to the same sample information excluding ID No as for inquiry from the analyzer 16 29 Remarks Caution 1 The position No specified from the host must be within the range specified on the stat sample position setting screen If the position No is outside the range or 0 is specified sample information error occurs 5 Analytical Data Transfer from analyzer to host Shown below are the contents of each text Analytical data transfer for routine stat and control samples The text size number of transferred words between STX code and end code is selectable tetween the two given below Table 16 14 Text Size and Composition Text Size Mode Text Composition B Byte count Max Test Count text Max Text Count Channel Count Remarks 256 Heal time or 10bx test countn 16 1b 40 or less Max text count is 1 when batch channel count is 20 or less Taal 3 3 1ch to 20ch Final STX Fu T T 71 1 2tchto40ch Within 41 to 51 1st 1ch to 20ch 2nd 21ch to 40ch Fina STX T 7T T LRJ ETX BCC 4tchto 5tch 512 Heal time or 46 2 51 or less batch 1st 1ch to 46ch Final SIX T J ETX BCC 47h to 51 16 30 The text
263. plus ISE Time Chart Reaction table Sampling mechanism wash S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 S nozzie outside wash SV8 Reagent dispensing mechanism H syringe H syringe SV3 R nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism Stirring rod rotation Stirring rod outside wash SV5 Reagent disk Sample disk ISE sipper mechanism ISE syringe ISE syringe SV16 SV17 KCI SV18 Pinch valve SV19 Cell rinse mechanism Concentrated dilute vacuum waste solution SV14 Concentrated waste solution SV13 Dilute waste solution SV12 Cell blank SV10 Cell rinse SV11 Trough rinse SV 9 Cycle 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SEC 13 3 Stop 32 cell rotation d PCP check 11 8 13 4 ON 10 3 11 6 12 8 ON Diluent agent diluent water 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 2 5 1 8 1 9 1 Stop Stop 25 28 Wash 12 cell rotation 5 cell rotation 0 0 discharge 47 0 6 1 9 29 35 0 6 1 9 2 8 4 8 2 6 4 6 9 2 ON JOEF ON Upper dead point 7 7 8 0 Rinsing bath Dilution Air aspiration 8 6 9 2 Ce 8 6 9 2 102 11 3 6 2 Aspiration OFF ON p 7 6 59 69 OFF ON L 7 5 Upper dead point 8 4 Wash 8 7 OFF ON 8 6 8 1 OFF ON 5 0 7 3 Stop Rotation Stop Upper dead point OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 28 Stop at upper dead point 20 2 6 Up Z Middle 0 7 15 0 1 1 4 19 25 31 ON ON OFF 2 9 T OFF 9 0 OFF 0 7 1 0 OFF ON 1 2 22 OFF 0 3 0 6 OFF ON 5 10 9 8 10 2 1
264. power equipment prepared by the customer Attach the filter case to the water supply port and push in the water supply tube Cut the tube according to the distance to the deionized water supply unit and push the tube into the water supply port of the deionized water supply unit Fasten the tube with hose bands Connect the pipe joint to the low concentration water drain port Cut the drain tube according to the distance between the instrument and the drain port prepared by the customer and connect the tube The tube should be fastened with hose bands and the pipe joint with the pipe retainer Attach the nipple to the high concentration water drain port push in the waste solution tube and fasten it with the binder Put the waste solution tube and waste solution sensor in the waste solution tank 12 7 12 6 Fixing of Instrument 1 Determine the installation place of the main unit through arrangement with the customer and fix the main unit by turning the adjuster screws 2 Wipe out contaminants from the incubator by use of gauze soaked with 296 Hitergent solution or the like and inject deionized water into the incubator 3 Check if the incubator is at a level by measuring the water level at 3 check points and adjust the height by turning the adjuster screws Incubator Main unit adjuster Fig 12 3 Adjustment of Water Level in Incubator Check point 12 7 Preparation for Analysis 1 Prepare 2 Hitergent
265. power off is taken as daily data and the data for up to 256 days is saved onto FD starting from the newest data In case of continuous energization however a day s data is automatically closed when the day changes and subsequent data is treated as for the following day c In case of FD error processing is terminated with the title alone printed Alarm Trace Printout DAILY 5 0 5 0 Daily Alarm Trace 94 07 25 16 00 Instrument status Occurrence count 09 165 7 10 XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X R XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 08 30 6 9 A XXX XXX XXX x Xx X X X X X X X Time of occurrence R XX X X X X X X X Retry count or sub alarm code Retry code or main alarm code Alarm Trace Printout CUMULATIVE 5 0 5 0 Daily Alarm Trace 94 07 25 16 00 94 07 25 08 50 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X R XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X K XX X X X X X X X 94 06 30 15 29 XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Occurrence count s Se See Ses Sub code Main i Retry circuit code I Retry code 2 6 2 Parameter Code List TM p J CP CD T Z em C C4 P3 CO 4 Opa H C4 hoe Come Low Conc Conc Calibrator Conc Ref Wolume Expect
266. pper dead point after resetting will be issued from other than the cell side 72 to 85 SAMPLE 2 The serum probe does not Same as above PROBE reach the upper dead point in ascending motion on the cell side 3 S STOP The serum probe moves 1 Check the liquid STOP down abnormally in level detector Note 1 descending action on 2 Replace the liquid other than the cell side level detector PC X3 mm from cup bottom board to 4 mm from cell bottom 4 The serum probe moves Same as above down abnormally in descending action on the cell side 5 S STOP The serum probe does not Check the upper dead STOP go down from the upper point detector Note 1 dead point in descending motion NOTE 1 S STOP may be issued only during operation d 2 zT to 85 SAMPLE SIOP The serum probe does not Check the upper dead PROBE go down from the upper point detector dead point in descending motion on the cell side ME STOP Detection of abnormal Refer to alarm code SIOP descending motion of the Cose 1 serum probe remains on S STOP When serum probe turns to Check the home SIOP the cell side the cell position detector Note 1 cannot be detected 5 When the serum probe turns Same as above from the cell side to other position it does not come off the cell position SIOP Before the probe goes down Refer to alarm code SIOP the liquid level detector is 1 a
267. put has a distinctive tone at the frequency indicated below 1 Self Test Error 50 Hz 2 Loading Error 250Hz 3 OS Initial Error 1 Hz Sounding Continuous Distinction in Error Message Output For distinction in error output of small size automatic analyzer the configuration register of a flash memory is used According to the readout value of this register output destination is distinguished as shown below The value is set by hardware No setting is required in software Table 2 1 Flash Memory Configuration Register Oxf2000b Value Meaning 0x01 Output to small size automatic analyzer Bus error Other 4 Contents of Output Output for the small size automatic analyzer comes in 3 kinds described above So the kinds of console output are listed below Table 2 2 Kinds of Console Message Output Error Output Message Self test error 1 Self Test Error XX Self test error code Boot error 1 Rom Uncompress Error 2 F D Boot Error OxXXXXXXXX 3 FROM Boot Error OxXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Boot error code Refer to Section 5 OS initial error 1 OS Initial Error Vect OXXX PCZOxXXXXXXXX Vect OxXX Vector No OxXXXXXXXX Program counter Note that EAT output is issued when possible 2 2 Motor Control Alarms Alarm Check Alarm Check Alarm Check Procedure Code Procedure 3 4 Unassigned 3 4 5 4 2 2 3 3 4 5 2 2 3 Unassigned 3 4 Unassigned 6 Unassi
268. r upon voltage drop x abnormality in voltage 12 V Detection of Comparator L upon voltage drop abnormality in voltage 15V Detection of Comparator upon voltage drop x abnormality in voltage 15 V Detection of Comparator upon voltage drop x abnormality in voltage 24 V Detection of Comparator L upon voltage drop x abnormality in voltage Float SW Upper limit Lead SW OFF when full Inverted Lower limit Lead SW ON when lowered Inverted Vacuum ON OFF ON when deteriorated Water level in Presence absence of ON OFF ON when present vacuum water chamber 8 7 cont d u Inversion Unit Name Condition upon Detection Output Signal on DI Board Water level in Presence absence of ON OFF OFF when absent H Inverted incubation water bath Waste Detection of filled ON OFF ON when full solution level condition Operation ON OFF detection 255 ON when energized Inverted SW 1 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 Analytical Methods Analytical Method T abl6 u uuu 9 1 LypesorGalibrallOr 9 4 9 2 1 Description of Model 902 Polygonal Line Calibration 9 7 Photometry Assay Concentration 9 9 9 3 1 Dual Wavelength 5 9 10 9 3 2 Cell Blank Compensation 9 11 Electrolyte Concentration Calculation
269. r RUN highlighted CANCEL To No 1 Alarm display registration To previous status Ignored Processing or contents of text to be sent to host Number of status to which transition is made Analytical data transfer in real time communication Analytical data transfer in response to specific sample request RES batch transfer specified through screen 16 20 MOR analy ticaldata req Data 012 or More Samples SPE transfer 3 SPE transfer 4 SPE transfer 5 Event from Host REC Suspension req SPE TS specification ANY transfer after SPE save 3 ANY transfer after SPE save 4 ANY transfer after SPE save 5 RES specific Time out sample req Hardware Error ANY transfer after RES save 16 ANY transfer after RES save 15 ANY transfer after RES save 16 NOTE Upon reception of the SUS or REC frame each frame is sent after waiting for the specified time Error in Text REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 REP transfer 18 16 5 2 Status Transition Matrix in transfer of analytical data alone Status in Analyzer Initial status for host communication parameter Idling no data to be transferred on analyzer and host sides LPR transfer wait before LPR transfer HPR transfer wait before HPR transfer HPR LPR transfer wait before HPR LPR transfer SPE transfer wait before SPE transfer SPE LPR transfer wait before
270. reagent Check the upper probe it is not set at the dead point detector upper dead point 581 to REAGENT STOP The stop position of reagent Check home 593 DISK disk cannot be detected detection or count detector The reagent disk does not Same as above stop at the specified position The home position of reagent Check home disk cannot be detected detection 621 to REAGENT 22 1 STOP The reagent syringe does not Check the upper 622 SYRINGE reach the upper dead point dead point detector The reagent syringe does Same as above move down from the upper dead point 641 ISE Bi The sipper nozzle does not Check the upper SIPPER reach the upper dead point dead point detector of during resetting ISE sipper operation 642 ISE WARNING The sipper nozzle does not Same as above SIPPER STOP leave the upper dead point Note 4 661 to ISE 26 1 WARNING The sipper syringe does not Check the upper 662 SYRNG STOP reach the upper dead point dead point detector of Note 4 ISE Syringe ME The sipper syringe does not STOP leave the upper dead point ose 4 671 ISE _ _ WARNING The ISE function is stopped Check alarm log and OK STOP due to alarm deal with the alarm Note 4 This warning is indicated when restart in the sampling stop status was attempted NOTES 3 S STOP may be issued only during operation x Though the photometry assay function works the ISE function does not work
271. rent Maximum output power Input fluctuation Load fluctuation Voltage variable range Protection circuit a b Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection Environment a Operating temperature and humidity Storage temperature and humidity Vibration resistance Shock resistance EWS50 12 85 to 165 V AC continuous input system 1 2 A 100 V AC input under full load 0 6 A 200 V AC input under full load 74 at maximum output power 6 8 A 100 V AC input 13 5 A 200 V AC input 47 to 440 Hz 12 V 4 4 A 52 8 W 48 mV maximum input to minimum input 100 mV no load to full load 10 Activated at 4 6 or more and auto resetting Activated at 13 8 to 16 2 V to 50 C 30 to 90 RH without condensation 30 to 85 C 10 to 95 RH without condensation 2 Gor less 10 to 55 Hz 2 G constant in each of X Y and Z directions for 1 hour 20 G or less 15 3 15 2 Reagent Refrigerator 15 2 1 Function This unit is used for the Model 902 automatic analyzer and has the following functions a Keeping analytical reagents cool b Cooling of water circulated in incubation bath 15 2 2 Specifications of Cooling Unit 1 Refrigerating system Refrigeration cycle with enclosed type air compressor The air compressor 2T2B3R126A 1A made by Matsushita is employed 2 Dimensions and shape External dimensions Depth 563 x width 346 x height 836 mm including coolant bath Depth 250 x
272. ring timing o o A 9 gt 7 4 7 5 4 Air Purge Air Purge S syringe aspiration 1000 pulses Deionized water S syringe aspiration S syringe discharge 100 pulses 8 times or less NOK discharge QK Reset SV1 ON OFF NG 200 pulses Deionized water discharge A A 1000 pulses R syringe aspiration Deionized water NG R syringe discharge 100 pulses discharge A 200 pulses Deionized water discharge SV 2 3 A S svrinae aspirati S syringe moved up to u on 1000 pulses i upper dead point QK 400 pulses NG 5 1 OFF NG 5 22 Was gt irati R syringe moved up to R syringe aspiration yning ois 1000 pulses upper dead point OK 400 pulses NG SV2 3 ON 5 OFF NG H probe nozzle outside NG wash SV5 9 ON OFF A A A Explanation of symbols Check of processing in preceding box OK side in case of normal end and NG side in case of abnormal end Occurrence of alarm Hepetition End of processing 7 5 5 Incubator Water Exchange Incubator Water Exchange 1 MAINTENANCE screen Wafer exchange required Judgement by operator Wafer exchange 3 No Operation check Alarm indication normal 4 FD alarm l
273. ringe Rsyringe SV3 nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism Stirring rod rotation Stirring rod outside wash SV5 Reagent disk Sample disk ISE sipper mechanism ISE syringe ISE syringe SV16 Na K CI SV17 KCI SV18 Pinch vaive SV19 Cell rinse mechanism Concentrated dilute vacuum waste solution SV14 Concentrated waste solution SV13 Dilute waste solution SV12 Cell blank SV10 Cell rinse SV 1 1 Trough rinse SV 9 3 2 5 1 8 1 9 1 Stop Stop 12 cell rotation 5 cell rotation 11 Stop reference electrode priming 12 13 14 15 16 17 13 3 32 cell rotation OFF OFF Internal standard Internal standard Upper dead point 7 1 9 7 d Wash 12 9 10 1 413 Aspiration 356 8 0 9 1 1425 7 3 7 5 9 1 Remainder discharge 11 4 Air aspiration 8 0 9 0 Discharge 11 3 ON 14 5 11 0 14 4 OFF ON Upper dead point OFF OFF Y 5 0 6 4 Stop Rotation Stop Upper dead point 4 4 6 1 13 4 15 1 0 1 4 1 9 1 13 1 Discharge Aspiration Discharge Aspiration OFF 43 ON 6 2 OFF 13 3 ON 15 2 0 0 4 2 6 5 13 2 15 5 ON OFF ON OFF 0 0 4 2 6 5 13 2 15 5 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 29 Stop at upper dead point 20 2 5 Up Middle 0 7 5 0 1 1 4 1 9 2 5 3 1 ON ON OFF 2 9 9 0 14 0 OFF ON 9 0 14 0 OFF ON OFF 1 2 22 ON OFF OFF 5 17 Cycle 3 to 8 18 SEC J PCP check Only in cycle 3 and 4 Only in cycle 3 Repeated from cycle 4 to cycle 8 ISE Priming Time Chart
274. rintout order specification b Final alarm occurrence date time The printing order of occurrence date depends on the date printout order specification Time printout is fixed to 24 hour base c Identification character is printed out for alarm data R for retry data and K for key operation Printout is not made when there is no data in each case d Alarm data The alarms which have occurred in a day are printed out in the order of main alarm code 3 digit integer sub alarm code 3 digit integer and occurrence count 3 digit integer up to 20 kinds Occurrence count The cumulative number of identical alarms which have occurred in a day e Retry data The retries which have occurred in a day are printed out in the order of retry code 3 digit integer and retry count 3 digit integer up to 20 kinds f Key operation data The key operation data is printed out in the order of key operation code 3 digit integer key operation count 3 digit integer and time of key operation 3 digit integer Printout is made up to 16 kinds Printout System a Data is printed out in the sequential order starting from the newest data 6 When the alarm retry data in a day does not reach 20 kinds it is printed out closely with no blank line left c When there is no alarm data or retry data its title alone is printed Notes a Printout can be stopped in steps of day by stop key input b The data obtained from power on to
275. rive 1 YD 702D 6539 Short plug is not mounted Short plug is mounted YD 702D 6539 Short plug is not mounted Short plug is mounted dere de 25 qe deem jeje see de qe le e Se dm SB qe qe d e 2e qe qe je jm 9 je 2e qe 2e je qe Qe qe Qe qe te Se SO Qe je qe Qe je de qe je qe qe qe je 3e qe qe je qe e e qe 6 6 Setting of YD 702D 6037D Short Plugs Setting of Drive 1 YD 702D 6037D J2 Short plug is not mounted Short plug is mounted ELE ELE EL YD 702D 6037D Short plug is not mounted Short plug is mounted Ense is deis lei qe 1929 de fe dete qe e Se de S Qe qe de ee qe qs e Se de Ser je qe 19 qe Qe qe qe je qe qe qe 2e qe 2 qe 2e qe qe e Qe S qe 2e qe Qe je Qe qe qe qe je de qe qe je Qe qe Qe e qe qe qe Ae qe de Function of Each Short Plug Designation of Short Pin Function IF Selection of how to change recording capacity mode 15 Function T2 2 modes 2 0 1 0 MB Automatic changeover with inserted disk 2 0MB When HD disk is used 1 0MB When DD disk is used 2 modes 2 0 1 0 MB Changeover with MODE SELECT signal 2 0 MB When MODE SELECT signal is HIGH 1 0 MB When MODE SELECT signal is LOW 2 modes 2 0 1 0 M
276. rmal o FD alarm logging Function Absorbances 12 wavelengths are measured and output onto the p rinter together with the previously measured data Required time 1 min 50 sec reset 20 sec 18 sec cycle x 5 cycles crea Details of Processing Reference Document 1 Start from MAINTENANCE screen screen specifications 2 Refer to the next page 3 Absorbances at 12 wavelengths main sub are printed Photometer report data check out together with previous ones stored in CRAM The recent result data is stored in CRAM 4 At execution of photometer check operation is checked Screen specifications and alarm is displayed if operation is abnormal Alarm code specifications 5 The above alarm is stored in FD FD specifications Hemarks 1 Precision Check a b c d otatitical calculation is made for the result data of routine samples opecify Precision Check on the MAINTENANCE screen otatistical data for a maximum number of samples is calculated Up to forty tests including ISE assay are applicable The statistical data shown in the following table is output Output Statistical Data Output Format D poe Data Count N 3 digit integral Maximum value MAX 6 digit real number with According to STD 1 CONC sign decimal point Minimum value MIN Same as above Mean value MEAN 7 digit real number with 1 digit increased below sign decimal poin decimal point as compared with STD 1 CONC
277. romotive force DA mV digits with sign and 1 digit decimal point of LOW solution Electromotive force mV 6 digits with sign and 1 digit of HIGH solution decimal point of calibrator Electromotive force 64 mV 6 digits with sign and 1 digit decimal point Slope level for pb mV digits with sign and 1 digit decimal point display Concentration of mEg L 6 digits with sign and Same position as for internal standard decimal point LOW solution on solution ISE parameter screen Concentration of mEg L 6 digits with sign and Decimal point calibrator decimal point position in calibrator Compensation factor mEg L 6 digits with sign and concentration on ISE decimal point parameter screen 16 37 6 Data for up to three tests is collectively transferred to the host 7 This text is transferred only when the ISE unit is provided at option 16 6 2 Contents of Text 1 Details of Function Character Fu Transfer sequence Character table below Space Table 16 23 Function Characters for Test Selecting Information Inquiry and Analytical Data Test Selecting Information Inquiry Analytical Data Direction of Analyzer Analyzer Communica Analyzer Host tion Host Host With without Real time Batch Real time Batch ID Without communica Communica Communica Communica Sample Name tion tion tion tion Routine sample Wi
278. rrection pulses set on System Parameters screen and corrected pulse count shall be used Conditions for stopping 1 When STOP key is pressed 2 When mechanism STOP level alarm occurs In case of 1 probe returns to rinse bath and stops 6 Stirring Rod Rotation Adjustment a Details of operation Above cell Rinse bath Stirring mechanism is not moved vertically b Extent of operation 1 Rotation angle Same as in operation Conditions for stopping 1 When STOP key is pressed 2 When mechanism STOP level alarm occurs In case of 1 rod returns to rinse bath and stops 14 17 7 Adjustment of R probe Descent to Bottle Position a Details of operation Above cell Conditions for stopping When mechanism STOP level alarm occurs otart rinse bath Descends at constant speed R1 R1 disk outer row N Stop operation at abnormal descent and record height of R1 Produce a STOP level alarm And display it on Maintenance screen Displayed height is value descent pulses 7 converted to mm 0 07501 mm pulse Probe descent position is predetermined at No 1 position on outer row Operator must pull out bottle Extent of operation 1 Rotation angle Reference value pulse count is subjected to no of correction pulses set on System Parameters screen and corrected pulse count shall be used 2 Descent amount Should descend to lowermos
279. rrent Loop Current loop is selected by turning on the switch No 1 on the PC board In the current loop mode the J402 connector is used as in the RS 232C mode 1 Connection Diagram Refer to 4 in 16 9 2 2 gt Connecting Cable The J402 connector side uses 15 pin interface connector female of type RDAD 15S The cable side should use the following HDAB 15P made by Hirose Denki or equivalent 3 Pin Arrangement Refer to 3 in 16 9 2 4 Signal Input Circuit Model 902 side Host side _ 1500 ii 9V 75452 A1 a30 je ie 16 9 6 Communication Monitor Data transferred between the Model 902 and host can be monitored by connecting a personal computer or other monitor to J405 on the RSDIST board For monitoring turn off the switch No 1 on the PC board 1 Connection Diagram Refer to 4 in 16 9 2 2 Connecting Cable The J405 connector side of RSDIST board is a 25 pin interface connector female of type SDBB 25S The cable side should use the following HDBB 25P made by Hirose Denki or equivalent 16 50 4 9 16 9 7 Data Alarm Code List Table 16 30 Data Alarm Code List Output String Photometry Assay ___ ___ SUF __ Routine stat Control STD Routine Stat Control 510 BLLOONNNNEGEEOGNIIEONIINONIIN 2 Cell blank abnormal L9 Sample shor _ Reagent shor por 5 Reagent short 6 7
280. rt enable Restart enable es 1 OPERATION SAMPLING No 10 11 12 13 16 17 24 44 45 46 52 53 54 Transition Conditions Startup error Normal end of startup End of initialization Input of START key Normal end of reset transition to operation Input of STOP key or occurrence of STOP level alarm Input of S STOP key request for S STOP barcode reader Pos no 0 etc Occurrence of S STOP alarm in sampling mechanism Input of START key without reset of sampling mechanism Success in mechanism reset after input of START key with reset of sampling mechanism Failure in mechanism reset after input of START key with reset of sampling mechanism Completion of analysis of all samples and rinsing of all cells input of STOP key or occurrence of STOP level alarm Completion of analysis of samples and rinsing of all cells 2 End of STOP status Normal end of T M reset Issuance of T M processing T M without reset Automatic end of T M processing input of STOP key ineffective for some T M processings or occurrence of STOP level alarm Occurrence of E STOP alarm End of E STOP status Occurrence of power failure 1 Inthe standby status the processings are divided between easy analysis mode and routine analysis mode on the Menu screen 2 T Sis not cleared Note however that the stat samples are cleared after pipetting all POS samples Al the samples pipett
281. ry over Evasion specified Pattern Examples of carry over evading procedure are shown below A to C represent tests and W stands for washing Example of Evading Procedure Ar3 gt Bro gt example of succeeding in evasion by change in channel registration Ans Brg W Bn Ana gt W Bn b Evasion of carry over between reagents due to cell and washing for evasion HI IV V Condition for carry over evasion The cell used for analysis of the specified test is not used for analysis in the next round after 48 cycles Instead it is washed for prevention of carry over Method of carry over evasion Cell is washed by aspirating detergent detergent 1 or 2 or system water and discharging it into a cell At this time washing is facilitated by stirring Carry over evasion of cell is also effected during S Stop After completion of washing all cells auto stop occurs When stop status 1 set for any cause other than auto stop cell washing for evading carry over due to the previous operation will not be resumed in start from the standby status Execution of cell washing degrades throughput Registration of carry over evasion specified pattern Up to 10 kinds of patterns for which the evasion of carry over due to cell is specified can be registered Specification from screen From the screen the following need be specified a carry over giving test detergent set position on
282. s in the reaction limit level range is N AE and linearity limit value can be represented as shown below 1 When N gt 9 Linearity limit value LIMIT 8 cont d Remedy Make sure the sample does not contain dust etc Dilute the sample and measure it again If the stirring motor does not rotate normally report to the servicemen The light source lamp should not be used beyond 750 hours Replace the light source lamp and perform cell blank measurement LIMIT8 and LIN LIMIT values are both fixed Unit value LIN LIMIT 10 LIMIT8 30 Data Alarm Printer S 4 lt Number of LIN 8 F photometric points in reaction limit level range lt 8 Standard 1 S1ABS H absorbance abnormal Duplicate error 2 When4 lt N lt 8 Linearity limit value LIN LIMIT Note tnat linearity check IS not carried out in the following cases he number of photometric points in the reaction limit level range is three or less 60 x 10e 4ABS min AEf AEg 60 x 10e 4ABS min Photometry assay Note 1 In calibration the mean value of two measured absorbance values of STD 1 is not within the specified standard 1 absorbance range input value Value is absorbance with End point Assay in the case of late assay is main wave O length first absorbance Photometry assay In calibration this error is indicated if the difference in ab
283. s is ignored The analyzer does not transfer measurement data in case of sending from the host in the sample No mode without ID though ID is provided If transferring the RES frame from the host when FD is occupied by a factor the presence or absence of an FD error is checked with the relevant factor terminated The result of FD error check is described below During this process communication is in the event occurrence status 1 If FD error is RES frame is transferred 2 If FD error is present RES frame is not transferred When interruption is cased by RES frame during batch transfer a batch specified sample may be transferred before one sample because FD access time is allowed In this case after the text for one batch specified sample is transferred the RES frame will be transferred 3 Transfer of Test Selecting Information analyzer lt gt host Analyzer HOST Response from host Frame A Description SPE To return test selecting information for a sample sent from analyzer MOR To indicate that host cannot respond to test selecting information inquiry but is ready to receive analytical data REC To suspend communication with analyzer for the specified period of time because host cannot respond to test selecting information inquiry nor receive analytical data 16 11 Difference in Transfer between 505 and REC Frames a In sending
284. s no data in each case Alarm data The alarm data is printed out in the order of main alarm code 3 digit integer sub alarm code 3 digit integer and time of occurrence up to 10 kinds If 10 kinds are exceeded excess ones are not stored However they are saved as cumulative data Time of occurrence Time on the basis of operation cycle 000 to 179 when the alarm has occurred in 100 msec data The retry data is printed out in the order of retry code 3 digit integer retry count 3 digit integer and time of occurrence up to 10 kinds If 10 kinds are exceeded excess ones are not stored However they are saved as cumulative data Key operation data The key operation data is printed out in the order of key operation code 3 digit integer key operation count 3 digit integer and time of key operation 3 digit integer Printout is made only once 2 67 Co O N 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2 2 Standby including parameter check Instrument Status T ep Instrument Status Code Table Blank row is the unassigned one Code m 1 __ Emergency stop 15 ir Frisina cat fs 37 Pimeerchek 61 i ISE REF 64 p ss blank Instrument
285. s set for transfer of analytical data alone on the communication parameter screen the analyzer returns response to neither test selecting inquiry for routine stat samples nor specification of test selection from the host The analyzer waits for 1 sec or more after sending ETX in the analytical data text and proceeds to transfer to the host regardless of the communication procedure 1 sec or more Transfer sequence Text Analytical data text 16 17 16 4 7 Retry of Communication Retry is a function for resending the text sent from the analyzer to the host immediately before occurrence of any communication error 1 Retry Due to Time Out Reception time out If response is not received beyond the response wait time limit NOTE 1 after sending a text from the analyzer reception time out occurs and retry is made When the number of retries NOTE 2 exceeds the maximum number of retries allowed for time out NOTE 3 communication will be suspended b Transmission time out If a text cannot be sent from the analyzer transmission time out occurs and retry is made after one communication cycle or longer When the number of retries NOTE 2 exceeds the maximum number of retires allowed for time out NOTE 3 communication will be suspended NOTES 1 Time period is changeable by retry time entry on the communication parameter screen 2 The number of retries made consecutively 3 Retry time is changeable by entry
286. s the position No on disk 2 10 d Alarm Category Level Description Remedy m to BARCODE2 1to 5 WARNING An error has occurred in Check the 1805 communication with the communication cable barcode reader Parity of barcode reader error framing error or overrun error Sub code indication 1 Unassigned 2 Unassigned 3 Sample disk barcode reader 4 Unassigned 5 Unassigned 1931 to REAGENT 1 to 40 WARNING The volume of reagent to Set new reagent 1971 SHORT be sipped from a reagent bottle is inadequate The reagent volume is a total amount of one kind of reagent for each test item 1 Sub code indicates position No 2 Positions 37 and 38 are used for ISE 3 Position 40 is used for HITERGENT 4 Position 39 is used for HIALKALI 2231 to REAGENT 59 1 to 40 WARNING Reagent volume is smaller Set reagent newly 2271 LEVEL than the remaining reagent check value specified with p parameter 2781 to UN 2830 ASSIGNED 2851 TS OVER Because 400 samples are After completion of 2852 registered in routine sample analysis register TS test selecting information again new test selecting information cannot be registered from the host 2861 PATIENT WARNING Because 400 samples are Same as above SAMPLE registered in routine sample OVER test selecting information a new routine sample cannot be analyzed oed cont d
287. se Arrangement 8 4 Motor and Detector a 8 6 CO o OM OT 8 7 8 MOTORS DETECTORS AND FUSES 8 1 Motor List GPCONT SLA7021M constant current drive GPCONTA GPCONT 7 MP4501 lt BR 21 13 Reagent syringe 713 0316 GPCONT 7 constant voltage drive 14 ISE syringe 713 0316 GPCONT 8 15 Stirring rod rotation LN12 M421N1B 707 0285 GMCONT 75452 8 2 lt O BR GW PO 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Detector List Conduction iuidlevelsensorfrSpobe Conduction _ Liquid level sensor for probe PCP Home position of stirring mechanism T Bright rotation PCP Stop position of stirring mechanism T Bright rotation Fia SW _ Waterlevelinwatertank Vacuum SW Negative pressure in vacuum chamber Conduction Wastesoutonievelinvacumchamber Conduction Water level in incubation bath Conduction Waste sioni C Pt feeler For control of temperature in incubation bath Part No 713 4142 713 4143 713 4143 J339165 T T T T 707 0426 J339165 707 5041 T 707 0426 J339165 707 5041 T J339165 T T T 713 0315 713 0315 713 0315 9339165 713 0319 713 0312 713 0318 714 4043 714 0391
288. short calculation disabled noise error and level error 1 The slope for display is within the following range Slope lt 45 0 mV Slope gt 35 0 mV 2 Electrode response is degraded carry over ratio is as given below Na 0 232 lt K 0 160 A 0 490 lt 1 The slope for display is within the following range Na 45 0 mV lt Slope lt 49 9 mV or 68 1 mV x Slope 89 9 mV lt Slope lt 35 0 mV or 68 1 mV gt Slope 2 Electrode response is degraded carry over ratio is as given below Na 0 154 lt K 0 107 A Cl 0 330 lt The concentration of internal standard solution C IS is within the following range Na C IS lt 120 0 or 160 0 mEq L lt IS C IS 3 0 mEq L or 7 0 mEq L lt C IS Cl C IS lt 80 0 or 120 0 mEq L lt IS On each of the calibrator concentration and slope for display the previous and current values are compared and the result exceeds the COMPENSATE LIMIT value Previous value Current value Y x 100 90 gt COMPENSATE Limit Previous value Current value 2 6 ISE Data Alarm Check Alarm Name ADC abnormal Sample short Noise error Level error Sample value abnormal Calculated disabled Alarm Check Method The result of ADC is abnormal Checked in ADC task Sample volume is inadequate Checked in control task This alarm is issued when a difference between maximum a
289. side view Rear view 14 7 14 2 1 LCD Touch Panel 1 2 3 Open the front covers L and R and remove the concealing plate at the top front Reaching through the opening provided by removing the above plate apply a blade edged screwdriver to the claw holding the LCD touch panel from the rear of the main unit cover and lift up to remove the LCD touch panel Detach the power terminal and signal cable connectors from the rear of the LCD touch panel and remove the touch panel Replacement of backlight on LCD touch panel gt Remove the LCD touch panel Open the screw fastened lid on the 24 V DC terminals at the rear of LCD touch panel Detach connector CN at the rear of the opening in the lid remove the backlight and replace it 14 2 2 How to Remove Main Unit Top Cover Remove arm covers C D and E and the protective plate Remove LCD touch panel and the printer unit Detach the LED board wiring connector from the main unit cover Lift up and remove the main unit cover 14 2 3 Sample Arm Unit Remove the main unit cover Detach the sample arm tube from the joint of the seesaw mechanism Detach connectors J540 and J541 Hemove the grounding wire Remove the retaining screws and detach the unit 14 8 14 2 4 Reagent Arm Unit Remove the main unit cover Detach the reagent arm unit tube passing beneath the reaction bath from the joint of the seesaw mechanism Detach connectors J550 and J551
290. sk Sample disk ISE sipper mechanism ISE syringe ISE syringe SV16 Na K CI 5 17 KCI SV18 Pinch valve SV19 Cell rinse mechanism Concentrated dilute vacuum waste solution SV14 Concentrated waste solution SV 13 Dilute waste solution SV12 Cell blank SV10O Cell rinse SV11 Trough rinse SV 9 Incubation bath water supply SV4 Incubation bath heater Light source lamp Incubation bath circulating pump MD2 Incubation bath water drain SV15 Feed pump MD1 Vacuum pump VP 1 Quick Cell Feed Time Chart 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 13 15 16 17 3 0 3 4 66 70 10 2 10 6 Stop 1 cell rotation Stop 1 cell rotation Stop Stop 1 cell rotation Upper dead point Stop 1 cell rotation li Upper dead point Upper dead point Upper dead point OFF OFF Upper dead point OFF Stop Stop Upper dead point Upper dead point OFF OFF OFF 7 0 O 1 11 5 12 3 15 1 15 9 1 4 1 9 25 3 1 3 7 50 5 5 61 67 73 86 9 1 9 7 10 3 12 7 133 13 9 16 3 16 9 17 5 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 2 9 6 5 10 1 10 9 12 2 13 7 14 5 15 8 17 3 OFF OFF OFF 1 2 2 2 4 8 5 8 8 4 9 4 12 0 13 0 15 6 166 j ON OFF ON 17 4 17 8 Cycle 1 and 2 18 SEC 1 cell rotation PCP check Reaction table Sampling
291. solution gt Electromotive force of internal standard solution 35 4 Calculation of compensation value C VALUE The difference between the input value and measured value is obtained through measurement of the Hitachi calibrator having the known concentration C VALUE C 139 0 138 9 0 1 Input value 139 0 C Measured value 138 9 Calculation of sample concentration An example of calculation is presented here with the electric potential of sample at 35 5 mV Es Els X 1 0 35 5 35 4 140 7x10 5 140 2 Concentration of sample Electromotive force of sample To the C value the compensation value is added and the sum is printed C s compensation value 140 2 0 1 140 3 Sample concentration after compensation 9 14 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Overall Wining Idle uy 10 2 EGPU2S7 BOSIQT271 3724 usu a aa qana not epe ete axe ete E E hes 10 3 EMIOTO0 Board 2719780 testes ende eta dtes aede 10 10 EMOT200 Board 27 199939 xu x ua pick o pico deep sod eo eode 10 14 MVSB100 Board 271 3789 nn nre metre nn 10 17 71 4 01000 s sm 10 24 Boar 13 5001
292. solution 4 STD 5 Absorbance or absorbance change rate of standard solution 5 STD 6 Absorbance or absorbance change rate of standard solution 6 2 A Absorbance or absorbance change rate of sample Calibration Curve Standard Solution Saure iure Compatible Assay Parameter Calculation Cx K X STD 1 C1 1 assay x IFb NOTES 2 point rate assay 2 point end assay 3 point twin test assay 1 point rate twin test assay Rate A assay Rate B assay Cx K X STD 1 C1 Same as in Linear 3 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 Concentration of standard solution 6 lt go 4 Cx 5 x IFa IFb method 2 point linear above Concentration of standard solution 1 Concentration of standard solution 2 Concentration of standard solution 3 Concentration of standard solution 4 Concentration of standard solution 5 Sample concentration IFb Instrument constants cont d Calibration Curve Concentration Type Calibration Curve Standard Solution Compatible Assay Non linear method LOGIT LOG4P Non linear method LOGIT LOG5P Non linear method SPLINE Absorbance STD 6 A STD 2 STD 1 Absorbance STD 6 A STD 2 STD 1 Absorbance STD 6 A STD 2 STD 1 C1 C2 Cx C6 O 5 5 2 3 2 to 6 kinds of sta
293. sorbance or absorbance change rate between the first and second measurements of STD i is larger than the DUPLICATE LIMIT input value i2 1 to N indicates the number of standards cont d Remedy Prepare the standard properly Set the standard properly Unless check is desired input a value within 32000 to 32000 for standard 1 absorbance range on the parameter registration menu 1 screen Replace the seal piece of pipettor Check fastening of joints Unless check is desired input 32000 for duplicate limit absorbance on the parameter registration menu 1 screen Photometry assay e 1 In calibration any one of 2 cont d Remedy The parameters on the screen and FD are not the following alarms is updated encountered with the measured STD absorbances ADC abnormal cell blank abnormal sample short reagent short absorbance over reaction limit over linearity abnormal prozone error duplicate error calculation disabled and standard 1 absorbance abnormal In calibration calculation is disabled before completion 3 In non linear calibration EXPONENTIAL and Logit Log5P an extreme value is found 4 After execution of non linear calibration SPLINE the result of extreme value inflection point check is NG ISE Calibration is invalid Any one of the following alarms is encountered ADC abnormal sample short calculation disabled nois
294. st Stat Sample Measurement 1st and Control Sample Measurement Sample Sample Calculatio concentration K value n disabled abnormal If multiple data alarms concur the one with the highest priority will be indicated 2 4 7 Details of Data and Alarm Outputs Resulting from Calibration Sample error factors Noise errror ADC error sss otential Standard potentia LOW ADC ADC error Sample short Low Level NN sample short potential Standard 15 High A E Noise error M3 Level Sample short Calibration piena IS Noise error L solution 15 CALIB RATOR E Sample short STD error c3 Level Slope abnormal Preparation abnormal Calibration abnormal Calculation disabled Calculation error factors Internal standard Internal concentration abnormal Calculation disabled Calibration abnormal Calcuration disabled Calcuration Correction disabled factor Slope abnormal Preparation abnormal Calibration abnormal Calculation disabled Slope Calibration concentra tion IS Internal standard concentration Calculation disabled concentration Calibrator Calibration abnormal concentration Calculation disabled Correction Calculation disabled 09 6 2 4 8 Output Check List for Each Photometry Assay CALIB M
295. st the measured waveform using trimmer VR1 to obtain the timing shown in Fig 14 1 NOTE It may take 1 or 2 minutes until the LOG AMP output waveform appears LOG output Across LOG AMP board TP14 GND LOG output Across DI board TP1 TP2 Terminals adjust with VR1 Between TP14 and AG One shot in DI I 15 ms or more flat section Terminals 13 ms Between TP1 and DG In AD converting operation a time period of 13 ms is taken from the rise of ADC start signal This period of time should correspond to the flat section of LOG output Fig 14 1 ADC Timing Waveform Specification 14 1 4 Reaction Bath Temperature Adjustment Adjust reaction bath temperature in the following procedure lt Adjusting procedure gt 1 Connect a tester across CP5 SG of EMIO100 board 2 Turn power on and put the instrument in standby 14 3 3 Adjust VR4 on EMIO100 board so reaction bath water temperature is 37 0 1 C Since the heater is turned ON OFF at around 6 0 V the tester output should be about 6 0 V when reaction bath water temperature is 37 C 4 Adjust the reaction bath temperature indication with NOTE A YSI thermometer should be used to measure the reaction bath water temperature NOTE The measuring position for the YSI thermometer is midway between the sample discharge position and reagent discharge position 14 1 5 Barcode Reader Switch Setting oet and or check the DIP switches of the b
296. t 2 4 In the above formula the result of calculation is multiplied by the exponential 10 which was ignored in the calculation of K value and the product is rounded off to match scaling Thus the final Cx value is 2 4 LL 6 9 3 1 Dual Wavelength Compensation Raw absorbance at Raw absorbance main wavelength after at sub wavelength cell blank after cell blank 2 compensation compensation 110 35 Compensation for absorbance difference between 2 wavelengths Raw absorbance after compensation for difference between 2 wavelengths 1 to 35 max Supplementary explanation 1 On maximum photometric points 1 to 35 and cell blank 1 to 4 the sub wavelength absorbance is subtracted from the main wavelengtt absorbance Raw absorbance of P cell blank at main wavelength Raw absorbance of cell blank at sub wavelength e e Compensation for absorbance difference between 2 wavelengths Raw absorbance of i cell blank after compensation for difference between 2 wavelengths 1to4 2 Selection of cell blank 1 to 4 depends on analytical method For details refer to 9 1 Analytical Method Table 3 Passed cell blank is used for operaiton 9 3 2 Cell Blank Compensation Haw absorbance at main wavelength Raw absorbance at sub wavelength 1 to 35 max Calculation of Haw absorbance of cell bla
297. t 1 6 gt Contents 10 Comp Test Comp Wo HIE M Peraaeter 2 lt 1 45 ETILI farus index i ee 1 30 actor L N I Print Order Com Parameters system Origine ABS 0 Disable Linearity Check Linear Check 4 8 0 Linear Check 9 0 STAT Positions first Wo 31 lt 0 2 35 Last 36 Test ISE Test Channel Mo 3438 40 Parameter 141 11 Check Digit 06 39 q bieable TTF L Weintenance TTerasetars Tau Water Specify mode and touch Start Mode Print ret No 10 lt 0 40 99 gt Last Mo 16 lt 0 40 99 gt vell Blank Select Fermat 4 URAUT FO Format 4 Insert origina ia 2061 target FD In F002 and Select FOOD Cleaning FDO Cleaning Insert cleaning FO Ined FOO and touch Start Weter Precision Precision Specify campile touch Start first 141 400 Lest 4041 400 Rest Prine Te ie Chack Alarm Trace Alarm Trace Alara Print Tost summary Test Count Clear 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 MOTORS DETECTORS AND FUSES Motor List Mud P ELE M DM Lu II UM M E 8 1 lt 8 2 8 3 8 3 1 Fu
298. t Signal on DI Board Sample arm Detection of liquid Resistor type ON when liquid level is H Inverted up down level detected Upper dead point PC SHARP Dark when at upper dead H Inverted point Abnormal descent PC OMRON Dark upon collision H Inverted Sample HP cell position PC HAMA Dark when at HP L rotation PHOTO Reaction disk HP PC HAMA Dark when at HP L rotation PHOTO Cell count PC HAMA Counting of dark bright H when counted PHOTO ADC start PC HAMA ADC start when dark gt H when started Inverted PHOTO bright Sample disk HP PC SHARP Dark when at HP Inverted rotation Stop position on PC SHARP Bright when at stop position outer inner track PC SHARP Bright when at stop position otop position on intermediate track Reagent disk HP PC SHARP Dark when at HP H Inverted rotation Stop position count PC SHARP Counting of dark bright L when counted oyringe Upper dead point PC HAMA Dark when at upper dead PHOTO point Stirrer Upper dead point PC SHARP Dark when at upper dead H Inverted up down point Stirrer arm HP PC SHARP Dark when at HP L rotation Stop position count PC SHARP Counting of dark bright L when counted Rinse Upper dead point PC SHARP Dark when at upper dead H Inverted up down point ISE sipper Lower dead point PC SHARP Dark when at lower dead H Inverted arm point Fuse Detection of blowout ON OFF ON when blown out 5 Detection of Comparato
299. t point 114 0 mm at constant speed 14 18 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 6 15 7 15 OEM PT EHE P 15 1 oO DG Power Supbly zones pi pase aep 15 1 15 1 2 24 V DG iPOWGE SUDDIY 15 2 ISES 12A POW SUDOV RR 15 3 Reagent Refrigerator 1 15 4 15 2 1 FUNCION NUT 15 4 15 2 2 Specifications of Cooling Unit 15 4 15 2 8 Specifications of Electrical Components 15 4 15 2 4 Refrigerator Wiring Diagramm 15 5 15 2 5 Circuit Diagramm of Refrigerator Control Circuit 15 6 FEDD CYD702D 6097D 02105 u toto 15 7 n SSDECIIGCATON ERES 15 7 15 8 15 3 3 Electrical Specifications FD interface signal 15 9 Printer FTP 020UCS530 01A 15 10 144 nupus n s ec i san Es 15 10 15 4 2 SSDS CIC ATION S aus ces cites suu on o on 15 11 VOM be cbe sho tn 15 12 19 4 CONECTO 15 13 Barcode Reader CCD
300. tact TTL input allowed OK NG output NPN open collector 24 V DC 100 mA Leakage current at 0 1 mA or less OFF 0 5 V or less Serial interface Conformity with EIA RS 232C Asynchronous ASCII 600 to 38 400 bits s 7 or 8 bits No even or odd 1 or 2 bits Environmental Operating illuminance Daylight or incandescent lamp 10 000 Ix conditions Fluorescent lamp 3 000 Ix Operating temperature 0 40 C Operating humidity 35 to 85 RH without condensation Operating atmosphere Excessive dust and corrosive gas unallowable Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz double amplitude 1 5 mm in each of X Y and Z directions for 2 hours Insulation resistance 100 MQ or more between power terminal and case when measured with 500 V DC megger 1 000 V AC for 1 minute between power terminal and case Ratings 5 V DC 506 300 mA Weight Approx 165 9 Name of Each OK NG LED Light projection reception block For OK output Lit in green For output Lit in red STABILITY LED e Indicates stability of reading LED for light source e Lights in reading status D OKNG 50 D STABIU nee 8L 1 Cable 2 m long 15 14 15 6 LCD Touch Panel 15 6 1 Specifications Item Specifications Rated power supply voltage 24 V DC Permissible power supply voltage range 20 4 to 26 4 V DC 24 V DC 15 41096 Power consumption 10 W or less Operating temperature to 50 C Operating h
301. tails for twin test Note 1 photometry tests of twin test simultaneous 1 In case of twin test simultaneous analysis simultaneous analysis analysis in 2 3 3 the opposite test must In case of twin test be specified properly simultaneous e Two tests must form analysis an alarm a unique pair and is issued if one of one of them alone two tests is not must designate the registered or the other manual mode is In case of other than selected twin test simultaneous NOTE analysis tests must not 1 The term be paired measurable indicates either of the following In case of twin test simultaneous analysis two tests must be two levels identical in all of the Level 1 following parameters Test registered Data mode and manual STD POS mode not selected STD S VOL ieee Assay code Same as above Reaction time and reagent Sample volume provided Reagent volume Calibration type Calibration point Span point 2 Assay code The following are checked CHEM 1 to 37 for measurable level 1 PARAM CH No photometry tests 1 Relationship between assay code and photometric point check of photometric point input and input range Refer to the analytical method table in 1 1 1 cont d No Designation Details of Check Remarks of Check Display 2 Assay code 3 Calibration parameter check 2 Photometric points after CHEM 1 to 37 the specified reaction PARAM CH No time must not be set
302. ted waste 9 0 solution SV13 OFF 9 0 Dilute waste solution SV12 OFF 0 71 0 OFF j ela Celi blank SV 10 ON Cell rinse SV11 1 2 2 2 0 3 06 T h ri rough rinse SV 9 ON Cycle 4 5 Same as routine 92 Cycle 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SEC 13 3 Stop 32 cell rotation lt gt J PCP check 10 0 13 1 ON 14 0 ON 14 0 ON Routine plus ISE Time Chart Cycle 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SEC 3 2 5 1 8 1 9 1 13 3 Reaction table Stop Stop stop 12 4 12 9 32 cell rotation 12 cell rotation cell rotation Sampling mechanism gt Se ane wash i PCP check S syringe 5 1 to 50 uL S syringe SV2 S nozzle outside wash SV8 Reagent dispensing mechanism R syringe R syringe SV3 Same as routine R nozzle outside wash SV6 Stirring mechanism Stirring rod rotation Stirring rod outside wash SV5 Reagent disk Sample disk 0 0 3 0 Upper dead point ISE sipper mechanism DAS 1 2 17 5 2 0772 4 4 2 OFF ISE syringe 95 10 4 Discharge dilvent agent dilvent water ISE syringe SV16 26 EN 42 17 5 4 Na K CI SV17 ON OFF 17 5 10 3 SV18 OIN OFF 17 5 0 4 10 0 13 1 Pinch valve SV19 OIN OFF ON Stop at upper dead point 2 0 2 6 Cell rinse mechanism Middle 0 7 1 5 Concentrated dilute vacuum waste solution 0 1 14 15 25 3 1 SV14 ON ON OFF 2 9 9 0 14 0 Concentrated waste solution SV13 OFF ON Dilute waste solution 14 0 SV12 OFF ON 0
303. tes for the lamp to stabilize 2 Make sure there is water in the reaction bath and carry out the following adjustments 3 Check voltage is 2 00 0 005 V across check pins TP20 TP15 G If not adjust it with trimmer VR14 4 Check if voltage is 6 00 0 005 V across check pins TP21 TP15 G If not adjust it with trimmer VR13 5 Flip toggle switch SW3 upward and adjust trimmers VR1 to VR12 to obtain 1 81 0 05 V across check pins 14 15 G at positions 0 to B of rotary code switch SW1 Table 14 2 shows the settings of rotary code switches SW1 and SW and the trimmers to be used for adjustment 6 When adjustment with trimmers is finished set rotary switches SW1 and SW to and flip the toggle switch SW3 downward Table 14 2 SW1 SW2 Settings and Corresponding Trimmers Wavelength No SW1 Setting SW2 Setting Adjusting Trimmer vm 2 VRS VRG 8 3 s gt RIO I van B 14 2 14 1 3 ADC Timing Adjustment Adjust the ADC timing in the following procedure Adjusting procedure gt The board to be adjusted is the DI board 1st board from the right in circuit board rack 1 Measure voltage across check pins TP1 TP2 G DI board and across TP14 GND LOG AMP board using a synchroscope 2 Rotate the reaction disk using the mechanism check operation of the instrument check program and adju
304. th MR Stat sample RC a D d Control sample With or without F Calibration sample Both G photometry assay Calibration sample H ISE Routine sample without N N 7 Stat sample Mic Ud ac Absorbance in entire Both reaction process routine Absorbance in entire K reaction process stat Supplementary Explanation 1 In the function character form for analytical data the upper case letters are used for real time communication and the lower case letters for batch communication 2 Intransfer from the analyzer to the host batch communication for test selecting information inquiry is not carried out Only in simple analysis mode setting 3 Batch communication for analytical data transfer indicates a communication when specified through the screen 16 38 2 5 characters Sample Information a Composition of sample information Transfer sequence a gt Sample No 5 characters Unassigned 1 character Position No 3 characters ID No 13 characters Unassigned 15 characters mpm 6 characters 4 characters b Details of sample information Table 16 24 shows the details of sample information Table 16 24 Details of Sample Information Item Sample Name Remarks Routine Sample Stat Sample Control Sample sample No Transfer sequence Transfer sequence Transfer sequence From analyzer to host 7 J TS inquiry in the ID m
305. the reagent disk and detergent volume An example of specification is shown below TG 38 350 1 T Carry Detergent set position Detergent discharge CH1 to 36 W1 System water Cell washing cycle When detergent discharge volume exceeds 350 uL detergent is discharged by using 2 timings among the 3 timings R1 R2 R3 for reagent aspiration and discharge in one cycle Example of evading procedure An example of carry over evading procedure is shown below A to E represent tests and W stands for washing Carry over Evasion specified Test Example of Evading Procedure A a th cycle C a 1 th cycle D W E GG c Evasion of sample carry over due to sample probe and washing for evasion Condition for carry over evasion oample carry over is prevented by washing the sample probe Il Method of carry over evasion The sample probe is washed at the timing just before pipetting the sample whose measurement includes a sample carry over washing specified test between sample pipettings The sample probe is washed by the following method The determined volume 65 uL of detergent is aspirated from the specified washing cup on the sample disk and discharged into the washing bath where the sample probe is washed with water At this time stirring is not made I Tests with sample probe washing Tests of control sample and standard solution are excluded IV Sample probe washi
306. time mode from analyzer Analytical data transfer requested through screen MOR HPR analytical data transfer MOR final HPR analytical data transfer analytical data transfer MOR final LPR analytical data transfer SPE ANY after TS registration REC ANY MOR ANY 16 6 Text Configuration Table Table 16 9 shows the text configuration corresponding to the contents of each frame Table 16 9 Text Configuration Corresponding to Contents of Each Frame Text Type Text Item Relevant Maximum Number Contents of Text Fu Function character Frame of Characters eae ot n feature of STX ETX communication Analyzer Boc m Analyzer Boc Analytical data HES 40 HOST request for specific sample information ETX BCC eques information information Analytical data Routine stat and FR1 to END Variable Analyzer process pue Text No STD count Calibration alarm STD data 1 STD data 6 SD value information ISE calibration ity ISE calibration data Supplementary Explanation 1 Table 16 9 shows the text configuration when text size is 512 bytes When a text size of 256 bytes is specified for analytical data text two or more texts may be constituted So refer to the description concerned 2 Since there are 4 end of data codes besides ETX alone attention should be paid when setting or referring to a text 16 24 Reference Page Abs
307. tion Extinguished MERR Red Parity error SRAM or main memory on CPU board NI O1 Miscellaneous No Name Meaning Resetting of CPU board and system NMI to MPU Debugging monitor port 4 channel serial communication port Insert AUI connector OI 3 Setting of DIP Switch The DIP switch on the front panel is divided into operation mode setting part SW 1 2 3 4 which determines operation at startup of the CPU board and program boot setting part SW5 6 7 8 CPU board and can be read via software SW1 SW5 D3 Explanation of SW1 Bits Switch No Bit Operation Mode D6 D5 D4 0 0 Normal processing mode 0 0 Reserve 0 1 0 Reserve _0 1 1 Reserve 1 Continuous processing mode memory BRAM 1 Continuous processing mode EEPROM 0 Reserve _0 0 0 Reserve _0 0 1 Reserve _0 1 0 Reserve _0 1 1 Reserve 1 0 0 T Mmode 1 _1_ 0 1 TMmode2 1 1 0 TMmode3 T M mode 4 Switch No Bit D2 Di DO o o scsidevice HID etc 0 o 1 FD 1 0 Reseve 1 1 Reseve 1 0 0 Reserve 1 o 1 VO file ROM 1 1 0 EEPROM Ethernet Memory dump with boot Memory dump with any other than boot I O This switch setting is reflected on the system status register on the External
308. tituted by the cell washing process Therefore only the cell washing is carried out omitting the reagent probe washing As for sample probe washing and cell washing priority is given to cell washing For sample probe washing and reagent probe washing priority is given to sample probe washing When reagent probe washing R1 R2 or R3 and cell washing become necessary simultaneously with the same cell the next cell can be used for preventing overflow if the total volume in a cell exceeds 540 uL 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS Model 902 Operating 4 1 mino 4 2 4 2 1 Measuring Principle 4 2 Block Wiring 4 6 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 4 1 Model 902 Operating Principle A CASS Interface Rinse water Reagent pipetter pump pipetter Multiwavelength photometer p TP h ub a Reagent pipetting Serum sampling Z Reaction disk 47 Cass mechanism A LCD with touch panel OD Sample disk Incubation bath Reagent disk Floppy disk mechanism 2 Fig 4 1 System Configuration of 902 4 2 Principle of 902 4 2 1 Measuring Principle The measuring principle of the 902 will be explained by dividing it into operation of mechanisms analytical flow and operating position 1 Operation of Mec
309. top bit Data 1 e Data 0 CTS OFF e ON Data 0 e Data 1 Data transfer prohibited e Data transfer allowed RTS OFF ON e Data 0 e Data 1 NOTE Data 0 and data 1 correspond to decimal numbers for the CPU to read write data respectively 16 9 4 RS 232C Communication 1 Connector Position Use the connector J402 on the rear panel of Model 902 2 Connecting Cable and Cable Length J402 uses a 15 pin interface connector female On the cable side use the following HDAB 15P made by Hirose Denki Cable length is limited to 15 m at maximum 3 Pin Arrangement Refer to 3 of 16 9 2 16 48 4 Example of Connection Host side Model 902 side TXD TXD 4 25 4 RTS RTS MEN DTS SG SG DCD DTR FG Solderless terminal screwed to the cubicle of operation block NOTE For solderless terminal refer to 5 below Fig 16 2 Example Connection for RS 232C Communication 5 Measure for FG FG is not assigned to the J402 connector So attach a solderless terminal to the FG cable of host computer and screw it on the cubicle of operation block as detailed below Requirements for FG cable See Fig 16 3 e Cable length 100 mm or longer e Solderless terminal For M4 screw 100 FG cable with solderless terminal Model 902 side Host side HDAB 15S made by Hirose Denki or equivalent Fig 16 3 Requirements for FG Cable e Fixing position Fix in the screw hole under J402 16 49 16 9 5 Cu
310. ttempted the analyzer side ignores it Trace will not be made either If no response is returned or an invalid response is received the recovery procedure is executed In case of sending from the host it must always be kept ready for receiving 4 Ifthe host did not return a response in the communication cycle NOTE communication from the analyzer alarm is displayed on the screen of analyzer NOTE Time period is changeable on the communication parameter screen It is defaulted to 2 Sec 16 9 16 4 3 Response to Information Message Described below are the typical procedure for returning a response to the information message and the procedure upon receiving the response 1 When there is no information to be sent analyzer lt gt host 2 Transfer of communication control message analyzer host 3 Transfer of test selecting information analyzer lt gt host 4 Transfer of analytical data analyzer host 5 gt Resending request analyzer lt gt host 1 When there is no Information to be Sent analyzer lt host Communication cycle or longer NOTE 2 Transfer sequence Within communication cycle NOTE 2 The analyzer continues returning the ANY frame in response to the frame from the host so as to respond to the request from the host at any time even when the analyzer and host have no information to be sent NOTE 1 In this case the analyzer sends the ANY frame at one commun
311. ture ADC Hardware Configuration of Temperature ADC Hardware Amplifier MPX Thermal sensor Buffer amplifier ADC controller feeler DPRAM Reference voltage 2 V ADC control Reference voltage 6 V n DLE Application software software w wF 1 y t de ha mui mi nas dme 1 The ADC controller converts the analog values of the temperature sensor reference voltage 2 V and reference voltage 6 V to the digital ones upon receiving the instruction from the application via the driver and stores the digital values into the DPRAM The values are taken in the application via the driver 2 The application accesses to the driver but does not control the ADC directly ADC Setting Parameters e Integration 32 times e Software trigger interval 30 msec 7 16 7 2 4 Temperature Measurement Data Flow Temperature Measurement Data Flow relative d ULONG 4 0 UCOUNT 0212 0 2 counter value Error Next storage pointer information 8 6 V counter value Error 2 information counter value Error ELONI N or incubator formation A 24 2nd counter value Average incubator Measurement 16 Error for incubator inforamtion e temperature in cycle 1 32 3rd counter value Eror Average of 4 4 Average incubator for incubator information J calculated temperature in cycle 2 40 4th counter
312. ty Data of 1200 cycles max conversation can be stored 16 8 6 Other Communication trace data is not stored under the following conditions 1 During printout of communication trace data 2 During deletion of communication trace data 16 9 Hardware Specifications 16 9 1 Overview The Model 902 can select the RS 232C interface or 20 mA current loop interface and can monitor the sent data via each interface 1 RS 232C Use the connector J402 on the RSDIST circuit board provided on the rear panel of Model 902 2 20 mA Current Loop Use the same connector J402 as for RS 232C Either RS 232C or 20 mA current loop is selectable by switch No 1 on the RSDIST board 3 Communication Monitor The data sent from the Model 902 can be monitored by using the connector J405 on the RSDIST board 16 44 16 9 2 RSDIST Board 1 External View J405 J409 communication monitor to EMIO100 circuit board 5 020 A 4402 SW 1 RS 232C current loop 2 Switch Setting 2 3 ON No 1 Current loop OFF RS 232C No 2 No 3 Always OFF OFF No 4 16 45 3 Pin Arrangement Table 16 26 Signal Assignment Pin No J402 RDAD 15P female side J405 RDBB 25S female side 2 RS 232C from host TXD s p jud _ 4 s Communication monitor 5 CTS RS 232C 6 7 56 8 jess Communication monitor 18 wrentloop
313. umidity 35 to 85 RH or less without condensation Operating atmosphere Corrosive gas unallowable External dimensions 190 W x 110 H x 58 D mm Weight 0 7 kg or less e Specifications of Display Section Item Specifications STN dot matrix liquid Number of dots resolution 128 x 256 dots 0 407 mm square crystal display panel Effective display area 56 x 112 mm Angle of visibility 35 in left right direction 50 000 hours or longer Back light white cold Guaranteed for 10 000 hours average cathode ray tube 20 000 hours 10 min 1 hr or none Indication LED Lit with power supply turned on Lit during operation e Specifications of Operating Section Item Specifications Touch panel Number of switches Max 72 switches registrable on one panel Y6 x X12 switches Input Impact system Activation force 100 gf or less Service life 1 million times or more 15 15 e Specifications of Communication Item Specification Communication standard EIA RS 232C Communication parameters Start stop synchronization Transmission speed 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 in bps Data length or 8 bits otop bit 1072 bits Parity Even odd or none Flow control RS CS control XON XOFF control None Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female Number of connectable One to one units Transmission distance Max 15m e Setting of DIP Switch The operational status of NT20S is settable by the DIP switch at the bottom right on the rear face
314. ut 9 1 The ADC controller converts the analog values of the ISE electrodes and reference voltages V2 V8 VO to digital ones upon receiving an instruction from the application via the driver and stores the digital values into the DPRAM dual port RAM The values are taken into the application via the driver 2 The application accesses the driver but does not control the ADC directly 3 ADC input value Vout is as follows a When MPX selects Na electrode Vout 20 x Vn Vr Vos mV b When MPX selects K electrode Vout 20 x Vk Vr Vos mV c When selects electrode Vout 20 x Vcl Vr Vos mV d When MPX selects Ref electrode Vout Vr Vos mV e When MPX selects reference voltage V2 Vout 2 000 5 mV f When MPX selects reference voltage V8 Vout 8 000 5 mV 9 When MPX selects reference voltage VO Vout Vos mV NOTES 1 The unitis mV 2 Each AMP offset voltage is included in Vos 3 With the 902 Vos 1 110 mV 5 4 15 Measurement Sequence For the dilution bath in ISE measurement be sure to use two connected reaction cuvettes 1 Sample Pipetting S probe SMP Cuvetteno 2 m Sample pipetting volume Fixed at 10 uL Cycle no 11 12 13 otop no 1 1 1 2 Diluent Pipetting Water Stirring DIL SMP Diluent pipetting volume Fixed at 308 uL Water Fixed at 182 uL n
315. ver more than one text FR1 is used for the first text and END for the final text End alone is used when analytical data for one sample can be sent in a single text These frames are used to send analytical data For analytical data transfer 5 RES Used to request analytical data of a specific sample from HOST to AU Whether ID is provided or not routine and stat samples alone are taken as valid and the others are ignored 6 ANY Any Positive response Used by AU to ask HOST for the following items inquiry corresponding to 1 TS information prosess ACK 2 HOST s initiation of rerun sample 3 RES REC frame request Repeat AU HOST Means that HOST is ready to receive analytical data Analytical data can be transferred from AU to HOST only when HOST has sent this frame Negative response correcponding to NAK Used when resending for the previous communication is requested HOST can send REP at any time but AU sends it only when the text from HOST is destroyed and resends the same text in any other case 8 9 9 505 Suspend 40 AU HOST Suspension request cont d Meaning Sent by AU to suspend resending of a non specific inquiry and allow a specific inquiry Sent HOST to suspend communication for one communication cycle or longer without recording the last communication by AU Used to request AU to suspend communication for one co
316. very wavelength Photometry assay only In 1 point or 2 point assay with prozone check the prozone error is indicated if prozone is detected Prozone check is performed by comparing the prozone value hereafter referred to as PC value obtained from calculation mentioned below with the prozone limit value preset on the chemistry parameter screen For the lower prozone limit the prozone error is indicated if the PC value is smaller For the upper prozone limit the error is indicated if the PC value is larger In the event of prozone error the relevant PC value is also printed out only in real time monitor printing mode cont d Remedy In 1 point amp rate rate A or rate B assay check is not carried out for the interval to determine the absorbance change rate if an ascending reaction setting is made for that interval Dilute the sample or reduce its volume and then perform measurement again Set the sample correctly Prepare the reagent again Prozone check values are printed out only in the real time monitor printing mode Delution or retest with decreased volume is performed For no check enter 32000 lower limit at Prozone limit value on the parameter setting menu screen 1 cont d Data Alarm Printer Remedy Prozone error E indicates a prozone value Shown below are the expressions for calculation of the PC value Assuming that the
317. when 999 is specified for the reagent volume having a timing behind the reaction time an error occurs Operation is unallowable he final liquid volume is a total volume of sample and reagent within 250 to 500 The setting of formula number corresponding to the relevant code is improper 1 An unmeasurable test is specified for compensation 2 A compensated test is not included in the formula 3 In photometry assay for compensated test the electrolyte parameter is specified d Check parameter If the improper condition indicated by alarm can be detected correction and reentry are required Call up calculation item screen and check the compensation formula on it d Alarm Control Category Level Description Remedy No 52 1to SERUM 1 to 36 WARNING 1 Although the sub code Check parameter 5356 INDEXES ch corresponds to the for serum indexes serum index measurement test the rate A assay is not assigned Although the sub code corresponds to the serum index measurement test and sample blank is to be corrected reagent 2 discharge is specified Analysis does not start 5431 ON BOARD WARNING There is no measurable Check each channel parameter There is no channel for which necessary reagent has been prepared Analysis does not start 5441 REAG POS 107 1 to 38 WARNING 1 The reagent position Check each

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

English - Fantec  Evolution Next 7412  トプコングループ環境報告書2005    品質マニュアル  ココットコンパクトW    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file